Home

HP 11807E, Option 014 AMPS/NAMPS/DAMPS/DCCH

1. 30 ON ERROR GOTO 80 Exits at end of file if an error is encountered 40 LOOP Extracts file contents 50 ENTER File A Transfers part of the file to the string 60 OUTPUT 9 AS The string is output at the serial port 70 END LOOP Goes back to get more of the file 80 END End of the program 6 Press the k1 Run key to run the entered IBASIC program The Run field and the Run Test field do not perform the same function The Run field assigned as a default in the TESTS IBASIC Controller screen will start an IBASIC program that is resident in the Test Set memory The Run Test field assigned as a default in the other TESTS screens will load and run the program that is called from the Select Procedure Filename and Select Procedure Location entries in the TESTS Main Menu screen Chapter 6 Reference Memory Cards Memory Cards Insert a memory PC card into the card slot on the Test Set s front panel The Test Set powers the PC card while the card is inserted Arrows printed on the PC card and the Test Set s front panel indicate the direction and orientation of card insertion D p h O O Ss 7 p Use PC cards to store or retrieve the following e Software code e An HP supplied Procedure that contains e A default TEST sequence e Default parameter values e Default pass fail limit specification values e A Library file e Procedures that you construct and that are
2. Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions RXA RF Sensitivity vs Channel Plotted NOTE 248 Stop Channel Number 1 799 991 1023 This parameter allows you to specify the stop channel to be used in constructing a plot of the cellular telephone receiver sensitivity in relation to channel numbers in RF sensitivity testing The value is entered as an integer in the ranges 1 through 799 and 991 through 1023 Example If you wish to stop the plot at channel 500 enter 500 RF Level for SINAD Test 30 to 120 dBm This parameter allows you to specify the receiver input s RF signal level for measuring SINAD on wide voice channels at the nominal power supply voltage The value is entered as a real number in dBm and in the range 30 through 120 Example If you wish to set the receiver input RF signal level to 116 dBm enter 116 RF Lvl for SINAD at Extreme Supply Volt 30 to 120 dBm This parameter allows you to specify the RF signal level for measuring SINAD on wide voice channels at extreme supply voltage conditions The value is entered as a real number in dBm and in the range 30 through 120 The Test at Extreme Supply Voltages parameter must be set to Yes for this parameter to be active see GEN Modify External Power Supply Parameters on page 117 Example If you wish to use an RF signal level of 90 dBm enter 90 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions RXA RF Sensitivity vs Channel P
3. F me e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXA Current Drain Configuring the Rear Panel DC Current Measurement NOTE Parameters Used 184 The dc current measurement function must be zeroed prior to the measurement Press the TESTS key The TESTS Main Menu screen will appear From the To Screen list select AF ANL to switch to the AF ANALYZER screen Move the cursor to the DC Current field and select it this should be done before any current is applied to the Test System s measurement terminals This zeroes the dc current measurement function Use a power supply that provides the appropriate voltage and current for your cellular telephone Connect the positive lead of the power supply to the positive terminal banana of the dc current measurement connectors in the lower left area of the Test Set s rear panel Connect the negative terminal banana of the dc current measurement connector to the positive terminal of the cellular telephone s power supply input Connect the negative terminal of the power supply directly to the negative terminal of the cellular telephone s power supply input The Test System automatically measures the current passing through the rear panel connection Make certain that there is no HP IB power supply configured in the TESTS External Devices screen see Configuring an HP IB Power Supply on page 183 One parameter is used in t
4. Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions CP Page from Digital Control Channel to Digital Traffic Channel Digital Traffic Channel Power Level 0 10 This parameter allows you to specify the power level at which the cellular telephone will transmit when it is paged to a digital traffic channel The value is entered as an integer in the range 0 through 10 Example If you wish to use power level 10 enter 10 Cellular Digital Traffic Channel Vocoder VSELP A CELP This parameter allows you to specify the type of speech decoding used during cellular digital traffic channel transmission If the firmware revision in the HP 8920B is B 05 00 or later this parameter is used when performing tests on IS 136 capable cellular telephones Example Two selections are provided in a one of many format VSELP or ACELP Selecting VSELP causes the Test System to use Vector Sum Excited Linear Predictive coding VSELP Selecting ACELP causes the Test System to use Algebraic Code Excited Linear Predictive coding ACELP Pass Fail Limits Used 142 No pass fail limits specifications are used in the CP Page from Digital Control Channel to Digital Traffic Channel Operation Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions CP Origination from Analog Control Channel to Analog Voice Channel CP Origination from Analog Control Channel to Analog Voice Channel Parameters Used This Operation simulates a call from the cellular telephone to the base station cell si
5. SINAD is the ratio expressed in dB of Signal Noise Distortion to Noise Distortion The receiver s SINAD is measured at the receiver audio output at the RF level specified by the RF Level for SINAD Test on N AVC parameter This measurement differs from a distortion measurement in that it is conducted at low RF input levels where the noise contribution is significant Receivers are typically required to provide at least 12 dB SINAD less than 25 percent noise and distortion for RF input levels below 1 microvolt In this Operation the Test System modulates the RF signal to deviate to 3 kHz at a 1 kHz rate with a digital supervisory audio tone DSAT present This Operation is ordinarily performed at the nominal supply voltage but it may be performed with high and low supply voltages for extreme measurements In such case the measurement is repeated at high and low supply voltages if the Test at Extreme Supply Voltages parameter is set to Yes If the Test at Extreme Supply Voltages parameter is set to Yes see GEN Modify External Power Supply Parameters on page 117 so that output power measurements are made at high supply voltage and low supply voltage this Operation requires a properly configured programmable power supply see TXA Current Drain on page 182 243 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 F me e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions RXA RF Sensitivity Narrow Analog Voice Channe
6. Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions GEN Modify Execution Parameters Units for Power Measurement W dBW or dBm This parameter allows you to specify the measurement units to be used in cellular telephone transmitter testing It affects the pass fail limits specifications for Level 0 through Level 7 in the TXA RF Power Output on page 205 and the TXA RF Power Output vs Channel Plotted on page 209 and for Level 0 through Level 10 in the TXD RF Power Output on page 264 and the TXD RF Power Output vs Channel Plotted on page 269 Three selections are provided in a one of many format W dBW and dBm Selecting W causes the Test System to use the watt as the unit of measurement selecting dBW causes the Test System to use decibels relative to 1 watt and selecting dBm causes the Test System to use decibels relative to 1 milliwatt Example If you wish to use watts as the unit of measurement select W Print Opt s MV P F MV amp PF MV amp Limits amp P F or Limits amp P F This parameter controls the appearance of the printout if an external printer is being used Five selections are provided in a one of many format These are MV Measured Value causes only the measured value of the selected test to be printed P F Pass Fail causes a pass or fail indication to be printed This denotes only that the value is within the established limits Pass or is not Fail It does not print either the value or the limi
7. F 83 1 7 181 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 F me e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXA Current Drain TXA Current Drain This Operation measures the average power supply current drawn by the cellular telephone transmitter when it is keyed The transmitter current drain is expressed in amperes This Operation measures current drain using either of two methods dependent upon whether an external HP IB programmable power supply is available The Test System determines this at the beginning of the Operation If an HP IB power supply has been configured the current drain is measured via the programmable power supply over the HP IB see Configuring the Rear Panel DC Current Measurement on page 184 If an HP IB power supply is not available the Test System measures current drain through the rear panel dc current measurement capability of the Test System see Configuring the Rear Panel DC Current Measurement on page 184 This Operation is not specified by EIA TIA standards A Hewlett Packard programmable dc power supply is required for this Operation if an HP IB power supply is to be configured A power supply with sufficient voltage and current capabilities from the following series must be used e HP 664xA e HP 665xA e HP 667xA e HP 668xA 182 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXA Current Drain Configuring an HP IB Power Supply The following procedure describes configur
8. e z o wn 2 5 Ss Ke Chapter 5 Problem Solving Error Messages Error Message Reference 302 The following error messages are possible ADC overdriven Absolute value of the peak sample is at the ADC full scale The analog to digital converter in the HP 83206A TDMA Cellular Adapter must not be overdriven This message might be displayed if the transmitter is not being set to the correct power levels e Check the level of the RF signal being applied to the Test Set 1 Press the DUPLEX key 2 Read the value on the power meter 3 Compare this value with the power setting of the cellular telephone The test will continue with this error present and the results will be displayed However performance might be degraded ADC underdriven Absolute value of the peak sample is less than 30 dB below FS of the ADC The analog to digital converter in the HP 83206A TDMA Cellular Adapter must have sufficient level applied O Check the level of the RF signal being applied to the Test Set 1 Press the DUPLEX key 2 Read the value on the power meter 3 Compare this value with the output power setting of the cellular telephone The test will continue with this error present and the results will be displayed However performance might be degraded Chapter 5 Problem Solving Error Messages An error free sync word was not found The SyncLoc result is not valid The Test Set was unable to use the synchronization
9. 293 Chapter 5 Problem Solving Introduction Introduction This chapter contains problem modules and error messages Problem modules alphabetically list the location of the problem with a brief symptom for example Test Set Doesn t Power Up Each problem module describes possible causes and corrections The error messages section is located at the end of the chapter and provides a brief description of the message as well as possible corrective actions If a problem persists call the HP Factory Hotline from anywhere in the USA 1 800 922 8920 8 30 am 5 00 pm Pacific time in the USA and Canada only NOTE Tf the Test Set displays an error that states One or more self tests failed this indicates a hardware problem In this case refer to the Test Set s Assembly Level Repair manual The following subjects are covered in this chapter Data Collection Function Does Not Work on page 295 Memory Space Problems on page 297 Printing Problems on page 298 Test Results Are Unexpected on page 299 Test Set Doesn t Power Up on page 300 Error Messages on page 301 294 Chapter 5 Problem Solving Data Collection Function Does Not Work U e z o wn 2 5 Ss Ke Data Collection Function Does Not Work O Verify that you have entered DATA C in the TESTS External Devices screen 1 Press the TESTS key The TESTS Main Menu screen will appear 2 From the SET UP TEST SET list select Cnfg E
10. This parameter allows you to specify whether testing will be performed at extreme supply voltages for any test in which testing at those voltages is possible Two selections are provided in a toggle format Yes and No Selecting Yes causes the measurements to be performed at high and low supply voltage settings in addition to measurements at the nominal supply voltage setting Selecting No causes measurement at only the nominal supply voltage setting Low Supply Voltage 0 20 This parameter allows you to specify the low voltage to be supplied by the programmable power supply and used in the test as the low extreme voltage The value is entered as a real number in the range 0 through 20 117 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 2 z pei e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions GEN Modify External Power Supply Parameters Nominal Supply Voltage 0 20 This parameter allows you to specify the nominal voltage to be supplied by the programmable power supply and used in the test as the nominal voltage The value is entered as a real number in the range 0 through 20 High Supply Voltage 0 20 This parameter allows you to specify the high voltage to be supplied by the programmable power supply and used in the test as the high extreme voltage The value is entered as a real number in the range 0 through 20 Pass Fail Limits Used 118 No pass fail limits specifications are used in the GEN Modify Externa
11. 135 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 2 z pei e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions CP Page from Digital Control Channel to Analog Voice Channel Parameters Used The parameters used in the CP Page from Digital Control Channel to Analog Voice Channel Operation are Source for Phone Number Use Prev Ph Below Prompt Phone Number 0 Use from Reg Orig 2 to 9999999999 SAT Tone 5970 6000 or 6030 Hz Analog Voice Channel Power Level 0 7 These parameters are described in the following paragraphs 136 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions CP Page from Digital Control Channel to Analog Voice Channel Source for Phone Number Use Prev Ph Below Prompt This parameter allows you to specify the location from which the Test System will obtain the cellular telephone number Three selections are provided in a one of many format Use Prev or Phone Below and Prompt Selecting Use Prev causes the Test System to use the mobile identification number MIN obtained in a prior Registration or Origination Operation If there was no prior Registration or Origination Operation the Test System will prompt you to enter the telephone number Selecting Phone Below causes the Test System to use the Phone Number O Use from Reg Orig parameter to obtain the cellular telephone number Selecting Prompt causes the Test System to prompt you to enter the telephone number Phone Number 0 Use from Reg Ori
12. CP Page from Digital Control Channel to Analog Voice Channel 134 CP Page from Digital Control Channel to Digital Traffic Channel 137 CP Registration on Analog Control Channel 119 CP Registration on Digital Control Channel 121 CP Release to Analog Control Channel 163 CP Release to Digital Control Channel 166 GEN Modify Analog Control Channel Parameters 115 GEN Modify Digital Control Channel Parameters 117 GEN Modify Execution Parameters 112 GEN Modify External Power Supply Parameters 114 MISC Battery Life on Analog Control Channel Standby 280 MISC Battery Life on Analog Voice Channel Transmit 276 MISC Battery Life on Digital Control Channel Standby 283 MISC Battery Life on Digital Traffice Channel Transmit 278 MISC Digital Talk Back 284 MISC No Receiver Audio Functional 286 MISC TX Qualitative Audio 285 RXA Audio Distortion 218 RXA Audio Frequency Response 222 RXA Expandor 226 RXA Forward Voice Channel Order Message Error Rate 230 RXA Hum and Noise 231 RXA Mobile Reported Interference 234 RXA RF Sensitivity 237 RXA RF Sensitivity vs Channel Plot ted 244 RXA RF Sensitivity Narrow Analog Voice Channel 240 RXD Receiver Sensitivity 272 RXD Receiver Sensitivity Loopback Index 275 TXA Audio Distortion 169 TXA Audio Frequency Response 171 TXA Compressor Response 174 TXA Current Drain 180 TXA Digital Signaling Tone Deviaton and Code 183 TXA Digita
13. Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions RXA Forward Voice Channel Order Message Error Rate Pass Fail Limits Used One pass fail limits specification is used in the RXA Forward Voice Channel Order Message Error Rate Operation It is Order Message Error Rate OMER This specification is described in the following paragraphs Order Message Error Rate OMER This specification sets the pass fail limits for testing the receiver as it processes the forward voice channel FVC order message The value is entered as a decimal number as an upper limit only and as a percentage Pass fail limits specifications are determined using any applicable standard such as e EIA Standard FVC Order Message Example If you determine that the order message error rate should not exceed 5 percent enter 5 as the upper limit 235 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 2 z pei e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions RXA Hum and Noise RXA Hum and Noise NOTE Audio connections from the cellular telephone to the Test System are required for this Operation This Operation measures the ratio expressed in dB of the cellular telephone s residual audio output in the absence of modulation to the rated audio output Also this Operation uses the C Message audio filter or the CCITT audio filter if it is installed in the Test System Specifically in this Operation the Test System does the following 1 Applies a
14. The term Operation refers to any of the primary testing functions of the Test Software In the steps in this manual the following words are used to describe cursor and entry actions e select refers to positioning the cursor to the left of the desired field inverse video area then pressing the cursor control knob e enter means to use the numeric keypad and the ENTER key or measurement units keys to make entries to fields In some procedures enter is used to describe the action of entering characters into a field Additional Services Consult the HP 8920B Users Guide or call the HP 8920 Hotline 1 800 922 8920 Available In USA and Canada only and give your software model number Contact your local HP Sales Representative for information about the Software Upgrade Service and the Start Up Assistance Training Course Contents v Z D e a i fe O 0 1 Getting Started What You Will Test 20 Making Connections 23 Setup and Software Card Loading 24 Selecting and Running the Initial Tests 26 Contents 2 Product Description Test Software 30 Hardware Considerations 32 Tests Subsystem 41 Contents 3 Using the Software Introduction 66 Connecting Equipment 67 Calibrating Cable Loss 72 Testing Overview 73 Using Common Processes 79 Customizing Testing 94 10 4 Operation Descriptions Introduction 102 Testing Strategy 104 GEN Modify Execution Parameters 110 GEN Modify Extern
15. These parameters are described in the following paragraphs 149 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 2 z pei e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions CP Origination from Digital Control Channel to Analog Voice Channel SAT Tone 5970 6000 or 6030 Hz This parameter allows you to specify the frequency of the supervisory audio tone that will be used on all analog voice channels A supervisory audio tone SAT is an out of voice band audio tone that is used for cell site identification Three selections are provided in a one of many format 5970 6000 and 6030 Hz One of the three tones is added to the voice transmission of all calls within an individual cell The cellular telephone then detects the tone and modulates the transmitted voice channel carrier with a constant relative phase tone that is filtered or regenerated from the received tone to establish a closed loop between the cellular telephone and the cell site Transmission of the SAT by a cellular telephone is suspended during transmission of wideband data on the reverse voice channel RVC but is not suspended when the signaling tone ST is sent Example If you wish to use 6000 Hz as the SAT select 6000 Analog Voice Channel Power Level 0 7 This parameter allows you to specify the power level at which the cellular telephone will transmit when it is paged to an analog voice channel The value is entered as an integer in the range 0 throu
16. This screen displays all of the Operation pass fail limits specifications available in the library grouped by Operation Selecting the Operation from the menu updates the screen to display all of the relevant pass fail limits specifications for the Operation Any of the Operations in the library may be selected Defaults may be changed to create a tailored set of pass fail limits specifications that apply to all of the Operations The following paragraphs describe the various fields of this screen see figure 23 on page 63 Check Field Selecting this field allows you to select whether the Operation will verify only the upper only the lower both or none of the specified limits Selecting both upper and lower limits increases test time but might be required for some Operations Help Field Selecting this field or pressing k4 displays the help screen that contains assistance information in the TESTS Set Up Pass Fail Limits screen Lower Limit Field Selecting this field allows you to set the lower limit to be compared with the measured result If the measured result is below this limit the test fails Operation Field This is the field near the top of the display see figure 23 on page 63 It identifies the Operation for which the parameter values can be set Selecting this field and turning the CURSOR CONTROL knob scrolls through a menu that contains all of the Operations in the library Selecting an Operation in the menu update
17. 108 139 O pe o 2 e 3 is D 77 9 me e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions CP Page from Digital Control Channel to Digital Traffic Channel Parameters Used The parameters used in the CP Page from Digital Control Channel to Digital Traffic Channel Operation are Source for Phone Number Use Prev Ph Below Prompt Phone Number 0 Use from Reg Orig 2 to 9999999999 Digital Traffic Channel DVCC 1 255 Digital Traffic Channel Slot 1 3 Digital Traffic Channel Power Level 0 10 Cellular Digital Traffic Channel Vocoder VSELP ACELP These parameters are described in the following paragraphs 140 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions CP Page from Digital Control Channel to Digital Traffic Channel Source for Phone Number Use Prev Ph Below Prompt This parameter allows you to specify the location from which the Test System will obtain the cellular telephone number Three selections are provided in a one of many format Use Prev or Phone Below and Prompt Selecting Use Prev causes the Test System to use the mobile identification number MIN obtained in a prior Registration or Origination Operation If there was no prior Registration or Origination Operation the Test System will prompt you to enter the telephone number Selecting Phone Below causes the Test System to use the Phone Number O Use from Reg Orig parameter to obtain the cellular telephone number Selecti
18. 128 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions CP Page from Analog Control Channel to Narrow Analog Voice Channel CP Page from Analog Control Channel to Narrow Analog Voice Channel This Operation simulates a call to the cellular telephone from the base station NOTE This is a NAMPS only operation The channels must indicate the offset desired U Upper M Middle or L Lower NOTE For information on explicit and implicit call processing see Testing Strategy on page 108 Specifically in this Operation the Test System does the following 1 Performs a page to the cellular telephone 2 Performs 3 of 5 majority voting on the Reverse Control Message 3 Tests each section of the page response bit by bit 4 Sends an Initial Voice Channel Designation order to the cellular telephone directing it to tune to the narrow analog voice channel specified in the Channe1s field of the TESTS Set Up screen 5 Sends an ALERT order to the cellular telephone by way of the forward voice channel FVC 6 Checks the digital supervisory audio tone DSAT on the initial voice channel to verify that the voice channel was obtained The DSAT measurement result is not displayed on this Operation Parameters Used The parameters used in the CP Page from Analog Control Channel to Narrow Analog Voice Channel Operation are Source for Phone Number Use Prev Ph Below Prompt Phone Number 0 Use from Reg Orig 2 to 9999999999 DSAT Vector
19. 77 F me e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXD RF Power Output vs Channel Plotted Pass Fail Limits Used The pass fail limits specifications used in the TXD RF Power Output vs Channel Plotted Operation are Output Power at Level 0 Output Power at Level 1 Output Power at Level 2 Output Power at Level 3 Output Power at Level 4 Output Power at Level 5 Output Power at Level 6 Output Power at Level 7 Output Power at Level 8 Output Power at Level 9 Output Power at Level 10 These specifications are described in the following paragraphs 272 NOTE Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXD RF Power Output vs Channel Plotted Output Power at Levels 0 through 10 These specifications set the pass fail limits for output power levels 0 through 10 as measured in digital tests at the transmitter output terminal Each power level limit is separate and may be set as required The values are entered as decimal numbers and in watts or dBm Measurement units for the specification are set by the Units for Power Measurement parameter see GEN Modify Execution Parameters on page 114 Pass fail limits specifications are determined using any applicable standard such as e EIA TIA Standard Transmitter Output Power Values for power levels in the standard are for effective radiated power ERP and not as measured directly from the cellular telephone Power levels will be higher when measured directly from t
20. 9 The duplex output connector is used to supply the signal output from the Test Set s RF Generator and Tracking Generator EXT SCOPE TRIGGER INPUT Connector On Rear Panel 10 The external scope trigger input connector is used to supply a trigger to the internal oscilloscope HP IB Connector On Rear Panel 11 The HP IB connector is used to provide an interface between the Test Set and external equipment that uses the Hewlett Packard Interface Bus HP IB PCMCIA Card Slot 12 The card slot is used to accept and insert a PCMCIA card to the Test Set MIC ACC Connector 13 The microphone accessory DIN connector is used for the following functions The Mic In connection is summed with the MODULATION INPUT connector signal to modulate the RF Generator of the Test Set when the Key In connection is grounded The Key In connection is used to control the RF Generator output state and to control switching between certain screens The Key Out and Key Out 2 connections are used to provide a switch path for external equipment MODULATION INPUT Connector On Rear Panel 14 The modulation input connector is used to supply an external modulation signal to the RF Generator of the Test Set This signal is summed with the Mic In signal from the MIC ACC connector RADIO INTERFACE Connector On Rear Panel 15 The radio interface connector is used to provide a 16 line parallel interface between the Test Set and external radio eq
21. A scheme for signal multiplexing that uses simultaneous transmission of two tones one from a group of low frequencies and another from a group of high frequencies Each group in turn consists of four frequencies Each key of the numeric keypad on a cellular phone is identified by two of these signals which are transmitted when the key is pressed DVCC See digital verification color code electro static discharge ESD A transfer of static electricity from one point to another Electronic devices can be damaged by the energy transferred during the discharge 353 Aiesso 5 354 Glossary Epson card A type of PC card that meets the requirements of the Epson standard Such cards are used for static random access memory SRAM or for one time programmable memory ESD See electro static discharge explicit handoff A type of handoff in which a Handoff Operation is included in the process so as to allow for customized parameters and pass fail limits specifications FACCH See fast associated control channel fast associated control channel A logical control channel that is associated with a TCH or SDCCH and that is used to perform handovers and call establishment or termination of a TCH or SDCCH field An area on the Test Set screen in which entries may be made It is identified with an inverse video display A selectable location on the Test Set screen function A particular field feature or oper
22. Digital Traffic Channel Power Level 0 10 This parameter allows you to specify the power level at which the cellular telephone will transmit when it is paged to a digital traffic channel The value is entered as an integer in the range 0 through 10 Example If you wish to use power level 10 enter 10 Cellular Digital Traffic Channel Vocoder VSELP A CELP This parameter allows you to specify the type of speech decoding used during cellular digital traffic channel transmission If the firmware revision in the HP 8920B is B 05 00 or later this parameter is used when performing tests on IS 136 capable cellular telephones Example Two selections are provided in a one of many format VSELP or ACELP Selecting VSELP causes the Test System to use Vector Sum Excited Linear Predictive coding VSELP Selecting ACELP causes the Test System to use Algebraic Code Excited Linear Predictive coding ACELP Pass Fail Limits Used No pass fail limits specifications are used in the CP Origination from Digital Control Channel to Digital Traffic Channel Operation 152 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions CP Handoff from Analog Voice Channel to Analog Voice Channel CP Handoff from Analog Voice Channel to Analog Voice Channel NOTE Parameters Used This Operation performs an explicit handoff from one analog voice channel to another analog voice channel For information on explicit and implicit call processing see Testing Strategy
23. Getting Started Making Connections Making Connections Connect the Test Set to the cellular telephone as shown in figure 2 Q 5 o D Qa To Antenna a Connections 4 A N r f Hand held Mobile Transportable Cellular A Cellular Cellular Telephone Z Telephone Telephone OFOG GO agaga ooo pey Antenna Power Connection Supply ll Figure 2 Equipment Connections 23 Chapter 1 Getting Started Setup and Software Card Loading Setup and Software Card Loading Set up the Test Set and insert the Test Software card as shown in figure 3 The first screen to appear during the power up sequence is shown in figure 4 on page 25 The screen that appears when you press the TESTS key is shown in figure 5 on page 25 Perform steps lf after step 5 a screen PRESET is a reset that 1 5 in order appears as shown in figure can be used at any time 5 power up is complete to re start Press Press TESTS 4 PRESET COCELIC m a EET q amo nn nnmn gt wa 00 00
24. Magnitude Error This specification sets the pass fail limits for the rms value of the magnitude error components of the error vectors measured over one burst The magnitude error component is the difference in amplitude at the detection decision points between the measured signal after root Nyquist filtering I Q origin offset removal burst amplitude droop removal and carrier frequency error removal and the ideal signal generated from the same data pattern The rms value is obtained by taking the square root of the sum of the squares of the individual values at each detection decision point over the measured burst Magnitude error is an indicator of the quality of the amplitude component of the 7 4 DQPSK signal and is one of the components that contribute to the error vector magnitude The value is entered as a decimal number as an upper limit only and as a percentage Pass fail limits specifications are determined using any applicable standard such as e EIA TIA Standard Modulation Accuracy Example If you determine that the rms magnitude error should be lt 10 percent enter 10 Burst Amplitude Droop This specification sets the pass fail limits for the burst amplitude droop rate Burst amplitude droop rate is the average rate of decay of the magnitude of the signal at the detection decision points across the measured burst Burst amplitude droop rate is expressed in dB symbol The value is entered as a decimal number as
25. and in the range 30 through 120 Pass Fail Limits Used 280 One pass fail limits specification is used in the RXD Receiver Sensitivity Loopback Operation It is BER This specifications is described in the following paragraphs BER This specification sets the pass fail limits for the bit error rate BER for a cellular telephone operating on a digital channel and being tested for receiver sensitivity in loopback mode The value is entered as a decimal number and as a percentage Pass fail limits specifications are determined using any applicable standard such as e EIA TIA Standard IS 137 Example If you determine that the BER Pass Fail Limit should be lt 3 percent enter 3 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions MISC Battery Life on Analog Voice Channel Transmit MISC Battery Life on Analog Voice Channel Transmit Parameters Used This Operation measures the continuous time that the cellular telephone can be turned on and transmitting at the specified power level before the telephone battery charge is depleted In this Operation the Test System monitors the status of the analog voice channel every 5 seconds As long as the cellular telephone remains on the analog voice channel the Test System concludes that the battery is still functional If the channel is dropped by the cellular telephone the Test System concludes that the battery charge is depleted and records and displays the time between the st
26. defined 346 data collection description 307 entering the configuration for 307 example configuration 308 memory card part numbers 322 retrieving data 310 319 325 saving to a memory card or disk 307 to a PC 312 to a PC setting up 314 data collection address error 297 data collection error 298 Data Collection Function Does Not Work 289 DATA FUNCTIONS keys 38 defined 346 DATA keys 37 defined 346 data syncronization error 301 dBm 286 DC CURRENT MEASUREMENT con nectors 35 DC INPUT connector 35 DCCH defined 346 DEFAULT procedure content 76 Default Tests Main Menu Screen 43 Del Proc 342 Del Step defined 346 Delet Stp 342 deleting a procedure 85 87 device under test defined 347 digital advanced mobile phone system defined 347 digital control channel defined 347 DIGITAL procedure content 76 digital signaling tone defined 347 359 digital supervisory audio tone defined 347 digital verification color code defined 347 disk initializing 318 initializing a RAM disk 335 retrieving data from 319 disk drive External Disk Specification 86 disk formats LIF and DOS 307 Disp Loc defined 347 Done 342 DOS disk format 307 DOS file type 307 downband defined 347 DSAT defined 347 DST defined 347 DTC defined 347 DTMF defined 347 dual tone multiple frequency defined 347 DUPLEX OUT connector 36 duplicate file error 297 360 E Edit Configuration data collec
27. e TIA Standard Sub Audible Data Example If you determine that the eye pattern closure must be greater than 65 enter 65 as the lower limit and 1 as the upper limit 193 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 F me e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXA Digital Supervisory Audio Tone Deviation Closure and Phase Jitter Figure 30 194 Relative Amplitude Closure Se C 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Time ms Transmit Data Eye Pattern Transmit Data Eye Pattern DSAT Closure DSAT Deviation This specification sets the pass fail limits that are used for peak frequency deviation measurements of the DSAT sequence transmitted by the cellular telephone on a narrow voice channel The values are entered as decimal numbers and as upper and lower limits Pass fail limits specifications are determined using any applicable standard such as e TIA Standard Sub Audible Data Example If the standard states that the peak frequency deviation for the DSAT sequence must be 700 Hz with a 10 percent tolerance enter 630 as the lower limit and 770 as the upper limit Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXA Digital Supervisory Audio Tone Deviation Closure and Phase Jitter DSAT Phase Jitter This specification sets the pass fail limits that are used when phase jitter of the eye pattern see figure 31 is measured for the DSAT transmitted by the cellular telephone on a narrow voice channel T
28. pressing the TESTS key or 2 pressing the k5 Main Menu key measurement A series of calculations performed by the Test Set on data supplied from a cellular telephone under test These calculations provide a value to be compared with pass fail limit values to verify the performance of the cellular telephone memory card A PCMCIA or Epson card used for data storage menu A part of the Test Set screen that displays a group of tasks from which to select using the CURSOR CONTROL knob or the USER keys message A block of text displayed on the Test Set screen that contains information of interest to the user such as control signaling or application information A message consists of a length field MSG_LENGTH a message body the part conveying the information and a CRC In the HP 11807E Test Software the upper portion of the Test Set screen is reserved for messages and prompts MIN See mobile identification number mobile cellular telephone A cellular telephone that is installed in a vehicle and may be used anywhere cellular telephone service is available It consists of a power supply handset transceiver and antenna It operates on dc power from the vehicle electrical system See also hand held cellular telephone and transportable cellular telephone mobile identification number MIN A 34 bit number that is a digital representation of the 10 digit directory telephone number assigned to a mobile station mob
29. s Select Procedure Filename field If the program is already loaded into the Test Set s memory it will be started Save Proc allows you to save the specified procedure Sngl Step allows you to step the IBASIC program one line at a time This is different from Continuous Single Step run mode D p h O O Ss 7 oO Stop Test allows you to pause the Test Software Take It allows you to direct the program to accept the setting of an adjustment and to proceed with the program The test determining if the adjustment is within limits is ceased Yes No allow you to answer questions displayed on the Test Set s display 349 Chapter 6 Reference USER Keys 350 Glossary ACC See analog control channel Access The Test Set state in which it is communicating with the mobile station under test ACCH See analog control channel Active A Test Set state in which it is emulating a base station In the Active state the Test Set is ready to communicate with the mobile station Advanced Mobile Phone System AMPS The analog cellular telephone system in use on the North American continent and other places AMPS See Advanced Mobile Phone System analog control channel ACC or ACCH A channel used for transmission of digital control information from a base station to a mobile station or from a mobile station to a base station annunciator A screen graphic that identifies the call processing state of t
30. securing a procedure 85 87 select defined 352 Selecting a Test Procedure 77 selecting and running tests in Getting Started 26 self test failed 288 sequence changing 97 defined 352 general description 97 serial number 118 120 Serial Port 339 serial port connections figure 340 SERIAL PORT connector 37 serial printer 330 serial printer connections 328 services available 5 setting test execution conditions 83 Setup 24 software 24 SETUP procedure content 76 SHIFT key 39 defined 353 SID defined 353 signal plus noise and distortion defined 353 signaling tone defined 353 Index signaling tone ST 168 SINAD defined 353 slow associated control channel defined 353 Sngl Step 342 softkey defined 353 softkeys 342 Software Card Loading 24 software features listing 31 software functions listing 31 software included 30 specifications defined 353 general description 99 Specifying Channel Information 96 specifying channel information general description 96 Specifying Pass Fail Limits 99 Specifying Test Parameters 98 Specifying the Order of Operations 97 SQUELCH control knob 40 SRAM defined 353 memory cards 321 322 SRAM card defined 353 ST defined 353 static random access memory defined 353 static random access memory card defined 353 Step defined 353 Stop Test 342 store defined 354 subsystem defined 354 suite defined 354 supervisory audio tone defined 35
31. such as e EIA TIA Standard IS 137 Example If you determine that the error vector magnitude should be lt 12 5 percent enter 12 5 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXD Modulation Accuracy 10 Burst Phase Error This specification sets the pass fail limits for the rms value of the phase error components of the error vectors measured over one burst The phase error component is the difference in phase at the detection decision points between the measured signal after root Nyquist filtering I Q origin offset removal burst amplitude droop removal and carrier frequency error removal and the ideal signal generated from the same data pattern The rms value is obtained by taking the square root of the sum of the squares of the individual values at each detection decision point over the measured burst Phase error is an indicator of the quality of the phase component of the 7 4 DQPSK signal and is one of the components that contribute to the error vector magnitude The value is entered as a decimal number as an upper limit only and as a percentage Pass fail limits specifications are determined using any applicable standard such as e EIA TIA Standard Modulation Accuracy Example If you determine that the rms phase error should be lt 10 percent enter 10 261 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 2 z pei e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXD Modulation Accuracy 10 Burst 262
32. upper limit for power levels of 0 through 7 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXA RF Power Output vs Channel Plotted Table 7 Power Levels Example Pawar Level Nominal Lower Limit Upper Limit Value dBW dBW dBW Level 0 6 2 8 Level 1 2 2 4 Level 2 2 6 0 Level 3 6 10 4 Level 4 10 14 8 Level 5 14 18 12 Level 6 18 22 16 Level 7 22 26 20 213 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 2 z pei 4 e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXA Signaling Tone Frequency and Deviation TXA Signaling Tone Frequency and Deviation Background Parameters Used 214 This Operation measures the frequency and deviation of the cellular telephone s signaling tone ST The Operation measures the signaling tone s ST frequency and peak deviation Since the SAT is always on in this Operation deviation is measured with the rms detector and both with ST on and with the ST off The peak deviation of the ST is calculated from the two readings ST on and ST off Therefore test results indicate peak deviation not peak or peak Since this Operation is run in the maintenance mode where the base station is waiting for an answer you must press the cellular telephone s SEND key to exit the test The ST is a 10 kHz tone generated by the cellular telephone on a wide voice channel It is transmitted to the cell si
33. when there is a change from one channel to another and the change is accomplished automatically with no Handoff Operation explicitly specified a handoff nonetheless takes place For purposes of description this is called an implicit handoff It offers less control because it uses default parameters Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions Testing Strategy Example Assume that for channel 100 in a test suite the Operations are as follows TXA Modulation Deviation Limiting on Analog Voice Channel TXD RF Power Output In these two Operations the first on an analog channel is followed directly by the second on a digital channel Thus a handoff from an analog voice channel to a digital traffic channel is required between these two Operations and is performed automatically by the Test Software It is called an implicit handoff and is the equivalent of the CP Handoff Analog Voice Channel to Digital Traffic Channel Operation but because it is not really stated default values are used for the parameters in the Operation and are thus not adjustable 109 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 2 z pei e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions Testing Strategy Verifying Functionality NOTE 110 Running the Call Processing Operations first will verify the functionality of the cellular telephone Then running other Operations will find parametric problems such as distorted audio The following is a
34. 0 6 Narrow Analog Voice Channel Power Level 0 7 These parameters are described in the following paragraphs 129 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 2 z pei e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions CP Page from Analog Control Channel to Narrow Analog Voice Channel 130 Source for Phone Number Use Prev Ph Below Prompt This parameter allows you to specify the location from which the Test System will obtain the cellular telephone number Three selections are provided in a one of many format Use Prev or Phone Below and Prompt Selecting Use Prev causes the Test System to use the mobile identification number MIN obtained in a prior Registration or Origination Operation If there was no prior Registration or Origination Operation the Test System will prompt you to enter the telephone number Selecting Phone Below causes the Test System to use the Phone Number 0 Use from Reg Orig parameter to obtain the cellular telephone number Selecting Prompt causes the Test System to prompt you to enter the telephone number Phone Number 0 Use from Reg Orig 2 to 9999999999 This parameter allows you to specify the telephone number of the cellular telephone being tested It is ordinarily entered as a 10 digit real number in the range 0 through 9999999999 but it is sometimes advantageous to use a negative number Setting the phone number parameter to a negative number results in the Test Syste
35. 000000 dB Upper Figure 23 TESTS Set Up Pass Fail Limits Screen 63 Chapter 2 Product Description Tests Subsystem 64 Using the Software Cc n Ke gt D wn fo o o 69 Chapter 3 Using the Software Introduction Introduction NOTE 70 This chapter provides detailed information on loading running and customizing test procedures The HP 11807E Option 014 AMPS NAMPS DAMPS DCCH Mobile Test Software operates under control of various test suites Operations parameters and pass fail limits specifications These are defined in two ways In the first the Test Software includes factory default settings that you may use without change In the second you may customize the settings to your specific requirements The Test Set includes also two methods for accessing on line help In the first in each of the screens in the test environment pressing the k4 Help key accesses specific information about procedures to set up and use the current screen In the second pressing the SHIFT key then the TX key accesses the master help file which includes an alphabetical listing of help topics about the Test Set Special presentations of text in this manual are as shown in Conventions on page 4 Chapter 3 Using the Software Connecting Equipment Connecting Equipment Various cables and adaptors are required to connect the Test Set to the cellular telephone and to other
36. 168 ROM defined 352 Run 342 Run Mode 84 Run Test 342 defined 352 difference between Run and 312 320 326 running tests overview 73 RXA Receiver Analog 102 RXA Audio Distortion Operation 218 parameters used 218 pass fail limits used 218 RXA Audio Frequency Response Opera tion 220 parameters used 220 pass fail limits used 222 RXA Expandor Operation 224 parameters used 224 pass fail limits used 226 RXA Forward Voice Channel Order Message Error Rate Operation 229 parameters used 229 pass fail limits used 230 RXA Hum and Noise Operation 231 parameters used 231 pass fail limits used 231 RXA Mobile Reported Interference Op eration 233 parameters used 233 pass fail limits used 234 RXA RF Sensitivity Operation 235 parameters used 236 pass fail limits used 237 RXA RF Sensitivity vs Channel Plotted Operation 241 parameters used 242 pass fail limits used 244 RXA RF Sensitivity Narrow Analog Voice Channel Operation 238 parameters used 239 pass fail limits used 240 RXD Receiver Sensitivity Loopback Operation 274 parameters used 274 pass fail limits used 275 RXD Receiver Sensitivity Operation 272 parameters used 272 pass fail limits used 272 S SACCH defined 352 SAT defined 352 save defined 352 SAVE IBASIC command 305 Save Proc 342 saving a procedure 85 saving test results 307 screen defined 352 SCREEN CONTROL keys 39 defined 352 SECURE IT ROM program 88
37. 20 ASSIGN File TO RES INTERNAL FORMAT ON Opens a path to the PC card file called RES for results 30 ON ERROR GOTO 80 Exits at end of file if an error is encountered 40 LOOP Extracts file contents 50 ENTER File A Transfers part of the file to the string 60 OUTPUT 9 AS The string is output at the Serial port 70 END LOOP Goes back to get more of the file 80 END End of the program 6 Press the k1 Run key to run the entered IBASIC program 317 Chapter 6 Reference Data Collection and Retrieval NOTE Collection to a PC Table 11 The Run field and the Run Test field do not perform the same function The Run field assigned as a default in the TESTS IBASIC Controller screen will start an IBASIC program that is resident in the Test Set memory The Run Test field assigned as a default in the other TESTS screens will load and run the program that is called from the Select Procedure Filename and Select Procedure Location entries in the TESTS Main Menu screen You may output test results through the serial port A variety of devices can receive the data such as an HP Palmtop computer a PC a notebook computer or a terminal A terminal emulator can log the test results to a file Examples of terminal emulator programs are HP AdvanceLink and ProComm which is a product of DataStorm Technologies Inc Configure an IBM Compatible PC with HP AdvanceLink for DOS as fol
38. 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXA Wideband Data Deviation 222 Transient Data Deviation This specification sets the pass fail limits for the transient portion of the TXA Wideband Data Deviation Operation The values are entered as decimal numbers as upper and lower limits and in kHz Pass fail limits specifications are determined using any applicable standard such as e EIA Standard Wideband Data Example If you determine that the frequency deviation should be 8 kHz with a 10 percent tolerance enter 7 2 as the lower limit and 8 8 as the upper limit Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions RXA Audio Distortion RXA Audio Distortion NOTE Audio connections from the cellular telephone to the Test System are required for this Operation This Operation measures the distortion from the cellular telephone receiver when a standard test tone a 50 dBm RF signal is applied to the receiver antenna The 50 dBm RF signal is modulated to deviate to 8 kHz at a 1 kHz rate with a 6000 Hz supervisory audio tone SAT present Narrow analog operation uses 3 kHz deviation and DSAT NOTE This Operation uses the C Message audio filter or the CCITT audio filter if it is installed in the Test System Parameters Used No parameters are used in the RXA Audio Distortion Operation Pass Fail Limits Used One pass fail limits specification is used in the RXA Audio Distortion Operation It is Audio Distortion This
39. Any card of the two classes of cards that meet the requirements of the PCMCIA card standard or the Epson card standard PCMCIA See Personal Computer Memory Card International Association Aiesso 5 PCMCIA card Any ofa class of cards that meet the requirements of the PCMCIA standard Such cards are used for static random access memory SRAM or read only memory ROM or for one time programmable memory peak max A detector in the Test Set that measures and computes the maximum of the absolute value of the positive and negative excursions of the measurement For example when an FM waveform with 10 kHz and 9 kHz deviations is applied 10 kHz will be displayed Personal Computer Memory Card International Association PCMCIA An international organization that devised a small footprint card based computer interface primarily for mobile computers 357 358 Glossary port A place of access to a device where signals may be input output or measured Also known as a connector or terminal PRESET function A Test Set function that sets the Test Set to its initial power up state It is activated by pressing the PRESET key procedure See test procedure prompt An on screen message that requests an action by the user The upper portion of the Test Set inverse video field is reserved for prompts and messages RAM See random access memory random access memory RAM A type of integrated circuit
40. Company 1992 1996 All Rights Reserved Made in USA P N 11807 90145 HP 11807E Option 014 Rev B 02 00 Figure 1 Test System 21 Chapter 1 Getting Started What You Will Test Equipment Required to Get Started 22 You will use the following equipment to complete the procedures in Getting Started HP 11807E Option 014 AMPS NAMPS DAMPS DCCH Mobile Test Software which is supplied on a one time programmable PC card OTP card HP 8920B Option 800 RF Communications Test Set A hand held transportable or mobile cellular telephone If required a suitable power supply and a cable appropriate to connect the power supply to the cellular telephone Suitable cabling and connectors to connect the Test Set to the cellular telephone antenna connector The following connectors and cabling may be used e A Type N m to BNC f adapter e A 4 foot BNC m to BNC m cable If you are testing a transportable or mobile cellular telephone you will use the following item Typically a BNC f to TNC m adapter to connect the 4 foot BNC cable to the cellular telephone antenna connector If you are testing a hand held self contained cellular telephone you will use the following item An adapter suitable to connect the 4 foot BNC cable to the cellular telephone antenna connector In addition to the equipment required you must have knowledge of the cellular telephone control channels to complete these procedures Chapter 1
41. Modify Analog Control Channel Parameters Operation 119 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 2 z pei e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions GEN Modify Digital Control Channel Parameters GEN Modify Digital Control Channel Parameters Parameters Used 120 This Operation is used to modify the cellular telephone s System Identification SID number and the digital control channel s DCCH digital verification color code DVCC It is recommended that you include this Operation at the beginning of a test suite to identify the SID DCCH DVCC and control channel for the cellular telephone The channel number associated with this Operation will be control channel number In the event that the first Operation is a Registration type this Operation is not required because the Registration Operation will identify the control channel number This Operation does not perform any tests make any measurements or compare any readings to limit specifications The parameters used in the GEN Modify Digital Control Channel Parameters Operation are System Identification Number 0 32767 DCCH DVCC 0 255 These parameters are described in the following paragraphs System Identification Number 0 32767 This parameter allows you to specify the cellular telephone s System Identification SID number to be used in testing The SID is stored as a 15 bit binary number in the telephone permanent security and identifica
42. Option not installed This message might be displayed when the software tries to control a non existent Test Set option To verify the options installed in the Test Set CAUTION Loading this program into the Test Set s memory will erase any other programs and Procedures that you have loaded If you have not already done so save your setups to a Procedure on an SRAM card before loading the LIST_OPTS program See Using Procedures in chapter 3 on page 89 Press the TESTS key The TESTS Main Menu screen will appear Move the cursor to the Select Procedure Location field and select it From the list in the Choices menu select ROM Move the cursor to the Select Procedure Filename field and select it From the Choices menu select LIST_OPTS SY Ol ee ee Press the k1 Run Test key to display the installed options No trigger or clock is present The Test Set was unable to find the data clock and use it in subsequent data recovery The digital mode of the cellular telephone might not be functioning properly The level into the Test Set might be too low or no trigger was received by the digital analyzer from the Trig Type field in the TDMA screen should be 2X Frame for NADC Parameter estimator did not converge The Test Set was unable to demodulate the signal captured by the digital analyzer Test results are not displayed e The digital mode of the cellular telephone might not be working properly e The leve
43. Press the TESTS key The TESTS Main Menu screen will appear From the CUSTOMIZE TEST PROCEDURE list orthe SET UP TEST SET list select the screen of your choice Press the appropriate USER key Press the TESTS key to return to the TESTS Main Menu screen Chapter 6 Reference RAM Disk RAM Disk RAM disk is a section of internal random access memory that acts much like a flexible floppy or rigid hard disk Programs can be stored re stored erased and retrieved D oO Four partitions divide the RAM disk into four separate volumes 0 through 3 5 Each volume is treated as a separate disk You may also specify the size of each disk in 256 byte increments The four RAM disk volumes are designated MEMORY 0 0 through MEMORY 0 3 For example to catalogue the contents of RAM disk Volume 0 from the TESTS IBASIC Controller screen select and enter CAT MEMORY 0 0 The contents of Volume 0 can be viewed NOTE Any existing programs or formatting on RAM are erased if you use the RAM_MNG or COPY_PL ROM programs or the SERVICE screen s RAM Initialize function Therefore you should use RAM disks for only short term storage of files Each RAM disk volume must be initialized before it can be used NOTE If you are using a RAM disk to store a test procedure you must initialize the RAM disk Volume 0 When the Test Software saves a procedure to the Test Set s RAM it automatically stores the procedure into the memory
44. TXA Frequency Error TXA SAT Freq Error amp Deviation 700 TXA Freq Error TXA SAT Freq Error amp Deviation 100 TXA RF Power Output 200 TXA RF Power Output 300 TXA RF Power Output 400 TXA RF Power Output The test suite shown in figure 11 shows a range of channels highlighted If a list of channels is included in a selected suite the active fields change to accommodate this fact The screen shown in figure 12 on page 51 illustrates a suite that shows a list of channels highlighted 50 Figure 12 TESTS Set Up Set ail Limits CHANNELS OPERATIONS CP Registration on ACCH TESTS Set Up Screen Showing List of Channels Chapter 2 Product Description insert ralelete Print All Mele aain Meru l 400 70 TAA Freauency Error THA SAT Frea Error amp Deviation 100 To 400 THA RF Power Output Stem 100 Tests Subsystem 51 U fe Qa c O o o o me e 3 Chapter 2 Product Description Tests Subsystem TESTS Specific Parameters Screen 52 Access this screen by selecting the Set Parameters field in the TESTS Set Up menu It is not accessible by any other means This screen allows you to define specific parameter settings for the Operations in a test suite These new parameter settings then become the defaults for that test suite If you do not wish to customize the parameter values for an Operation in a test suite you may use the Def Parms field to set t
45. The software defaults to 80 records However DOS systems automatically change record size if it is too small d Entera dot extension of 3 characters or less for the file name For example all model ABCD cellular telephones tested may be organized to have an ABC file extension 295 Chapter 5 Problem Solving Data Collection Function Does Not Work O Check the Test Set to make certain that it is set to the controller mode if you are using an external disk drive 1 Access the I O CONFIGURE screen from the More field in the To Screen menu 2 Move the cursor to the Mode field and select Control NOTE When you are prompted to enter a file name in which data are to be stored the protocol for the mass storage device being used must be followed Hierarchical directory paths are not allowed and all files are created with FORMAT ON Also when initializing a disk use the following format 7xx is the disk bba address y is the device selector DOS disk INITIALIZE DOS CS80 7xx y LIF disk INITIALIZE 7xx y 296 Chapter 5 Problem Solving Memory Space Problems a a fa z D 3 o o 5 a Memory Space Problems The program uses a substantial amount of the Test Set s RAM space If a message displays that indicates a memory problem check the memory space that has been used To determine the memory space used 1 Load the program if it is not already loaded by pres
46. Used This Operation measures the power at the output terminals of the cellular telephone s transmitter when the output terminals are connected to a 50 ohm load This Operation is ordinarily performed at the nominal supply voltage but it may be performed with high and low supply voltages for extreme measurements High and low supply voltages are measured only if the Test at Extreme Supply Voltages parameter is set to test at extremes see GEN Modify External Power Supply Parameters on page 117 and only if an external programmable power supply is available and has been configured to be used over HP IB by the Test System See TXA Current Drain on page 182 for details on configuring an HP IB power supply Ordinarily all power levels are tested However this Operation allows you to select only the levels that you wish to test Output power is expressed in watts or dBm by selection in the Units for Power Measurement parameter see GEN Modify Execution Parameters on page 114 The parameters used in the TXA RF Power Output Operation are Test Output Power Level 0 Yes or No Test Output Power Level 1 Yes or No Test Output Power Level 2 Yes or No Test Output Power Level 3 6 Yes or No Test Output Power Level 7 Yes or No These parameters are described in the following paragraphs Test Output Power Level 0 Yes or No This parameter allows you to specify whether cellular telephone transmitter output power testing w
47. alternately to 0 and 500 This induces the cellular telephone to register with the Test System e Ifan error occurs in this Operation all testing is stopped A Registration on an analog channel Registration on a digital channel or Origination Operation must be run at least once before any Call Processing Operation may be run If this is not done you will be prompted to enter the cellular telephone number during testing Alternatively you may enter the cellular telephone number in a parameter After the Registration or Origination Operation is run it need not be run again for the Test System to perform other tests The registration is remembered by the Test System unless it is erased by loading new test software registering a different cellular telephone or executing a SCRATCH C command in IBASIC In practical applications there are three possibilities 1 The test procedure performs a Registration or Origination Operation This obtains the telephone number from the cellular telephone 2 If you know the cellular telephone number you enter it into the Phone Number O Use from Reg Orig parameter 3 If the cellular telephone number is not obtained through either of the above actions the Test System will prompt the operator for it The operator must then determine the number and supply it in response to the prompt Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions CP Registration on Analog Control Channel Parameters Used No parameters ar
48. an upper limit only and in dB symbol Pass fail limits specifications are determined using any applicable standard such as e EIA TIA Standard Modulation Accuracy Example If you determine that the average rate of decay in the magnitude of the measured signal should be lt 1 dB symbol enter 1 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXD Modulation Accuracy 10 Burst T Q Origin Offset This specification sets the pass fail limits for the I Q origin offset The value is entered as a decimal number as an upper limit only and in dB Pass fail limits specifications are determined using any applicable standard such as e EIA TIA Standard IS 137 Example If you determine that the I Q origin offset should be 20 dB enter 20 Carrier Frequency Error This specification sets the pass fail limits for the cellular telephone s carrier frequency stability Frequency error is measured over one burst The values are entered in decimal numbers as upper and lower limits and in Hz Pass fail limits specifications are determined using any applicable standard such as e EIA TIA Standard Frequency Tolerance For Digital Mode Operation Example If you determine that the carrier frequency should be maintained within 200 Hz of any assigned channel frequency enter 200 as the lower limit and 200 as the upper limit 263 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 2 z pei e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation De
49. and parameter three is changed from Yes to No and parameter three is used in several Operations then parameter three will be changed to No in each of those Operations This change can be verified by switching to the TESTS Specific Parameters screen for any suite that uses a Page Operation and verifying that the value has been updated Selecting this field also results in a user prompt to verify that the change is desired The differences between the Reset All and Reset One functions are somewhat subtle Read these two descriptions very carefully especially the underlined words Reset One Field Selecting this field or pressing k1 applies the parameter value in the currently selected Operation to each occurrence of the parameter in each occurrence of the selected Operation in the TESTS Set Up screen For instance if Page is selected and parameter three is changed from Yes to No then parameter three will be changed to No for every Page Operation in the TESTS Set Up menu This change can be verified by switching to the TESTS Specific Parameters screen for any suite that uses a Page Operation and verifying that the value has been updated Selecting this field also results in a user prompt to verify that the change is desired Setup Field Selecting this field or pressing k5 switches the display to the TESTS Set Up screen Value Field This is the field at the middle left of the display just to the right of and slightly belo
50. apply The first term one word or more shown such as Cnfg in the item Cnfg External Devices Field is classed as the field title It is always displayed and is highlighted when the field is selected See the third item below for exceptions Items shown in brackets such as External Devices in the Cnfg External Devices Field are classed as explanatory words These words are shown with the field name on the display but are not highlighted when the field is selected Items shown in braces such as in List Number in the List Number Field are classed as undisplayed field titles These titles are not shown on the display However the field is highlighted when selected Chapter 2 Product Description Tests Subsystem Default TESTS Main Menu Screen Before loading a procedure from the Test Software OTP card the TESTS Main Menu screen will be as shown in figure 9 For detailed information on the fields of this screen refer to the HP 8920B RF Communications Test Set User s Guide TESTS Moin Menu 1 Test E LOAD TEST PROCEDURE Select Procedure Location Hele Select Procedure Filename Library Programt Description To Screen CUSTOMIZE TEST PROCEDURE SET UP TEST SET Execution Cond External Devices DECODER i Printer Setup RADIO INT epee IBASIC Cntrl an Channel Information mua Test Parameters oe Order of Tests hota Pass Fail Limits mes fove Delete Proce
51. are performed on groups of channels for instance 355 790 991 using specific parameters for instance SAT tone 5970 SID 19 and pass fail limits specifications for instance TX power level 0 3 to 0 7 W saved in a file A procedure customizes the Test Software to a specific application Procedures are constructed by editing existing channels parameters pass fail limits and testing order and saving the resulting files to a memory card disk or internal Test Set s RAM test suite A group of operations or tests that is performed over a range or list of channels TESTS screens The Test Set screens that are used to customize and execute run all automated testing procedures These screens are accessed by pressing the TESTS key and making various selections time division multiple access TDMA A technique for increasing cellular telephone channel capacity by allowing as many as six telephone calls to time share a channel A type of frequency division in which one frequency is shared sequentially by multiple activities In cellular phone technology a TDMA system is defined by both a frequency and a time slot toggle A type of display screen field that switches between two functions upon selection One function is always displayed Selecting that function switches to the second function The selected function is underlined Glossary transportable cellular telephone A portable cellular phone that may b
52. at Level 0 Output Power at Level 1 Output Power at Level 2 Output Power at Level 3 Output Power at Level 4 Output Power at Level 5 Output Power at Level 6 Output Power at Level 7 Output Power at Level 8 Output Power at Level 9 Output Power at Level 10 These specifications are described in the following paragraphs NOTE Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXD RF Power Output Output Power at Levels 0 through 10 These specifications set the pass fail limits for output power levels 0 through 10 as measured in digital tests at the transmitter s output terminal Each power level limit is separate and may be set as required The values are entered as decimal numbers and in watts or dBm Measurement units for the specification are set by the Units for Power Measurement parameter see GEN Modify Execution Parameters on page 114 Pass fail limits specifications are determined using any applicable standard such as e EIA TIA Standard Transmitter Output Power Values for power levels in the standard are for effective radiated power ERP and not as measured directly from the cellular telephone Power levels will be higher when measured directly from the cellular telephone Example If you determine that the output power levels should be maintained within the range of 2 dB and 4 dB of the nominal values over a specified temperature range enter the values as shown in table 8 for the lower limit and the upper limit for power
53. cellular telephone s voice input circuitry to decrease the variability of the modulation because of volume changes from the speaker In combination with an expandor in the cell site receiver this provides improved signal to noise ratio in the demodulated audio The parameters used in the TXA Compressor Response Operation are Compressor Start Level 30 to 25 dB Compressor Step Level 0 to 55 dB Compressor Stop Level 30 to 25 dB These parameters are described in the following paragraphs Compressor Start Level 30 25 dB This parameter allows you to specify the start level to be used in varying the input level to the expandor in cellular telephone compressor response testing The value is entered as a real number in dB in the range 30 to 25 Example If you wish to start varying the relative input level at 5 dB enter 5 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXA Compressor Response Compressor Step Level 0 55 dB This parameter allows you to specify the step size to be used in varying the input level to the expandor in cellular telephone compressor response testing The value is entered as a real number in dB in the range 0 to 55 Example If you wish to step the variance in the relative input level in 5 dB steps enter 5 Compressor Stop Level 30 25 dB This parameter allows you to specify the stop level to be used in varying the input level to the expandor in cellular telephone compressor respons
54. control channels channels 334 to 354 or both A and B control channels Check and update the Analog Control Channel parameter that is required by the cellular telephone see Verifying and Editing Parameters on page 94 and Specifying Test Parameters on page 102 Verify that the cellular telephone is connected Press the TESTS key to switch to the TESTS Main Menu screen and then press the k1 Run Test key Tests run in the sequence entered earlier As the results are reported on the Test Set s screen you will be able to better isolate and determine the cause of any problems To save this group of Call Processing Operations as a test procedure see Saving a Procedure in chapter 3 on page 89 You might also wish to add the Digital Call Processing Operations to this procedure Miscellaneous Items Table 5 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions Testing Strategy Add transmitter and receiver tests to your test procedure through the TESTS Set Up screen You may save the test procedure see Saving a Procedure in chapter 3 on page 89 Note that some of these tests require audio connections In doing so take care to make the appropriate audio connections specific to the requirements of your cellular telephone Also you might wish to add the Operations listed in table 5 to your test procedure Additional Operations Operation Name Purpose TXA RF Power Output To verify analog transmitter operation TX
55. factor If you do not provide specific information the tests will be run using the default factor Chapter 3 Using the Software Testing Overview Testing Overview The overall testing process is shown in figure 26 on page 79 and described in the following paragraphs NOTE Before beginning testing you must have loaded the Test Software as described in chapter 1 Getting Started on page 19 and completed the equipment connections see Connecting Equipment on page 71 Pressing the TESTS key displays the TESTS Main Menu screen From the TESTS Main Menu screen you must select a procedure from the Choices field to access the TESTS Subsystem and then you may select one of the following three options Begin testing e If the factory default settings are acceptable for your application you may simply start testing using those defaults e Ifthe Test Software has already been customized and saved to an SRAM card you may start testing using the custom procedures Cc n Ke gt D wn fo o o 77 Chapter 3 Using the Software Testing Overview 78 Customize the Test Software In the CUSTOMIZE TEST PROCEDURE list select the TESTS Subsystem processes by which you wish to change the procedure For detailed information on the TESTS Subsystem see chapter 2 Product Description If you wish to specify a new list of Operations or change the current list of Operations or change the
56. figure 11 on page 50 Selecting List displays a scroll box and a list field see figure 12 on page 51 Set Parameters Field Selecting this field switches the display to the TESTS Set Parameters screen In this screen you may select from Operations in the suite only and you may set parameters so that those parameters are uniquely defined for the Operation in that suite If you wish to use default parameters pressing k1 switches the display to the TESTS Default Parameters screen Set Pass Fail Limits Field Selecting this field switches to the TESTS Pass Fail Limits screen This screen displays the specification limits associated with the Operation indicated in the TESTS Set Up screen These limits are considered to be defaults Chapter 2 Product Description Tests Subsystem Start Field This is a five digit field located to the left of To when Range is selected in the Range List toggle field see figure 11 on page 50 It represents the start channel for a range Five digits allow for a four digit channel number and an optional letter U M L for NAMPS or H for PCS Selecting this field allows you to enter the start channel number Step Field This is a four digit field located below the start and stop fields when Range is selected in the Range List toggle field It represents the increment or step in the range This is an integer entry field Selecting this field allows you to enter the step value Stop Fie
57. for instance PRINT Pressing and holding the SHIFT key while also pressing A second key activates the blue labeled function CANCEL Key 25 The CANCEL key is used to terminate an entry in progress or to stop a running IBASIC program U fe Qa c O o o o me e 3 Left Arrow Backspace Key 26 The left arrow key is used to move the cursor to the left when entering numbers in a field Each key press moves the cursor one space to the left erasing the previous character POWER switch 27 The POWER switch is used to turn the Test Set s power on or off NOTE Some settings and functions are retained by power trom the Test Set s back up bat tery when external power is turned off USER Keys 28 The USER keys k1 through k5 are assigned specific functions by the Test Software and are used to access immediately the assigned functions without using the CURSOR CONTROL knob or changing screens Note that keys can be assigned several functions and the specific key function is dependent upon the Operation or function in process at the time 39 Chapter 2 Product Description Hardware Considerations 40 CURSOR CONTROL Knob 29 The CURSOR CONTROL knob moves the cursor to select fields screens and settings from the lists of choices and to select or change numeric field values Turning the knob clockwise moves the cursor to the right and down turning it counterclockwise moves the cursor
58. format Yes and No Selecting Yes causes the Test System to perform the test Selecting No causes the Test System to ignore the test 217 O pe o 2 e 3 is D 77 9 me e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXA Supervisory Audio Tone Frequency Error and Deviation Pass Fail Limits Used 218 The pass fail limits specifications used in the TXA Supervisory Audio Tone Frequency Error and Deviation Operation are SAT Deviation SAT Frequency Error These specifications are described in the following paragraphs SAT Frequency Deviation This specification sets the pass fail limits for the SAT tone s peak frequency deviation The values are entered as decimal numbers as upper and lower limits and in kHz Pass fail limits specifications are determined using any applicable standard such as e EIA TIA Standard Supervisory Audio Tone SAT Example If you determine that the peak frequency deviation of each transponded SAT should be 2 kHz 2 kHz enter 1 8 as the lower limit and 2 2 as the upper limit SAT Frequency Error This specification sets the pass fail limits for the SAT tone frequency accuracy The values are entered as decimal numbers as upper and lower limits and in Hz Pass fail limits specifications are determined using any applicable standard such as e EIA TIA Standard Supervisory Audio Tone SAT Example If you determine that any one of the three SAT to
59. in the range 0 through 7 Example If you wish to use power level 7 enter 7 Pass Fail Limits Used 144 No pass fail limits specifications are used in the CP Origination from Analog Control Channel to Analog Voice Channel Operation Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions CP Origination from Analog Control Channel to Narrow Analog Voice Channel CP Origination from Analog Control Channel to Narrow Analog Voice Channel NOTE This is a NAMPS only operation The channels must indicate the offset desired U Upper M Middle or L Lower This Operation simulates a call from the cellular telephone to the base station cell site by putting the cellular telephone in service and having the operator originate a call from the handset Specifically in this Operation the Test System does the following 1 Simulates a control channel 2 Prompts you to dial any telephone number as many as 10 digits after the cellular telephone has service Service is indicated by the cellular telephone NO SERVICE indicator extinguishing or the SERVICE indicator lighting 3 Performs 3 of 5 majority voting on the Reverse Control Message 4 Performs Bose Chaudhuri Hocqenghem BCH error detection and correction of the Reverse Control Message Wideband data 5 Sends an Initial Voice Channel Designation order to the cellular telephone directing it to tune to the voice channel specified in the Channels field of the TESTS Set Up screen 6 Ch
60. later use See Using Procedures on page 89 Because your requirements might change the Test Software allows changes to default settings whenever you wish For example you might decide to insert or delete Operations then later after running the Operations you might decide to change the parameters or pass fail limits specifications or test different channels Most testing customization is accomplished through the customization screens These screens are accessed from the main TESTS Main Menu screen as shown in figure 28 Customizing a Test Procedure on page 99 The following sections describe the various overall processes used in customizing testing procedures for a particular application These processes include e Specifying Channel Information e Specifying the Order of Operations e Specifying Parameters e Specifying Pass Fail Limits External devices printer setup and IBASIC will not be described in this section on customizing the Test Software e External devices and printer setup are used in setting up printers and external disk drives and are described in Data Collection and Retrieval in chapter 6 on page 313 and Printing in chapter 6 on page 333 e IBASIC is used in writing your own programs and is not described in this manual If you wish to write IBASIC programs you will find the following manuals useful HP Instrument Basic User s Handbook Version 2 0 HP part number E2083 90005 e HP 920B Prog
61. levels of 0 through 10 267 O pe o 2 e 3 is D 77 9 F me e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXD RF Power Output Table 8 268 Power Levels Example Power Level Nominal Lower Limit Upper Limit Value dBW dBW dBW Level 0 6 2 8 Level 1 2 4 Level 2 2 6 0 Level 3 6 10 4 Level 4 10 14 8 Level 5 14 18 12 Level 6 18 22 16 Level 7 232 26 20 Level 8 26 30 24 Level 9 30 34 _28 Level 10 34 38 32 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXD RF Power Output vs Channel Plotted TXD RF Power Output vs Channel Plotted NOTE NOTE NOTE This Operation measures the cellular telephone transmitter s output power when the telephone is on a digital traffic channel then plots the output power in relation to channel number in the range of channels specified by the Operation s parameters At each channel measurement a point is located in an X Y plot where the X axis represents increasing channel numbers and the Y axis represents measured power in watts or dBm At the end of the point location process the Test System connects the points to produce and display a true plot The number of the channel at which the Test System was working at the time that this Operation is encountered is irrelevant for the Operation The Test System performs an implicit handoff to the channel specif
62. measures the power at the output terminals of the cellular telephone transmitter when the output terminals are connected to a 50 ohm load then plots the output power in relation to channel number in the range of channels specified by the Operation parameters At each channel measurement a point is located in an X Y plot where the X axis represents increasing channel numbers and the Y axis represents measured power in watts or dBm The measurement points are connected by a straight line to produce a plot of power versus channels The number of the channel at which the Test System was working at the time that this Operation is encountered is irrelevant for the Operation The Test System performs an implicit handoff to the channel specified as the start channel in the Operation and then performs the rest of the Operation At the conclusion of the Operation the Test Software hands the cellular telephone off to the channel specified for the next Operation This Operation is performed at the nominal supply voltage Ordinarily all power levels are tested However this Operation allows you to select only the levels that you wish to test Output power is expressed in watts or dBm by selection in the Units for Power Measurement parameter see GEN Modify Execution Parameters on page 114 The parameters used in the TXA RF Power Output vs Channel Plotted Operation are TXA Power Start Channel Number 1 799 991 1023 TXA Power Step Channel Num
63. on page 108 The parameters used in the CP Handoff from Analog Voice Channel to Analog Voice Channel Operation are SAT Tone 5970 6000 or 6030 Hz Analog Voice Channel Power Level 0 7 These parameters are described in the following paragraphs SAT Tone 5970 6000 or 6030 Hz This parameter allows you to specify the frequency of the supervisory audio tone SAT that will be used on analog voice channel A SAT is an out of voice band audio tone that is used for cell site identification Three selections are provided in a one of many format 5970 6000 and 6030 Hz One of the three tones is added to the voice transmission of all calls within an individual cell The cellular telephone then detects the tone and modulates the transmitted voice channel carrier with a constant relative phase tone that is filtered or regenerated from the received tone to establish a closed loop between the cellular telephone and the cell site Transmission of the SAT by a cellular telephone is suspended during transmission of wideband data on the reverse voice channel RVC but is not suspended when the signaling tone ST is sent Example If you wish to use 6000 Hz as the SAT select 6000 153 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 F me e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions CP Handoff from Analog Voice Channel to Analog Voice Channel Analog Voice Channel Power Level 0 7 This parameter allows you to specify
64. on page 82 you must first select the location from which to load ordinarily it will be Card Then you must select a procedure filename The OTP card that contains your Test Software also contains several pre programmed procedures Finally you must start the procedure NOTE The Test Software code is not loaded into the Test Set s memory until you press the kl Run Test key It will then take approximately 15 seconds to load the code You may remove the Test Software OTP card after the software code is loaded into the Test Set s memory The procedure and code will remain in memory after a power down power up cycle unless it is manually deleted or a new procedure is loaded When the procedure begins to run the Operations are executed in the order of entry into the procedure You may press the CANCEL key at any time to pause the current procedure then press the k2 Continue key to resume it Cc n Ke gt D wn fo o o 81 Chapter 3 Using the Software Testing Overview Read the information below then begin at step 2 Position the cursor at Select Procedure Location and select it A If you need help locating area of screen where step is performed see Figure 5 B Use cursor control knob on front panel to position cursor and make selections Position Select M M NY NOs amp Position f OS oe LOAD TEST PROCEDURE X Select Procedure Location Select 4 Select
65. out TNC only or BNC f to mini Tessco part 74720 UHF m adapter depending on cellular telephone 3 BNC m to BNC m Antenna and audio 3 HP 10503A cable 1 2 meters 4 feet 4 HP IB Interface Test system HP IB to 1 HP 10833A cable power supply HP IB 1 meter 3 3 feet 73 Cc n Ke gt D wn fo o oO Chapter 3 Using the Software Connecting Equipment Test System to Printer Connections Table 3 lists cables available from Hewlett Packard for connection to Hewlett Packard printers Table 3 Hewlett Packard Printer Cables HP Model Description Purpose Quantity Number or Part Number HP IB IEEE 488 Cable Test Set to HP IB Printer 1 10833A 1 meter 3 3 feet HP IB IEEE 488 Cable Test Set to HP IB Printer 1 10833B 2 meters 6 6 feet Parallel IEEE 1284 Printer Test Set to Parallel 1 C2950A Cable Centronics Printer 2 meters 6 6 feet Parallel IEEE 1284 Printer Test Set to Parallel 1 C2951A Cable Centronics Printer 3 meters 9 9 feet Serial Printer Cable Test Set to Serial Printer 1 08921 61038 4 pin RJ 11 male to with 9 pin connector 9 pin DB 9 female 2 meters 6 6 feet Serial Printer Cable Test Set to Serial Printer 1 08921 61039 4 pin RJ 11 male to with 25 pin connector 25 pin DB 25 male 3 meters 9 9 feet 74 Chapter 3 Using the Software Connecting Equipment Audio Connections Audio connections are
66. power testing will be performed at power level 7 Two selections are provided in a toggle format Yes and No Selecting Yes causes the Test Software to perform the test Selecting No causes the Test Software to ignore the test Test Power Level 10 Yes or No This parameter allows you to specify whether cellular telephone transmitter s output power testing will be performed at power level 10 Two selections are provided in a toggle format Yes and No Selecting Yes causes the Test Software to perform the test Selecting No causes the Test Software to ignore the test 265 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 F me e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXD RF Power Output Test Power Levels 3 6 8 9 or 3 6 amp 8 9 This parameter allows you to specify groups of power levels at which the cellular telephone transmitter s output power will be tested Three selections are provided in a one of many format These are 3 6 causes transmitter output power to be tested at power levels 3 4 5 and 6 8 9 causes transmitter output power to be tested at power levels 8 and 9 3 6 and 8 9 causes transmitter output power to be tested at power levels 3 4 5 6 8 and 9 Example If you wish to plot the transmitter output power at power levels 3 4 5 and 6 select 3 6 Pass Fail Limits Used 266 The pass fail limits specifications used in the TXD RF Power Output Operation are Output Power
67. required for an application Storage Space in kilobytes Number of Procedures X 4 1 20 For example saving ten different procedures will require 61 kilobytes of memory The 64 kilobyte or 128 kilobyte card is sufficient The storage space that you require for data collection depends on the number of test results to be saved You will require approximately 4 kilobytes per page of test results that you save A page of test results is approximately 57 lines of display or printer output The storage space of smaller SRAM cards can be filled quickly If you are collecting large quantities of data data collection using a PC or printer may be preferable 329 Chapter 6 Reference Memory Cards Initializing an SRAM Card NOTE NOTE 330 Initializing SRAM cards using the TESTS Save Delete Procedure screen automatically defaults to DOS format 1 Press the TESTS key The TESTS Main Menu screen will appear 2 From the CUSTOMIZE TEST PROCEDURE list select Proc Save Delete Procedure to switch to the TESTS Save Delete Procedure screen Make certain that the switch on the card is not in the write protect position 3 Insert the SRAM card into the slot on the Test Set s front panel 4 Press the k3 Init Card key 5 Press the Yes key if you wish to continue There are two ways to initialize an SRAM card to select the format If you have a terminal emulator attached to the Test Set enter a command into the IBASI
68. run If you wish to prevent parameters from being lost when a new procedure is selected you must save those parameters in a procedure See Using Procedures in chapter 3 on page 89 To print the parameters list see Printing in chapter 6 on page 333 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions Introduction Pass Fail Limits Specifications Pass fail limits specifications are values that you enter to set the pass or fail limits for testing Default values are available in the Test Software Some of these values are derived from standard methods of measurement and some are derived from applicable cellular telephone test standards However your pass fail limits specifications should be set according to the standards to which you wish to test your cellular telephone Pass fail limits specifications remain in the Test System battery backed up memory until overwritten whey select a different procedure to run If you wish to prevent the specifications from being lost when a new procedure is selected you must save those in a procedure See Using Procedures in chapter 3 on page 89 To print the pass fail limits specifications list see Printing in chapter 3 on page 86 and in chapter 6 Reference on page 309 107 O pe o 2 e 3 is D 77 9 F me e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions Testing Strategy Testing Strategy Testing strategy consists of several components These are described i
69. sends data to and receives data from the serial ports using address 9 for the primary port and address 10 for Port B NOTE Use an RJ 11 25 pin RS 232 adapter HP P N 98642 66508 and RJ 11 cable HP P N 98642 66505 to connect the Test Set to a serial printer or terminal computer NOTE RJ 11 cables and adapters can be wired several ways If you buy a cable or adapter other than the HP parts listed verify the connections for the pins before connecting cables to the instruments Table 17 lists connections for transmit receive and ground pins address 9 Table 17 Transmit Receive and Ground Connections HP 8920B Terminal PC Terminal PC RJ 11 Serial Port 25 Pin RS 232 9 Pin RS 232 Pin 2 RX to pin 2 TX or pin3 TX Pin 5 TX to pin 3 RX or pin 2 RX Pin 4 GND to pin 7 GND or pin5 GND 346 Understanding HP IB Control Annunciators The words letters and symbols at the top right corner of the Test Set display indicate the following conditions Chapter 6 Reference Understanding HP IB Control Annunciators R indicates remote operation from an external controller or IBASIC program in the Test Set This letter will be displayed while the Test Software is running D i e Ss iv o L indicates that the Test Set is monitoring and is ready to receive a manual or remote command T indicates that the Test Set is communicating with another HP IB devic
70. sequence of the Operations select the Setup Chan Seq Parm Spec field to display the TESTS Set Up screen If you wish to change specific parameters select the Setup Chan Seq Parm Spec field then select the Set Parameters field inthe TESTS Set Up screen to display the TESTS Specific Parameters screen If you wish to specify a new range or list of channels to test or change the current list select the Setup Chan Seq Parm Spec field to display the TESTS Set Up screen then the Range or List field in that screen If you wish to change the test environment and conditions select the Parms Default Parameters field to display the TESTS Default Parameters screen If you wish to change the pass fail limits specifications for specific measurements select the Specs Pass Fail Limits field to display the TESTS Pass Fail Limits screen If you wish to save any or all of the above customized changes to an SRAM card or delete any from the card select the Proc Save Delete Procedure field to display the TESTS Save Delete Procedure screen Set up the Test Set for printing results If you wish to print test results or certain screens select the Print Printer Setup field in the TESTS Main Menu screen If you wish to select when and where test results are to be displayed select the Exec Execution Cond and Print Printer Setup fields as appropriate in the TESTS Main Menu screen Chapter 3 Using the Software Testing Overv
71. sets the pass fail limits for the time that the cellular telephone transmitter will transmit before the battery charge is depleted The value is entered as a decimal number and in minutes Example If you determine that the transmit time should be 80 minutes enter 80 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions MISC Battery Life on Analog Control Channel Standby MISC Battery Life on Analog Control Channel Standby Parameters Used This Operation measures the continuous time that the cellular telephone can be turned on and operated in standby mode ready to receive calls before the telephone battery charge is depleted In this Operation the Test System performs a registration Operation every 10 minutes As long as the cellular telephone can successfully register with the Test System the Test System concludes that the battery is still functional After the first failure to register the Test System attempts one more registration Operation If the cellular telephone fails again the Test System concludes that the battery charge is depleted and records and displays the time between the start of the Operation and the time at which the battery was determined to be depleted of charge One parameter is used in the MISC Battery Life on Analog Control Channel Standby Operation It is System Identification Number 0 32767 This parameter is described in the following paragraphs System Identification Number 0 32767 This parameter a
72. the audio response should not deviate more than 1 to 3 dB over the frequency range of 400 to 2400 Hz enter 3 as the lower limit and 1 as the upper limit 227 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 F me e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions RXA Audio Frequency Response 228 Deviation from 6 dB Oct lt 400 Hz amp gt 2400 Hz This specification sets the pass fail limits used in testing the audio frequency response for the cellular telephone receiver s audio output circuitry with the audio response tested against the standard 6 dB octave de emphasis curve The audio response should not deviate beyond the pass fail limits specifications in the regions of 300 to 400 Hz and 2400 to 3000 Hz The values are entered as decimal numbers as upper and lower limits and in dB Pass fail limits specifications are determined using any applicable standard such as e EIA TIA Standard Voice Audio Frequency Response Example If you determine that the audio response should not deviate more than 1 to 6 dB over the frequency range of 300 to 400 Hz and 2400 to 3000 Hz enter 6 as the lower limit and 1 as the upper limit RXA Expandor NOTE Background Parameters Used Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions RXA Expandor Audio connections from the cellular telephone to the Test System are required for this Operation This Operation measures the cellular telephone expandor s zero reference le
73. the power level at which the cellular telephone will transmit when it is operated on an analog voice channel The value is entered as an integer in the range 0 through 7 Example If you wish to use power level 7 enter 7 Pass Fail Limits Used No pass fail limits specifications are used in the CP Handoff from Analog Voice Channel to Analog Voice Channel Operation 154 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions CP Handoff from Analog Voice Channel to Narrow Analog Voice Channel CP Handoff from Analog Voice Channel to Narrow Analog Voice Channel NOTE NOTE Parameters Used This Operation performs an explicit handoff from an analog voice channel to a narrow analog voice channel This isa NAMPS only operation The channels must indicate the offset desired U Upper M Middle or L Lower For information on explicit and implicit call processing see Testing Strategy on page 108 The parameters used in the CP Handoff from Analog Voice Channel to Narrow Analog Voice Channel Operation are DSAT Vector 0 6 Narrow Analog Voice Channel Power Level 0 7 These parameters are described in the following paragraphs 155 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 F me e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions CP Handoff from Analog Voice Channel to Narrow Analog Voice Channel DSAT Vector 0 6 This parameter allows you to specify the Digital Supervisory Audio Tone DSAT sequence to be used whe
74. to correspond to your printer configuration e For HP IB Printing set the Mode field to Control 9 Press the TESTS key to return to the TESTS Main Menu screen Chapter 6 Reference Printing Printing Test Results Print test results as follows 1 Press the TESTS key The TESTS Main Menu screen will appear 2 From the SET UP TEST SET list select Print Printer Setup to switch to the TESTS Printer Setup screen 3 Move the cursor to Output Results To and select Printer D p h O O Ss 7 oO 4 Move the cursor to Output Results For and select A11 if you wish to have all results printed or Failures if you wish to have only failures printed 5 If you wish to use a title for the printed results move the cursor to Output Heading and enter the words that you wish to use as the heading 337 Chapter 6 Reference Printing Sending Escape Sequences to the Printer NOTE 338 You may use the Test Set to send escape sequences to control printer options such as pitch margins paper size and so forth The Test Software includes some predefined escape sequences compatible with HP printers listed in table 16 on page 339 or you may enter others that are compatible with your printer refer to your printer s user s manual for the available print features and corresponding escape sequences The lest Software includes an implied escape character tor the first sequence Thus you need enter only the
75. traffic channel to verify that the traffic channel was obtained It is not necessary to register the cellular telephone with the Test System by running a Registration Operation before running this Operation This Operation will read the cellular telephone s Mobile Identification Number MIN and the Test System will retain it for use in performing other tests Parameters Used The parameters used in the CP Origination from Analog Control Channel to Digital Traffic Channel Operation are Digital Traffic Channel DVCC 1 255 Digital Traffic Channel Slot 1 3 Digital Traffic Channel Power Level 0 10 Cellular Digital Traffic Channel Vocoder VSELP ACELP These parameters are described in the following paragraphs 147 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 F me e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions CP Origination from Analog Control Channel to Digital Traffic Channel Digital Traffic Channel DVCC 1 255 This parameter allows you to specify the Digital Verification Color Code DVCC number to be transmitted to the cellular telephone on the digital traffic channel The value is entered as an integer in the range 1 through 255 Example If you wish to use a DVCC of 101 during testing enter 101 Digital Traffic Channel Slot 1 3 This parameter allows you to specify the timeslot assignment number to be transmitted to the cellular telephone The value is entered as an integer in the range 1 th
76. turned on and transmitting at the specified power level before the telephone s battery charge is depleted In this Operation the Test System monitors the status of the digital traffic channel every 5 seconds As long as the cellular telephone remains on the digital traffic channel the Test System concludes that the battery is still functional If the channel is dropped by the cellular telephone the Test System concludes that the battery charge is depleted and records and displays the time between the start of the Operation and the time at which the battery was determined to be depleted of charge One parameter is used in the MISC Battery Life on Digital Traffic Channel Transmit Operation It is DTC Transmit Power Level 0 10 This parameter is described in the following paragraphs DTC Transmit Power Level 0 10 This parameter allows you to specify the cellular telephone s transmitter output power during a battery life test The value is entered as an integer in the range 0 through 10 Pass Fail Limits Used One pass fail limits specification is used in the MISC Battery Life on Digital Traffic Channel Transmit Operation It is Transmit Time This specification is described in the following paragraphs 283 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 F me e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions MISC Battery Life on Digital Traffic Channel Transmit 284 Transmit Time This specification
77. used for only the following Operations TXA Audio Distortion TXA Audio Frequency Response TXA Hum and Noise TXA Modulation Deviation Limiting on Analog Voice Channel TXA Modulation Deviation Limiting on Narrow Analog Voice Channel RXA Audio Distortion RXA Audio Frequency Response RXA Expandor RXA Hum and Noise RXA Sensitivity SINAD RXA Sensitivity SINAD Narrow Analog Voice Channel RXA Sensitivity versus Channel Plotted The method of the audio connections is dependent on the cellular telephone being tested Consult the telephone manufacturer s documentation for the correct method Some manufacturers provide a method for audio signal breakout others require that the audio lines to the cellular telephone be tapped or an acoustic coupler be used on the handset Cc n Ke gt D wn fo o oO 75 Chapter 3 Using the Software Calibrating Cable Loss Calibrating Cable Loss NOTE 76 Inaccuracies can occur in your RF measurements because of cable losses and impedance mismatches Thus the following two steps are required for accurate testing 1 Measure or calculate losses to arrive at a calibration factor for RF cables connectors and adapters using standard techniques and methods 2 Include this calibration factor in the Cable Loss parameter in the GEN Modify Execution Parameters Operation see GEN Modify Execution Parameters on page 114 The Test Software includes a default calibration
78. wish to use a DVCC of 101 during testing enter 101 287 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 F me e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions MISC Battery Life on Digital Control Channel Standby Pass Fail Limits Used 288 One pass fail limits specification is used in the MISC Battery Life on Digital Control Channel Standby Operation It is Standby Time This specification is described in the following paragraphs Standby Time This specification sets the pass fail limits for the time that the cellular telephone will remain on in standby mode ready to receive calls before the battery charge is depleted The value is entered as a decimal number and in minutes Example If you determine that the standby time should be 240 minutes enter 240 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions MISC Digital Talk Back MISC Digital Talk Back NOTE Parameters Used This Operation verifies proper function of the cellular telephones digital transmit and receive channel It provides a qualitative evaluation of the digital audio function of the cellular telephone In running this Operation you will be prompted to speak into the cellular telephone s microphone The message spoken into the microphone must include words that will allow you to evaluate the quality of the received message on a mobile telephone It might be necessary to remove the handset from the cradle while speaking Test cables connecte
79. word sent e The digital mode of the cellular telephone might not be functioning properly 1 Run the test on another cellular telephone to determine if this message occurs again 2 Ifthe message does not occur it is likely that the cellular telephone is not functioning properly 3 Ifthe message does occur again check with the factory for a solution Call the factory at 1 800 922 8920 in the USA and Canada only e The level of the signal applied to the Test Set might be too low 1 Press the DUPLEX key 2 Read the value on the power meter 3 Compare this value with the power setting of the cellular telephone Channel error Range is 1 to 799 and 991 to 1023 Change channel number in the TESTS Set Up screen Channel entries must be in this specified range e Enter channel numbers into the Range List field Data collection address cannot be set to 10 Program stopped The second serial port in the Test Set has an address of 10 and is used for mobile control The Serial port with an address of 9 can be used for data collection If you are collecting data to an HP IB device you must enter all three digits of the address For additional information see Data Collection and Retrieval in chapter 6 on page 313 Duplicate file Over write old file The entered file name has the same name as one that is already stored on the storage medium You may use a file name once only If you answer Yes to Over write old file
80. 200 RX Audio Step Frequency 0 2700 Hz This parameter allows you to specify the step size used to vary the input signal frequency in cellular telephone s audio frequency response testing The value is entered as a real number in Hz and in the range 0 2700 Example If you wish to vary the modulation frequency from a start frequency to a stop frequency in 500 Hz steps enter 500 If you specify a step frequency of 0 the Test System performs the Operation at the specified start frequency then performs the Operation again and again indefinitely until you stop it manually This feature allows you to test the cellular telephone repetitively at a particular frequency RX Audio Stop Frequency 300 3000 Hz This parameter allows you to specify the stop frequency to be used in varying the input signal frequency in cellular telephone audio frequency response testing The value is entered as a real number in Hz and in the range 300 3000 Example If you wish to vary the modulation frequency stopping at a frequency of 2800 Hz enter 2800 NOTE Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions RXA Audio Frequency Response Compandor State Always On Control This parameter allows you to specify the cellular telephone compandor s operating mode The selections are Always On and Controllable If the compandor is selected to be enabled the Test System assumes that the cellular telephone s compressor circuitry is located before the p
81. 29 Test System Components 20 Test System to Printer Connections 70 test transmitter frequency error 20 test transmitter power on power levels 2 7 20 TEST_08 TXA SignalingTone DST pass fail limits used 182 testing customizing 94 testing conditions change 31 testing order securing 87 testing process overview 73 Testing Strategy 104 testing strategy components 104 Tests Default Parameters Screen 57 description 57 field descriptions 57 TESTS Main Menu Screen description 43 field descriptions 43 Tests Main Menu Screen default 43 HP 11807E 44 Tests Pass Fail Limits Screen 62 description 62 field descriptions 62 Tests Set Up Screen 47 description 47 field descriptions 47 Tests Specific Parameters Screen 52 description 52 field descriptions 52 tests results collected 31 displayed 31 printed 31 TESTS screens defined 354 Tests Subsystem 41 features listing 41 time division multiple access defined 354 toggle defined 354 transmission continuous or discontinuous 118 120 transportable cellular telephone defined 355 trigger or clock error 299 TXA Transmitter Analog 102 TXA Audio Distortion Operation 168 parameters used 168 pass fail limits used 169 TXA Audio Frequency Response Opera tion 170 parameters used 170 pass fail limits used 171 TXA Compressor Response Operation 173 parameters used 173 pass fail limits used 174 TXA Current Drain Operation 177 parame
82. 4 supplied procedures 367 listing 76 switch AC DC 40 sync word error 297 300 sync word timing error 300 SyncLoc invalid result 297 system ID 118 system identification defined 354 368 T Take It 342 TDMA defined 354 telephone registration 20 TEMP procedure content 76 terminal emulator 319 configuration 315 DataStorm Technologies Inc Pro Comm 312 HP AdvanceLink 312 test defined 354 test execution conditions 83 setting 83 test order change 31 test procedure 41 customizing 66 defined 354 loading 66 running 66 selecting 77 test procedure run mode 84 test procedures customizing 94 test results output destination 83 output failures 83 output heading 83 printing 82 retrieving from a disk 319 retrieving from a memory card 310 325 saving 307 selection 83 where sent 83 Test Results Are Unexpected 293 test results unexpected 292 test screens printing 82 Test Set how to determine settings 292 HP 8920B Option 800 20 32 HP 8920D 20 Test Set configuration error 301 Test Set Doesn t Power Up 294 Index Test Software 30 customizing 74 general description 30 Test Software Package items included 30 test strategy Cellular Telephone Number 107 Explicit and Implicit Call Processing 104 Miscellaneous Items 109 Mobile Identification Number 107 Verifying Functionality 106 Test Suite 41 test suite defined 354 test system overall description
83. 50 dBm RF signal to the receiver antenna 2 Modulates the 50 dBm RF signal to deviate to 8 kHz at a 1 kHz rate with a SAT present Narrow analog operation uses a 3 kHz deviation and DSAT The SAT is always on during this Operation Parameters Used No parameters are used in the RXA Hum and Noise Operation Pass Fail Limits Used One pass fail limits specification is used in the RXA Hum and Noise Operation It is RXA Hum and Noise This specification is described in the following paragraphs 236 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions RXA Hum and Noise RXA Hum and Noise This specification sets the pass fail limits used in testing the hum and noise level of the cellular telephone receiver The value is entered as a decimal number as the upper limit only and in dB Pass fail limits specifications are determined using any applicable standard such as e EIA TIA Standard Hum and Noise Example If you determine that the hum and noise level of the receiver should be at least 32 dB below the audio output for a 1 kHz modulated RF carrier at 50 dBm having a 8 kHz peak frequency deviation enter 32 as the upper limit 237 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 F me e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions RXA Mobile Reported Interference RXA Mobile Reported Interference NOTE Background Parameters Used 238 This is an NAMPS only Operation The channels must indicate the offs
84. 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions RXA RF Sensitivity RXA RF Sensitivity NOTE NOTE 240 Audio connections from the cellular telephone to the Test System are required for this Operation This Operation sets and measures the cellular telephone receiver s RF sensitivity or SINAD when the telephone is operating on an analog voice channel AVC SINAD is the ratio expressed in dB of Signal Noise Distortion to Noise Distortion The receiver s SINAD is measured at the receiver s audio output at the RF level specified by the RF Level for SINAD Test parameter This measurement differs from a distortion measurement in that it is conducted at low RF input levels where the noise contribution is significant Receivers are typically required to provide at least 12 dB SINAD less than 25 percent noise and distortion for RF input levels below 1 microvolt In this Operation the Test System modulates the RF signal to deviate to 8 kHz at a 1 kHz rate with a supervisory audio tone SAT present Narrow analog operation uses a 3 kHz deviation and DSAT This Operation is ordinarily performed at the nominal supply voltage but it may be performed with high and low supply voltages for extreme measurements In such case the measurement is repeated at high and low supply voltages if the Test at Extreme Supply Voltages parameter is set to Yes If the Test at Extreme Supply Voltages parameter is set to Yes see GEN
85. 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions RXA Forward Voice Channel Order Message Error Rate RXA Forward Voice Channel Order Message Error Rate Parameters Used 234 This Operation simulates sending a forward voice channel FVC order message from the Test System to the cellular telephone and measures the Order Message Error Rate Specifically in this Operation the Test System does the following 1 Sends a forward voice channel FVC audit message 100 times and counts the number of acknowledgments from the cellular telephone 2 Sets the RF level as specified by the RF Level for Message Error Rate Test parameter 3 Terminates the Operation if the cellular telephone misses 10 acknowledgments in a row The FVC order message error rate is expressed in percent One parameter is used in the RXA Forward Voice Channel Order Message Error Rate Operation It is RF Level for Message Error Rate Test 30 to 120 dBm This parameter is described in the following paragraphs RF Level for Message Error Rate Test 30 to 120 dBm This parameter allows you to specify the RF signal level to be used for testing the cellular telephone forward voice channel FVC message error rate The standard level required for call processing tests is 100 dBm The typical level is 50 dBm The value is entered as a real number in dBm and in the range 120 to 30 Example If you wish to use an RF level of 50 dBm enter 50
86. A Audio Distortion To verify transmitter audio connection RXA RF Sensitivity To verify analog receiver and receiver audio connection 113 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 2 z pei e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions GEN Modify Execution Parameters GEN Modify Execution Parameters Parameters Used 114 This Operation is used to modify a parameter that affects general functioning of a test procedure It may be included in a test suite merely to set the parameter values that affect the manner in which the Test System operates when running the Test Software It does not perform any tests make any measurements or compare any readings to limit specifications The parameters used in the GEN Modify Execution Parameters Operation are Connection Port RF In Out Dup Ant Cable Loss 0 120 dB Units for Power Measurement W dBW or dBm Print Opt s MV P F MV amp PF MV amp Limits amp P F or Limits amp P F These parameters are described in the following paragraphs Connection Port RF In Out Dup Ant This parameter allows you to specify the Test System RF ports to be used for cellular telephone tests Two selections are provided in a one of many format RF In Out and Dup Ant Selecting RF In Out causes the RF IN OUT port to be used for both forward and reverse channels Selecting Dup Ant causes the DUPLEX OUT port to be used for the forward channel and the ANT IN
87. About this Manual We ve added this manual to the Agilent website in an effort to help you support your product This manual is the best copy we could find it may be incomplete or contain dated information If we find a more recent copy in the future we will add it to the Agilent website Support for Your Product Agilent no longer sells or supports this product Our service centers may be able to perform calibration if no repair parts are needed but no other support from Agilent is available You will find any other available product information on the Agilent Test amp Measurement website www tm agilent com HP References in this Manual This manual may contain references to HP or Hewlett Packard Please note that Hewlett Packard s former test and measurement semiconductor products and chemical analysis businesses are now part of Agilent Technologies We have made no changes to this manual copy In other documentation to reduce potential confusion the only change to product numbers and names has been in the company name prefix where a product number name was HP XXXX the current name number is now Agilent XXXX For example model number HP8648A is now model number Agilent 8648A HP 11807E Option 014 AMPS NAMPS DAMPS DCCH Mobile Test Software User s Guide Software Version B 02 00 and above HP Part No 11807 90145 Printed in U S A August 1997 Rev B Copyright Hewlett Packard Company 1996 1997 RESTRICTED Use dup
88. Audio Tone Deviation Closure and Phase Jitter Parameters Used 192 One parameter is used in the TXA Digital Supervisory Audio Tone Deviation Closure and Phase Jitter Operation It is DSAT Vector This parameter is described in the following paragraphs DSAT Vector This parameter allows you to specify the Digital Supervisory Audio Tone DSAT sequence to be used whenever the cellular telephone is operating on a narrow voice channel The value is entered as an integer in the range 0 through 6 The seven valid sequences are 0 2556CB 1 255B2B 2 256A9B 3 25AD4D 4 26AB2B 5 26B2AD 6 2969AB Example If you wish to use the first sequence shown above enter 0 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXA Digital Supervisory Audio Tone Deviation Closure and Phase Jitter Pass Fail Limits Used The pass fail limits specifications used in the TXA Digital Supervisory Audio Tone Deviation Closure and Phase Jitter Operation are DSAT Closure DSAT Deviation DSAT Phase Jitter These specifications are described in the following paragraphs DSAT Closure This specification sets the pass fail limits that are used when closure of the eye pattern see figure 30 is measured for the DSAT transmitted by the cellular telephone on a narrow voice channel The values are entered as decimal numbers and as upper and lower limits Pass fail limits specifications are determined using any applicable standard such as
89. C command line A second way to initialize a card is to run the ROM program RAM_MNG Initialize an SRAM card using IBASIC as follows 1 Press the TESTS key The TESTS Main Menu screen will appear 2 From the SET UP TEST SET list select IBASIC IBASIC Cntrl1 to switch to the TESTS IBASIC Controller screen 3 Move the cursor to the IBASIC command line and select it 4 Perform one of the following two steps as appropriate e LIF format From the list of characters in the Choices menu select and enter the following IBASIC command INITIALIZE INTERNAL e DOS format From the list of characters in the Choices menu select and enter the following IBASIC command INITIALIZE DOS INTERNAL NOTE Chapter 6 Reference Memory Cards Initialize an SRAM card using RAM_MNG as follows Loading RAM_MNG will delete any procedure or program in memory Press the TESTS key The TESTS Main Menu screen will appear Move the cursor to the Select Procedure Location field and select it From the Choices field select ROM D i e Ss iv Move the cursor to the Select Procedure Filename field and select it From the Choices menu select RAM_MNG Press the k1 Run Test key aS Ae OR ea Follow the displayed instructions Retrieving Data from an SRAM Card NOTE To retrieve the test results after the results have been saved on an SRAM card you must run an IBASIC program The fo
90. DAMPS DCCH Software User s Guide part number 11807 90145 Software Functions Software Features Chapter 2 Product Description Test Software The Test Software performs the following functions Call Processing including such items as page origination handoff and release and involving analog and digital control channels analog voice channels narrow analog voice channels and digital traffic channels Functional Testing Parametric Testing The following features simplify testing Test results and pass fail indications are shown on the Test Set s display Test results may be collected in a disk drive SRAM card PC or HP Palmtop computer Test results may be printed Test order parameters pass fail limits testing conditions and equipment configurations may be changed easily by the operator RF path losses may be determined and corrected 31 U fe Qa c O o o o me e 3 Chapter 2 Product Description Hardware Considerations Hardware Considerations This section addresses the hardware issues relevant to operating the Test Software in a typical application Applicable Hardware The HP 11807E Option 014 AMPS NAMPS DAMPS DCCH Mobile Test Software requires the following items for operation e HP 8920B Option 800 RF Communications Test Set see figure 8 which consists of the following HP 8920B RF Communications Test Set HP 83206 TDMA Cellular Adapter
91. DMA cellular telephone systems that meet the requirements of Interim Standard 136 a channel used to transmit control information between the base station and mobile stations digital signaling tone DST A sub audible FM data signal that is transmitted by a mobile station to a base station when certain signaling operations must occur digital supervisory audio tone DSAT A sub audible FM data signal that is transmitted on a voice channel by a base station transmitter transponded by a mobile station and used in determining RF path integrity digital traffic channel DTC In TDMA cellular telephone systems that meet the requirements of Interim Standards 54B and 136 a channel used to transmit primary secondary and signaling traffic between the base station and mobile stations digital verification color code An eight bit signal sent by the base station to the mobile station It is used to generate the coded digital verification color code CDVCC which indicates that the correct data are being decoded Disp Loc Displayed Location A Test Software menu function that is used to display an assembly diagram that shows the location of the adjustable component downband In TDMA systems a special set of frequencies below the normal cellular band DSAT See digital supervisory audio tone DST See digital signaling tone DTC See digital traffic channel DTMF See dual tone multi frequency dual tone multi frequency DTMF
92. Digital Traffic Channel Power Level 0 10 Cellular Digital Traffic Channel Vocoder VSELP ACELP These parameters are described in the following paragraphs Digital Traffic Channel DVCC 1 255 This parameter allows you to specify the Digital Verification Color Code DVCC number to be transmitted to the cellular telephone on the digital traffic channel The value is entered as an integer in the range 1 through 255 Example If you wish to use a DVCC of 101 during testing enter 101 Digital Traffic Channel Slot 1 3 This parameter allows you to specify the timeslot assignment number to be transmitted to the cellular telephone The value is entered as an integer in the range 1 through 3 Example If you wish the cellular telephone to be active on timeslots 2 and 4 enter 2 157 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 2 z pei e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions CP Handoff from Analog Voice Channel to Digital Traffic Channel Digital Traffic Channel Power Level 0 10 This parameter allows you to specify the power level at which the cellular telephone will transmit when it is operated on a digital traffic channel The value is entered as an integer in the range 0 through 10 Example If you wish to use power level 10 enter 10 Cellular Digital Traffic Channel Vocoder VSELP A CELP This parameter allows you to specify the type of speech decoding used during cellular digital traffic c
93. IGURE screen press the Esc key then the C key on your terminal computer Make certain to use upper case C for this example Alternate sequences for five commonly used functions also are available Press and hold down the Ctrl control key and press the corresponding key for the desired function Example Ctrl H moves the cursor to the left one space These functions are The carrot represents the control key ENTER J or M KNOB_TURN_CW R CANCEL C KNOB_TURN_CCW L BACKSPACE 4H 321 Chapter 6 Reference Data Collection and Retrieval Table 14 Equivalent Front Panel Control Characters Equiv Equiv Function ESC Function ESC Char Char CANCEL k5 5 PERCENT MHZ_V K1_PRIME 6 S_KHZ_MV K2_PRIME 7 BACKSPACE K3_PRIME 8 ENTER ASSIGN 9 RELEASE 0 KNOB_TURN_CCW lt Kl 1 KNOB_TURN_CW gt K2 2 MSSG A K3 3 HELP B K4 4 CONFIG C HOLD D RX a PRINT E TX b ADRS F DUPLEX c SAVE G PREV d REF_SET J TESTS_MAIN e METER K LOCAL f AVG L RECALL g LO_LIMIT M MEAS_RESET h HI_LIMIT N PRESET i E R INCR_DIV_10 j F S INCR_SET k B U INCR_TIMES_10 1 C V DOWN m D wW UP n 322 Chapter 6 Reference Data Collection and Retrieval 323 Table 14 Equivalent Front Panel Control Characters Equiv Equiv Function ESC Function ESC Char Char A X SEVEN o 2 EEX Z EIGHT p 3 YES_
94. Modify External Power Supply Parameters on page 117 so that output power measurements are made at high supply voltage and low supply voltage this Operation requires a properly configured programmable power supply see TXA Current Drain on page 182 Parameters Used NOTE Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions RXA RF Sensitivity The parameters used in the RXA RF Sensitivity Operation are RF Level for SINAD Test 30 to 120 dBm RF Lvl for SINAD at Extreme Supply Volt 30 to 120 dBm These parameters are described in the following paragraphs RF Level for SINAD Test 30 to 120 dBm This parameter allows you to specify the receiver input RF signal level for measuring SINAD on wide voice channels at the nominal power supply voltage The value is entered as a real number in dBm and in the range 30 through 120 Example If you wish to set the receiver input RF signal level to 116 dBm enter 116 RF Lvl for SINAD at Extreme Supply Volt 30 to 120 dBm This parameter allows you to specify the RF signal level for measuring SINAD on wide voice channels at extreme supply voltage conditions The value is entered as a real number in dBm and in the range 30 through 120 The Test at Extreme Supply Voltages parameter must be set to Yes for this parameter to be active see GEN Modify External Power Supply Parameters on page 117 Example If you wish to use an RF signal level of 90 dBm ente
95. ON_OFF NINE q 8 NO_PPM_W FOUR T RX a FIVE s SIX t POINT y ONE u PLUS_MINUS Z TWO v OHM_PCT_DEL_DBUV THREE w DB_GHZ_DBM ZERO x MS_HZ_UV Chapter 6 Reference Data Collection and Retrieval Initializing a Disk 324 If you are starting with a blank disk you must initialize it to the format that you have chosen Disk drives require specific commands to perform initialization You should verify that the drive that you are using can be controlled by the Test Set and that you are initializing a disk using a drive or PC that has a compatible format Two procedures that use the Test Set s IBASIC commands to initialize some disks follow Initialize a disk to LIF in an HP IB disk drive as follows 1 Press the TESTS key The TESTS Main Menu screen will appear 2 From the SET UP TEST SET list select IBASIC IBASIC Cntrl to switch to the TESTS IBASIC Controller screen 3 Move the cursor to the IBASIC command field the large field in the upper part of the screen and select it 4 From the list of characters in the Choices menu select and enter the following INITIALIZE 7xx y where xx the HP IB address of the disk drive and y the unit number of the drive Initialize a disk to DOS in an HP IB disk drive as follows Follow the procedure for the LIF format replacing the INITIALIZE statement with INITIALIZE DOS 7xx y Chapter 6 Reference Data Collection and Retrieval Retrieving Data from
96. Operation must be performed in a quiet environment No parameters are used in the TXA FM Hum and Noise Operation Pass Fail Limits Used 196 One pass fail limits specification is used in the TXA FM Hum and Noise Operation It is FM Hum and Noise This specification is described in the following paragraphs Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXA FM Hum and Noise FM Hum and Noise This specification sets the pass fail limits for the transmitter s residual FM hum and noise The value is entered as a decimal number as the upper limit only in dB Pass fail limits specifications are determined using any applicable standard such as e EIA TIA Standard FM Hum and Noise Example If you determine that FM hum and noise should be at least 32 dB below the level of a 1 kHz tone at 8 kHz deviation enter 32 197 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 F me e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXA Frequency Error TXA Frequency Error Parameters Used This Operation measures the cellular telephone transmitter s output for the difference between the unmodulated carrier frequency and the assigned carrier frequency TX frequency error is measured on a voice channel with voice modulation off and SAT modulation on The frequency error is expressed in parts per million ppm No parameters are used in the TXA Frequency Error Operation Pass Fail Limits Used 198 One pass fail l
97. PECIFICATION TOLERANCE 20 LOG r COMPRESSOR MINIMUM OUT gt 17 6 dB 30 IN SPECIFICATION TOLERANCE 10 20 24 6 COMPRESSOR TRACK ERROR lt 0 SPECIFICATION TOLERANCE 5 RELATIVE INPUT VOLTAGE dB 10 Ea t 15 RELATIVE OUTPUT dB l lt 0dB gt 0dB gt 17 6 dB Figure 29 Compressor Curve 180 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXA Compressor Response Compressor Tracking Error gt 0 dB This specification sets the pass fail limits that are used when the compressor circuits are measured with the relative input levels above 0 dB In this condition the compressor relative output deviation tolerance should be within the limits that you set in this specification for the compressor track error The value is entered as a decimal number as upper and lower limits in dB Pass fail limits specifications are determined using any applicable standard such as e EIA TIA Standard Compressor Example If your standard sets the output voltage tolerance to 5 dB from the compressor curve in figure 29 on page 180 enter 5 as the lower limit and 5 as the upper limit NOTE The lower limit LL used in the TXA Compressor Response Test when the relative input level is gt 17 6 dB is calculated using the following formula RelativeInputVoltage 2 Example for lower limit specification when the relative input level is 20 dB LL 8 8 UpperLimitCompressorTrackingError gt 0 dB LowerLimit
98. Press Wait approximately 20 Insert Card HP 1 POWER 2 seconds for display to 3 11807E Opt 014 appear see figure 4 then continue at step 3 Figure 3 Setup and Software Loading Process 24 Chapter 1 Getting Started Setup and Software Card Loading RX TEST SINAD AC Level nm a m a i 0 10 24 0 00009 Q D gt Q ip 5 RF Gen Frea AFGeni Freaj AFGen2 Freaj Filter 1 To Screen 50Hz HPF G g MHz kHz kHz 2 Anplitude AFGent To AFGen2 To Filter 2 FM 15kHz LPF dEn off Atten Hold DECODER nit Ext Load R HAPU Gutput Port adi RE Qut Ourl Q Figure 4 RX TEST Screen TESTS Moin Menu E LOAD TEST PROCEDURE Select Procedure Location Help Select Procedure Filename Library Program To Screen RF GEN RF AHL Description CUSTOMIZE TEST PROCEDURE SET UP TEST SET TH Execution Cond J External Devices i Order of Tests aegis Printer Setup a Poss Foil Limits IBASIC Cntrl H Sove Delete Procedure More Figure 5 TESTS Main Menu Screen 25 Chapter 1 Getting Started Selecting and Running the Initial Tests Selecting and Running the Initial Tests Perform the procedure for selecting and running the initial tests as shown in figure 6 The screen that results from this procedure is shown in figure 7 1 Read information below then begin at step 2 Position the cursor at Select Procedure Location and select it A If you need help locati
99. Printers Escape Sequence Print Feature amp 166P Sets page length to 66 lines amp 172P Sets page length to 72 lines amp 16D Sets lines per inch to 6 lines amp 18D Sets lines to inch to 8 lines s12h12v6T Selects 12 characters per inch 12 72 inch character height gothic typeface amp a9L amp 16E Sets left margin to 9 characters top margin to 6 lines s12h12v6T amp a9L amp 16E Selects 12 characters per inch 12 72 inch character height gothic typeface left margin to 9 characters top margin to 6 lines amp 18d88P Selects 8 lines per inch 88 lines per page amp 18d96P Selects 8 lines per inch 96 lines per page s16 67h12V amp al7L amp 16E Selects 16 67 characters per inch 12 72 inch character height left margin to 17 characters top margin to 6 lines 339 Printing D p h O O Ss 9 p Chapter 6 Reference Printing Printing TESTS Screens TESTS screens include the following 340 TESTS Set Up k3 Print A11 TESTS Specific Parameters k3 Print Al11 TESTS Default Parameters k3 Print Tst TESTS Pass Fail Limits k2 Print All andk3 Print Tst TESTS External Devices k3 Print A1l1 Use the same general process to print the information for all of the above TESTS screens Print tests screens as follows 1 Make certain that your printer is properly connected and configured see Printing on page 333
100. Procedure Filename A Position the cursor at Card and select it Position the cursor at Select Procedure Filename and select it Position P Sea KO ie Select Position i DA ad LOAD TEST PROCEDURE select Procedure Location Select Card x Select Procedure Filename Q Position the cursor at Choices and select the desired procedure Position the cursor at Run Test and select it The software is now loading Position oo Select Position l ikun Test ee J Follow the screen a Continue a 7 REE prompts When testing is complete Select test results will be displayed on the screen Figure 27 82 Selecting a Test Procedure Chapter 3 Using the Software Using Common Processes Using Common Processes This section includes descriptions of the more commonly useful processes available for using the Test Software These descriptions are selected for inclusion here because you will probably use most in your everyday applications Other processes that are not used very often are described in chapter 6 Reference on page 309 The descriptions are presented in alphabetical order as follows e Exiting a Procedure e Pausing Stopping or Continuing a Procedure e Printing e Setting Test Execution Conditions e Using Procedures e Verifying and Editing Parameters e Verifying and Editing Pass Fail Limits Specifications Cc n Ke
101. Product Description Tests Subsystem Print Printer Setup Field Selecting this field displays the TESTS Printer Setup screen Proc Save Delete Procedure Field Selecting this field displays the TESTS Save Delete Procedure screen Program Field Selecting this field displays program information for the file chosen in the Select Procedure Filename field The program information is updated automatically Run Test Field Selecting this field or pressing k1 loads and runs the procedure chosen in the Select Procedure Filename field Select Procedure Filename Field Selecting this field allows you to specify the procedure that you wish to load from or save to the location chosen in the Select Procedure Location field Selecting this field displays the Choices field in the lower right hand corner of the display The choices displayed are the procedures already available in the selected location If you are saving a new procedure you may enter the new name from the list of characters available U fe Qa c O o o o me e 3 Select Procedure Location Field Selecting this field allows you to select the location from which you wish to load a procedure or the location to which you wish to save a procedure Selecting this field displays the Choices field in the lower right hand corner of the display The choices available are Card ROM RAM and Disk Setup Chan Seq Parm Spec Field Se
102. Set up the Test System for data collection to a PC as follows 1 2 Press the TESTS key The TESTS Main Menu screen will appear From the SET UP TEST SET list select Cnfg External Devices to switch to the TESTS External Devices screen Move the cursor to the Calling Name field and select it From the list of characters in the Choices menu enter the following next to the Inst 1 field DATA C The entry will be similar to 1 DATA C Move the cursor to the Addr field and select it Using the DATA keypad enter 9 and press the ENTER key The display will be similar to 1 DATA C 9 Calling names may be entered in any order Chapter 6 Reference Data Collection and Retrieval Configuration for Terminal or PC Operation NOTE NOTE It is preferable to enter long strings of characters into fields using a terminal Determine the characteristics of the serial port when it is used for instrument control from a terminal or terminal emulator by settings in the Test Set s I O CONFIGURE screen Set the following e Serial Into Inst D p h O O Ss 7 D e IBASIC Echo to On e Inst Echo to On Set the remaining configuration entries to match the settings of your terminal or PC program Table 14 on page 322 lists the terminal computer keystrokes that equate to front panel controls Each equivalent character must be preceded by pressing the Escape key For example to remotely access the CONF
103. Software function together properly as a Test System Verify that the Test System functions with the cellular telephone Test System Components 20 The Test System includes the following components e HP 8920B Option 800 RF Communications Test Set which consists of the following HP 8920B RF Communications Test Set HP 83206 TDMA Cellular Adapter e HP 11807E Option 014 AMPS NAMPS DAMPS DCCH Mobile Test Software These components are shown in figure 1 Chapter 1 Getting Started What You Will Test Instrument Display USER Keys TESTS Key PRESET Key Screen Use to enter some Use to access the Use to reset all commands quickly main Tests screen instrument settings HP 83206 TDMA Cellular Adapter Q 5 o D Qa HP 8920B RF Communications gt Test Set POWER Switch Shift and Cancel Keys Cursor Control Knob Data Keys Use to abort Use to position cursor Use to enter IBASIC programs and make screen specifications and selections parameter values and so forth ae TUP T AMPS NAMPS DAMPS DCCH 5 Mobile Test Software uu For use in the HP 8920B RF Communications HP 11807E Bee gt teg Insert Card i Feil Press TESTS Option 014 Test FRM Select Card tor Procedure Location PA Select desired Procedure Filename Software BS scoct Fun Tost O Hewlett Packard
104. Start Freauency Hz TH Audio Step Frequency 500 0000 Hz Th Audio Stop Freauency 3000 0000 Hz mcef Parns Print All TESTS Specific Parameters Screen Showing Numerical Entry 55 U fe Qa c O o o o me e 3 Chapter 2 Product Description Tests Subsystem Figure 17 56 m TESTS Specific Porameters Poraneters used in testi istration on ACCH Description value Units B System Identification SID number moef Paris Print All Hele TESTS Specific Parameters Screen Showing Integer Chapter 2 Product Description Tests Subsystem TESTS Default Parameters Screen Access this screen by selecting the Parms Default Parameters field in the TESTS Main Menu screen This screen displays all of the parameters available in the library grouped by Operation Selecting the Operation from the menu updates the screen to display all of the relevant parameters for that Operation Any of the Operations in the library may be selected Defaults may be changed to create a tailored set of defaults that apply to all of the parameters specific to an Operation Defaults are used as initial settings for all Operations If a parameter in an Operation is changed using the TESTS Specific Parameters screen that parameter value is used as the default when the Operation is used in a test suite The following paragraphs describe the various fields
105. System supports the following Printers HP ThinkJet printer HP QuietJet printer HP PaintJet printer HP DeskJet printer HP LaserJet printer Epson FX 80 printer Epson LQ 850 printer If you do not have one of these printers consult your printer manual for the correct printer settings to emulate one of the supported printers 333 Chapter 6 Reference Printing Printer Connection Figure 33 334 Printer connections are of two types HP IB and serial These are described in the following paragraphs HP IB Connection Connect an HP IB printer to the Test Set s rear panel HP IB connector using an HP IB cable Serial Connection Connect a serial printer to the serial port as shown in figure 33 Use the following RJ 11 pins for this connection e RJ 11 Pin 2 Test Set Receive Data e RJ 11 Pin 4 Ground e RJ 11 Pin 5 Test Set Transmit Data Test Set Rear Panel SES SELES odes E Peete PEN A Bee Pe BeBoPoZ g8o80R08 TRANSMIT ADDRESS 10 Port B TRANSMIT ADDRESS 9 GROUND NO CONNECT RECEIVE ADDRESS 9 RECEIVE ADDRESS 10 Port B Serial Port Configuration Chapter 6 Reference Printing Parallel Connection Connect a parallel printer the parallel port as shown in figure 34 D i e Ss iv PIN lt nh nStrobe T Zz nAutoEd Data 1 G rl nFault Data 2 2 G M ninit Data 3 G nS
106. TA FUNCTIONS 38 defined 349 description 33 INSTRUMENT STATE 38 left arrow 39 SCREEN CONTROL 39 SHIFT 39 USER 39 knob defined 349 knobs CURSOR CONTROL 40 description 33 SQUELCH 40 362 L left arrow backspace key 39 library defined 349 saving 85 LIF disk format 307 Inobs VOLUME 40 loading a procedure 85 location defined 349 low pass filter defined 349 LPF defined 349 Index M Main Menu 342 defined 350 maintenance mode 168 manual organization 3 measurement defined 350 memory access error 301 memory card access error 298 memory cards are used for 321 defined 350 determining whether it is OTP flash or SRAM 321 flash 321 how they re powered 321 initializing 324 inserting 321 OTP 321 removing 322 retrieving data from 310 325 saving data to 307 SRAM 321 SRAM battery part number 322 Static Random Access Memory SRAM 322 storage space needed 323 write protect switch 322 memory space determining the amount used 291 Memory Space Problems 291 menu defined 350 message defined 350 MIC ACC connector 36 MIN defined 350 MISC Miscellaneous 102 MISC Battery Life Test Standby Opera tion 280 282 parameters used 280 282 pass fail limits used 280 283 MISC Battery Life Test Transmit Opera tion 276 278 parameters used 276 278 pass fail limits used 276 278 MISC Digital Talk Back Operation 284 parameters used 284 pass fail limit
107. TEST SET list select IBASIC IBASIC Cntrl to switch to the TESTS IBASIC Controller screen 3 Move the cursor to the data entry field and select it 4 Using the list of characters in the Choices menu select and enter the following command po p h O O Ss 7 D INITIALIZE MEMORY 0 lt volume number 1 3 gt lt volume size gt or INITIALIZE MEMORY 0 1 50 The optional volume size in the command lets you specify the memory area set aside for each disk in 256 byte blocks 343 Chapter 6 Reference Saving Tests Results Saving Tests Results See Data Collection and Retrieval on page 313 344 Chapter 6 Reference Serial Port Serial Port Figure 35 Use the 6 pin RJ 11 serial port to input and output serial data Use serial data for entering programs printing and for sending test results to a connected controller disk drive or terminal D p h O O Ss 7 D Use the TESTS External Devices screen to define serial communications settings Use ground with IBASIC and all other serial connections Use Transmit B and Receive B exclusively with IBASIC programs Use Transmit and Receive with all other serial connections see figure 35 TRANSMIT ADDRESS 10 Port B TRANSMIT ADDRESS 9 GROUND NO CONNECT RECEIVE ADDRESS 9 RECEIVE ADDRESS 10 Port B Serial Port Configuration 345 Chapter 6 Reference Serial Port The IBASIC Controller
108. TXA Supervisory Audio Tone Frequency Error and Deviation Operation parameters used 211 TXA Supervisroy Audio Tone Frequency Error and Deviation Operation pass fail limits used 213 Index TXA Wideband Data Deviation Opera tion 214 parameters used 216 pass fail limits used 216 TXD Transmitter Digital 102 TXD Adjacent Channel Power Opera tion 245 parameters used 245 pass fail limits used 245 TXD Modulation Accuracy 10 Burst Operation 253 parameters used 253 pass fail limits used 255 TXD Modulation Accuracy Operation 247 parameters used 247 pass fail limits used 249 TXD RF Power Outpu vs Channel Plot ted Operation parameters used 265 TXD RF Power Output Operation 259 parameters used 259 pass fail limits used 261 TXD RF Power Output vs Channel Plot ted Operation pass fail limits used 267 TXD Time Alignment Operation 270 parameters used 270 pass fail limits used 270 369 U unexpected test results 292 unit under test defined 355 un securing a procedure 85 87 Updated Software Service 5 USER keys 39 342 defined 355 using common processes 79 UUT defined 355 370 Vv Y values Yes 342 defined 355 verifying and editing parameters 90 verifying and editing pass fail limits 92 verifying functionality 106 verifying parameters 90 verifying pass fail limits 92 VOLUME control knob 40 Index
109. To perform testing in a roaming environment this parameter must use an ID different from that of the cellular telephone Example If your cellular telephone s SID number is decimal 11111 enter 11111 DCCH DVCC 0 255 This parameter allows you to specify the Digital Verification Color Code DVCC number to be transmitted to the cellular telephone on the digital control channel The value is entered as an integer in the range 0 through 255 Example If you wish to use a DVCC of 101 during testing enter 101 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions CP Release to Digital Control Channel Pass Fail Limits Used No pass fail limits specifications are used in the CP Release to Digital Control Channel Operation 171 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 F me e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions CP Hook Flash CP Hook Flash This Operation verifies that the correct hook flash number 3 digits is correctly sent by the cellular telephone Specifically in this Operation the Test System does the following 1 Establishes a voice channel if it is not already on a voice channel 2 Prompts you to dial a 3 digit number and press the cellular telephone s SEND key 3 Ifthe channel is a wide voice channel the Test System detects the resulting signaling tone from the cellular telephone and sends a send called address order to the cellular telephone on the forward voice channel FVC NOTE St
110. a Collection and Retrieval Data Collection and Retrieval You may collect save and retrieve test results data You may elect to save test results to a PC card to a disk drive or to a PC The following paragraphs describe procedures for collecting and retrieving data and for various ancillary functions Collection to a PC Card or Disk You must make entries into the TESTS External Devices screen to describe the type of data collection that you are using Configure external device entries as follows 1 Press the TESTS key The TESTS Main Menu screen will appear 2 From the SET UP TEST SET list select Cnfg External Devices to switch to the TESTS External Devices screen 3 Move the cursor to the Calling Name field and select it 4 From the list of characters in the Choices field enter the following next to the Inst 1 field DATA C The entry will be similar to 1 DATA C 5 Move the cursor to the Addr field and select it 6 Using the DATA keypad enter a number into the Addr field depending on the type of storage medium that you will be using Press the ENTER key when finished If you are using a PC card enter into the Addr field The display will be similar to 1 DATA C 1 If you are using a disk drive enter the HP IB disk address For example if the drive you are using is set to 700 the display will be similar to 1 DATA C 700 Calling names may be entered in any order 313 D i e S
111. a Deviation pass fail limits specification This method is selected by setting the Data Portion Tested parameter to Both In the third method the Test System performs the test on only the steady state portion of the RVC data signal as described in the second method This method is selected by setting the Data Portion Tested parameter to Steady 219 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 F me e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXA Wideband Data Deviation Background Applications 220 In all three methods the cellular telephone should blank the supervisory audio tone SAT before sending the RVC message therefore SAT deviation should not be included in the deviation measurement If the cellular telephone has an open microphone the readings might be affected by background noise In this case mute the handset Using the first method Hewlett Packard Company has found that some cellular telephones fail this Operation because the telephones produce a carrier frequency transient at the beginning of wideband data transmission This causes the peak frequency deviation to exceed the maximum specification of 8 kHz 10 percent or a total of 8 8 kHz specified in the EIA TIA IS 55 Standard This transient typically occurs during the first 10 milliseconds of the wideband data transmission from the telephone The Test System measures the FM peak deviation during the entire period while the telephone transmi
112. a Disk NOTE One way to retrieve the test results from a disk is to run an IBASIC program A program to transfer data from a disk to a terminal emulator is given below You may type it into the IBASIC command line from the terminal emulator Make certain that your program is saved because it will be deleted from programmable memory The file name for this example is RES The disk address is 700 and the drive number is 0 The entire file name is RES 700 0 D p h O O Ss 7 D Enter the data retrieval program as follows 1 Press the TESTS key The TESTS Main Menu screen will appear 2 From the SET UP TEST SET list select IBASIC IBASIC Cntrl1 from the field to switch to the TESTS IBASIC Controller screen 3 Move the cursor to the IBASIC command field the large field in the upper part of the display and select it In the following step make certain that the any IBASIC program that you had been running is saved on disk or a PC card before deleting it from the Test Set s memory 4 From the list of characters in the Choices field enter the following to delete the previous IBASIC program SCRATCH 325 Chapter 6 Reference Data Collection and Retrieval NOTE 326 5 From the list of characters in the Choices field enter the following program 10 DIM A 120 Sets the string length to 120 20 ASSIGN File TO RES 700 0 Opens a path to the file called RES for results
113. al channel The value is entered as an integer in the range 1 through 1023 Example If you wish to step the plot in 100 channel increments enter 100 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXD RF Power Output vs Channel Plotted TXD Power TXD Power Stop Channel Number 1 799 991 1023 This parameter allows you to specify the stop channel to be used in constructing a plot of the cellular telephone transmitter output power in relation to channel numbers in RF power output testing when the cellular telephone is operating on a digital channel The value is entered as an integer in the range 1 through 799 and 991 through 1023 Example If you wish to stop the plot at channel 500 enter 500 TXD Output Power Levels Tested 0 0 10 2 10 0 amp 10 or 10 This parameter allows you to specify the output power levels to be tested and plotted in relation to channel numbers Five selections are provided in a one of many format These are O causes current to be measured and plotted at power level 0 only 0 10 causes current to be measured and plotted at power levels 0 through 10 2 10 causes current to be measured and plotted at power levels 2 through 10 O amp 10 causes current to be measured and plotted at power level 0 and 10 10 causes current to be measured and plotted at power level 10 only Example If you wish to plot the power output at power levels 0 and 10 selectO amp 10 271 O pe o o e 3 is D
114. al Power Supply Parameters 113 GEN Modify Analog Control Channel Parameters 115 GEN Modify Digital Control Channel Parameters 116 CP Registration on Analog Control Channel 118 CP Registration on Digital Control Channel 120 CP Page from Analog Control Channel to Analog Voice Channel 122 CP Page from Analog Control Channel to Narrow Analog Voice Channel 125 CP Page from Analog Control Channel to Digital Traffic Channel 128 CP Page from Digital Control Channel to Analog Voice Channel 131 CP Page from Digital Control Channel to Digital Traffic Channel 135 CP Origination from Analog Control Channel to Analog Voice Channel 138 CP Origination from Analog Control Channel to Narrow Analog Voice Channel 140 Contents CP Origination from Analog Control Channel to Digital Traffic Channel 142 CP Origination from Digital Control Channel to Analog Voice Channel 144 CP Origination from Digital Control Channel to Digital Traffic Channel 146 CP Handoff from Analog Voice Channel to Analog Voice Channel 148 CP Handoff from Analog Voice Channel to Narrow Analog Voice Channel 150 CP Handoff from Analog Voice Channel to Digital Traffic Channel 152 CP Handoff from Narrow Analog Voice Channel to Analog Voice Channel 154 CP Handoff from Narrow Analog Voice Channel to Narrow Analog Voice Channel 156 CP Handoff from Digital Traffic Channel to Digital Traffic Channel 158 CP Handoff from Digital Traffic Channel to Analog Vo
115. all analog voice channels A supervisory audio tone SAT is an out of voice band audio tone that is used for cell site identification Three selections are provided in a one of many format 5970 6000 and 6030 Hz One of the three tones is added to the voice transmission of all calls within an individual cell The cellular telephone then detects the tone and modulates the transmitted voice channel carrier with a constant relative phase tone that is filtered or regenerated from the received tone to establish a closed loop between the cellular telephone and the cell site Transmission of the SAT by a cellular telephone is suspended during transmission of wideband data on the reverse voice channel RVC but is not suspended when the signaling tone ST is sent Example If you wish to use 6000 Hz as the SAT select 6000 127 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 F me e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions CP Page from Analog Control Channel to Analog Voice Channel Analog Voice Channel Power Level 0 7 This parameter allows you to specify the power level at which the cellular telephone will transmit when it is paged to an analog voice channel The value is entered as an integer in the range 0 through 7 Example If you wish to use power level 7 enter 7 Pass Fail Limits Used No pass fail limits specifications are used in the CP Page from Analog Control Channel to Analog Voice Channel Operation
116. ameters Used 270 Ordinarily all power levels are tested However this Operation allows you to select only the levels that you wish to test Output power is expressed in watts dB relative to 1 watt or dB relative to 1 milliwatt according to the setting of the Units for Power Measurement parameter see GEN Modify Execution Parameters on page 114 The parameters used in the TXD RF Power Output vs Channel Plotted Operation are TXD Power Start Channel Number 1 799 991 1023 TXD Power Step Channel Number 1 1023 TXD Power Stop Channel Number 1 799 991 1023 TXD Output Power Levels Tested 0 0 10 2 10 0 amp 10 or 10 These parameters are described in the following paragraphs TXD Power Start Channel Number 1 799 991 1023 This parameter allows you to specify the start channel to be used in constructing a plot of the cellular telephone transmitter output power in relation to channel numbers in RF power output testing when the cellular telephone is operating on a digital channel The value is entered as an integer in the range 1 through 799 and 991 through 1023 Example If you wish to start the plot at channel 100 enter 100 TXD Power Step Channel Number 1 1023 This parameter allows you to specify the step size to be used in constructing a plot of the cellular telephone transmitter output power in relation to channel numbers in RF power output testing when the cellular telephone is operating on a digit
117. ample If you determine that the output voltage tolerance above the 0 dB reference level should be 1 dB enter 1 as the lower limit and 1 as the upper limit Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions RXA Expandor Expandor Zero Reference Level This specification sets the pass fail limits used when the expandor s output voltage is measured at the 0 dB reference level The values are entered as decimal numbers as upper and lower limits and in dBV rms Pass fail limits specifications are determined using any applicable standard such as e The applicable Cellular Telephone Specification The Expandor Zero Reference Level is not specified in the EIA TIA standard for NADC or NAMPS cellular telephones The test is performed and pass fail limits specifications are available so that you may measure the Expandor Zero Reference Level and compare the result to specifications that meet testing requirements If you do not wish to compare the measurement results to specifications set the Check setting in the pass fail limits specification for TXA Compressor Zero Reference Deviation to None see Verifying and Editing Pass Fail Limits Specifications on page 96 and see Specifying Pass Fail Limits in chapter 3 on page 103 Example If you wish the output voltage from the receiver to be 20 dBV rms 1 dB enter 21 as the lower limit and 19 as the upper limit 233 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 F me e Ss
118. an in channel power of the transmitter enter 45 251 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 F me e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXD Modulation Accuracy TXD Modulation Accuracy Background Parameters Used 252 This Operation measures the quality of the 7 4 DQPSK modulation of the cellular telephone transmitter across one transmitted burst Measurements that can be made with this Operation are error vector magnitude EVM phase error magnitude error burst amplitude droop I Q origin offset and carrier frequency error Each measurement is separate and may be selected and performed individually or included as part of a combination of measurements The Test System captures one transmitted burst of 162 symbols It then predicts an ideal I Q trajectory of the burst The phase and magnitude of the I Q vector and its error are calculated at each detection decision point and the rms error vector magnitude is calculated The parameters used in the TXD Modulation Accuracy Operation are Test Error Vector Magnitude Yes or No Test Phase Error Yes or No Test Magnitude Error Yes or No Test Burst Amplitude Droop Yes or No Test I Q Origin Offset Yes or No Test Carrier Frequency Error Yes or No These parameters are described in the following paragraphs Test Error Vector Magnitude Yes or No This parameter allows you to specify whether error vector magnitude will be measur
119. art of the Operation and the time at which the battery was determined to be depleted of charge One parameter is used in the MISC Battery Life on Analog Voice Channel Transmit Operation It is AVC Transmit Power Level 0 10 This parameter is described in the following paragraphs AVC Transmit Power Level 0 10 This parameter allows you to specify the cellular telephone transmitter output power during a battery life test The value is entered as an integer in the range 0 through 10 Pass Fail Limits Used One pass fail limits specification is used in the MISC Battery Life on Analog Voice Channel Transmit Operation It is Transmit Time This specification is described in the following paragraphs 281 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 F me e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions MISC Battery Life on Analog Voice Channel Transmit 282 Transmit Time This specification sets the pass fail limits for the time that the cellular telephone transmitter will transmit before the battery charge is depleted The value is entered as a decimal number and in minutes Example If you determine that the transmit time should be 80 minutes enter 80 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions MISC Battery Life on Digital Traffic Channel Transmit MISC Battery Life on Digital Traffic Channel Transmit Parameters Used This Operation measures the continuous time that the cellular telephone can be
120. at each time alignment TA if you determine that an acceptable transmit offset range for your cellular telephone is 45 5 TA 25 symbols enter 25 symbol for the lower limit and 25 symbol for the upper limit Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions RXD Receiver Sensitivity RXD Receiver Sensitivity Background Parameters Used This Operation measures the receiver s sensitivity by performing a channel quality measurement Ch Qual on the current forward traffic channel at an RF signal set by the RF Level for Sensitivity Test parameter The cellular telephone reports the bit error rate BER to the Test System The received signal strength indicator RSSI is also reported and checked for accuracy Digital RF sensitivity is a measure of the ability of a cellular telephone s receiver to receive and process digital data at a BER of 3 percent or less under static and faded conditions This Operation measures only the static condition One parameter is used in the RXD Receiver Sensitivity Operation It is RF Level for Sensitivity Test 30 to 120 dBm This parameter is described in the following paragraphs RF Level for Sensitivity Test 30 to 120 dBm This parameter sets the RF signal level that is used in the digital sensitivity tests The value is entered as a real number in dBm and in the range 30 through 120 Example If you wish to apply a 110 dBm signal enter 110 Pass Fail Limits Used Th
121. ation of the Test Set GEN General An abbreviation that appears in some titles in the Test Software and indicates that the item relates to the general system as opposed to a transmitter TX or receiver RX hand held cellular telephone A portable cellular phone that may be used anywhere cellular telephone service is available although it is somewhat limited in range because of its lower power output It is a self contained unit that includes a handset transceiver antenna power supply and battery See also mobile cellular telephone and transportable cellular telephone handoff A transfer from one channel to another A handoff may be explicit or implicit See also implicit handoff and explicit handoff Help A Test Software feature that provides specific information about using the current screen in the TESTS environment This feature is accessed by pressing k4 Help from any TEST screen See also HELP HELP A Test Software feature that provides additional Test Set information This feature is accessed by pressing SHIFT then TX HELP keys Help topics are listed in alphabetical order See also Help highlight A brightened region cursor of the Test Set screen that indicates the field or function currently being accessed high pass filter HPF A filter that increasingly rejects signal frequency components that decrease toward and then pass a certain cutoff frequency at which point lower frequencies are effect
122. background noise If your cellular telephone has an open microphone this Operation must be performed in a quiet environment The parameters used in the TXA Supervisory Audio Tone Frequency Error and Deviation Operation are Test SAT Tone 5970 Yes or No Test SAT Tone 6000 Yes or No Test SAT Tone 6030 Yes or No These parameters are described in the following paragraphs Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXA Supervisory Audio Tone Frequency Error and Deviation Test SAT Tone 5970 Yes or No This parameter allows you to specify whether the 5970 Hz tone will be tested during testing in the Supervisory Audio Tone Frequency Error and Deviation Operation Two selections are provided in a toggle format Yes and No Selecting Yes causes the Test System to perform the test Selecting No causes the Test System to ignore the test Test SAT Tone 6000 Yes or No This parameter allows you to specify whether the 6000 Hz tone will be tested during testing in the Supervisory Audio Tone Frequency Error and Deviation Operation Two selections are provided in a toggle format Yes and No Selecting Yes causes the Test System to perform the test Selecting No causes the Test System to ignore the test Test SAT Tone 6030 Yes or No This parameter allows you to specify whether the 6030 Hz tone will be tested during testing in the Supervisory Audio Tone Frequency Error and Deviation Operation Two selections are provided in a toggle
123. ber 1 1023 TXA Power Stop Channel Number 1 799 991 1023 TXA Output Power Levels Tested 0 0 7 2 7 0 amp 7 or 7 These parameters are described in the following paragraphs 209 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 2 z pei e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXA RF Power Output vs Channel Plotted 210 TXA Power Start Channel Number 1 799 991 1023 This parameter allows you to specify the start channel to be used in constructing a plot of the cellular telephone transmitter s output power in relation to channel numbers in RF power output testing when the cellular telephone is operating on an analog channel The value is entered as an integer in the ranges 1 through 799 and 991 through 1023 Example If you wish to start the plot at channel 55 enter 55 TXA Power Step Channel Number 1 1023 This parameter allows you to specify the step size to be used in constructing a plot of the cellular telephone transmitter s output power in relation to channel numbers in RF power output testing when the cellular telephone is operating on an analog channel The value is entered as an integer in the range 0 through 1023 Example If you wish to step the plot in 20 channel increments enter 20 TXA Power Stop Channel Number 1 799 991 1023 This parameter allows you to specify the stop channel to be used in constructing a plot of the cellular telephone transmitter s output power in r
124. between positive and negative swings of the carrier at any level of modulation Modulation limiting is expressed in kHz modulation symmetry is expressed in a percent difference between positive and negative swings of the carrier Specifically in this Operation the Test System does the following 1 Sets the audio generator s frequency to 1 kHz 2 Sets the audio generator s level to produce an 8 kHz deviation by the cellular telephone 3 Increases the audio generator s level by 20 dB 4 Repeats Steps 2 and 3 three times and holds and reports the maximum peak frequency deviation 5 Steps the audio generator frequency from a start frequency to a stop frequency as specified in the Audio Start Frequency and Audio Stop Frequency parameters in increments specified in the Audio Step Frequency parameter while the audio generator level is maintained at the 20 dB overdrive Peak frequency deviation is measured at each step The parameters used in the TXA Modulation Limiting on Analog Voice Channel Operation are Audio Start Frequency 300 3000 Hz Audio Step Frequency 0 2700 Hz Audio Stop Frequency 300 3000 Hz These parameters are described in the following paragraphs 199 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 F me e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXA Modulation Deviation Limiting on Analog Voice Channel NOTE 200 Audio Start Frequency 300 3000 Hz This parameter a
125. ce Chan nel to Narrow Analog Voice Chan nel 150 CP Handoff from Digital Traffic Chan nel to Analog Voice Channel 160 CP Handoff from Digital Traffic Chan nel to Digital Traffic Channel 158 CP Handoff from Narrow Analog Voice Channel to Analog Voice Channel 154 156 CP Hook Flash 167 CP Origination from Analog Control Channel to Analog Voice Channel 138 CP Origination from Analog Control Channel to Digital Traffic Channel 142 CP Origination from Analog Control Channel to Narrow Analog Voice 364 Channel 140 CP Origination from Digital Control Channel to Analog Voice Channel 144 CP Origination from Digital Control Channel to Digital Traffic Channel 146 CP Page Analog Control Channel to Narrow Analog Voice Channel 125 CP Page from Analog Control Channel to Analog Voice Channel 122 CP Page from Analog Control Channel to Digital Traffic Channel 128 CP Page from Digital Control Channel to Analog Voice Channel 132 CP Page from Digital Control Channel to Digital Traffic Channel 135 CP Release to Analog Control Channel 162 CP Release to Digital Control Channel 164 GEN Modify Analog Control Channel Parameters 115 GEN Modify Digital Control Channel Parameters 116 GEN Modify External Power Supply Parameters 113 GN Modify Execution Parameters 110 MISC Battery Life on Analog Control Channel Standby 280 MISC Battery Life on Analog Voice Channel Transmit 276 MISC Battery Life on Digital Con
126. cit handoff from one digital traffic channel Operation on a telephone channel to another digital traffic channel Operation on the same or another telephone channel For information on explicit and implicit call processing see Testing Strategy on page 108 The parameters used in the CP Handoff from Digital Traffic Channel to Digital Traffic Channel Operation are Digital Traffic Channel DVCC 1 255 Digital Traffic Channel Slot 1 3 Digital Traffic Channel Power Level 0 10 Cellular Digital Traffic Channel Vocoder VSELP ACELP These parameters are described in the following paragraphs Digital Traffic Channel DVCC 1 255 This parameter allows you to specify the Digital Verification Color Code DVCC number to be transmitted to the cellular telephone on the digital traffic channel The value is entered as an integer in the range 1 through 255 Example If you wish to use a DVCC of 101 during testing enter 101 Digital Traffic Channel Slot 1 3 This parameter allows you to specify the timeslot assignment number to be transmitted to the cellular telephone The value is entered as an integer in the range 1 through 3 Example If you wish the cellular telephone to be active on timeslots 2 and 4 enter 2 163 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 2 z pei e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions CP Handoff from Digital Traffic Channel to Digital Traffic Channel Digital Traffic Channel Po
127. collection of Operations and an order of Operations all contained in a file that customizes the Test Software to a specific application You may save the file on an SRAM card or an external disk drive When you save a procedure it includes a list of Operations each of which includes channel and other communications information parameters and pass fail limits specifications an order of Operations plus a library that contains the names of all Operations parameters and pass fail limits specifications that are resident in the Test Software The library file is part of the Test Software and cannot be modified The library file is saved automatically on the card or disk that is being used to store the new procedure The procedures supplied with the Test Software are listed in the Choices field when you select the Select Procedure Filename field Procedures are displayed only if the Test Software OTP card is inserted Saving a Procedure After you have set up the Test Software you may save the procedure to an SRAM card external disk drive or internal RAM The SRAM card external disk drive or RAM disk that you use must be initialized before its first use See Initializing an SRAM Card in chapter 6 on page 330 or see Initializing a Disk in chapter 6 on page 324 or see Initialize RAM disk Volume 0 as follows in chapter 6 on page 342 89 Cc n Ke gt D wn fo o oO Chapter 3 Using the Softwa
128. d Dual Tone Multiple Frequency DTMF Signaling Transmitted Pulse Characteristics Example If you determine that the seven tone frequencies in the high and low group DTMF signals should be within 1 5 percent of the nominal values enter 1 5 as the lower limit and 1 5 as the upper limit Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXA Digital Supervisory Audio Tone Deviation Closure and Phase Jitter TXA Digital Supervisory Audio Tone Deviation Closure and Phase Jitter NOTE This is a NAMPS only operation The channels must indicate the offset desired U Upper M Middle or L Lower This Operation measures the deviation closure and phase jitter of the cellular telephone s digital supervisory audio tone DSAT response to the system prompt The Test System transmits DSAT sequence 3 25AD4D which is a 24 bit digital sequence continuously at 200 NRZ bits second in hexadecimal to the cellular telephone It produces an average peak deviation of 700 Hz Seven different sequences are defined In this Operation the cellular telephone detects the transmitted DSAT and responds The Test System measures and reports the peak deviation of the DSAT returned by the telephone The Test System then performs an eye pattern test on the DSAT and measures and reports the closure and phase jitter 191 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 2 z pei e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXA Digital Supervisory
129. d of the reverse channel slot to the beginning of the corresponding forward channel slot is calculated and the absolute time offset is displayed as the result The cellular telephone is commanded to change to time alignments of 5 9 16 19 24 30 25 18 11 4 and 0 The measured time offset for each of these is displayed The measurement is made at power level 0 only No parameters are used in the TXD Time Alignment Operation Pass Fail Limits Used One pass fail limits specification is used in the TXD Time Alignment Operation It is Time Alignment Error This specification is described in the following paragraphs 275 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 2 z pei e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXD Time Alignment 276 Time Alignment Error This specification sets the pass fail limits for the cellular telephone transmitter s digital time alignment error The software measures the actual transmit offset at time alignments of 5 9 16 19 24 30 25 18 11 4 and 0 and uses these pass fail limits specifications to set the upper and lower error tolerance The values are entered as decimal numbers as a positive value for the upper limit and a negative value for the lower limit and in bits or half symbols Pass fail limits specifications are determined using any applicable standard such as e EIA TIA Standard IS 137 Example While measuring the cellular telephone
130. d to the cellular telephone must not mute the microphone or disconnect the received audio from the ear piece As you listen to the looped back message you will be prompted to press the k1 key for pass and the k2 key for fail No parameters are used in the MISC Digital Talk Back Operation Pass Fail Limits Used No pass fail limits specifications are used in the MISC Digital Talk Back Operation 289 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 2 z pei e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions MISC TX Qualitative Audio MISC TX Qualitative Audio Parameters This Operation provides a quick qualitative evaluation of the cellular telephone s transmitter audio function In this Operation you will be prompted to whistle into the transmitter to observe the deviation on the Test System and then decide whether the test passed or failed The pass fail decision is qualitative and is usually based on whether the change in deviation corresponds with the amplitude of the whistle into the transmitter No parameters are used in the MISC TX Qualitative Audio Operation Pass Fail Limits Used 290 No pass fail limits specifications are used in the MISC TX Qualitative Audio Operation Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions MISC RX Qualitative Audio MISC RX Qualitative Audio Parameters Used This Operation provides a quick qualitative evaluation of the cellular telephone s receiver audio function In this t
131. described in the following paragraphs SINAD for N AVC This specification sets the pass fail limits to be used when SINAD is measured at the audio output of the cellular telephone s receiver when the telephone is operating on a narrow analog voice channel The value is entered as a decimal number as the lower limit only and in dB Pass fail limits specifications are determined using any applicable standard such as e EIA Standard RF Sensitivity Example If you determine that the usable sensitivity measurement results in 12 dB SINAD at the audio output of the receiver enter 12 as the lower limit 245 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 2 z pei e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions RXA RF Sensitivity vs Channel Plotted RXA RF Sensitivity vs Channel Plotted NOTE NOTE NOTE 246 Audio connections from the cellular telephone to the Test System are required for this Operation This Operation sets and measures the cellular telephone receiver s RF sensitivity or SINAD then plots the sensitivity in relation to channel number in the range of channels specified by the Operation s parameters At each channel measurement a point is located in an X Y plot where the X axis represents increasing channel numbers and the Y axis represents sensitivity in dB The data points are then connected to create a plot The number of the channel at which the Test System was working at the
132. dure U fe Qa c O o o o me e 3 Figure 9 Default TESTS Main Menu Screen Most of the fields in the HP 11807E Test Software TESTS Main Menu screen described in the following sections are the same as those found in the Default TESTS Main Menu screen shown above and used with other software The differences occur in the lower left hand section of the screen Four fields that access other screens Freq Channel Information Parm Test Parameters Seqn Order of Tests and Spec Pass Fail Limits are replaced by three different fields Setup Chan Seq Parm Spec Parms Default Parameters and Specs Pass Fail Limits In addition the screen accessed by the Setup Chan Seq Parm Spec in turn accesses another screen Thus the four screens accessed from the default TESTS Main Menu screen are replaced by four other screens that are accessed essentially from the HP 11807E Test Software TESTS Main Menu screen and perform somewhat similar functions The screens that are used with software other than the HP 11807E Option 014 Test Software are described in the HP 8920B RF Communications Test Set User s Guide 43 Chapter 2 Product Description Tests Subsystem HP 11807E TESTS Main Menu Screen 44 When you access the Tests Subsystem by pressing the TESTS key inserting the HP 11807E Test Software OTP card and selecting a procedure from the Choices field the Tests Subsystem displays
133. e S indicates that a service request has been generated C indicates that the Test Set is currently an active controller Control mode is set in the TESTS External Devices screen The Test Set must be a controller if HP IB peripherals are to be controlled indicates that an IBASIC program is running or that the IBASIC controller is executing a command indicates that an IBASIC program is waiting for a user response indicates that the IBASIC program is paused SHIFT indicates that the SHIFT key was pressed and that the next key entry will be shifted Press the SHIFT key again to clear 347 Chapter 6 Reference USER Keys USER Keys 348 When you are using the Test Set you will see the following USER assigned keys appear at times in the top right hand corner of the display These keys are assigned to the hard keys k1 through k5 In many cases you may use these keys as shortcuts instead of positioning the cursor and selecting USER keys are sometimes referred to as softkeys Clr Scr allows you to clear the Test Set s display Continue allows you to continue the program after it has been paused Delet Stp allows you to edit items in a test sequence When you press this key the test in the displayed sequence with the Step highlighted inverse video will be deleted The tests that follow in the sequence will be scrolled up by one step Del Proc allows you to delete the selected procedure When y
134. e RF Start Level 30 to 120 dBm This parameter allows you to specify the level of the RF carrier that is output by the Test System at the beginning of the Operation The level will be decremented during the test so the start level is the highest one used The value is entered as a real number in dBm and in the range 30 through 120 Example If you wish to start varying the output RF level at 75 dBm enter 75 RF Step Level 0 to 90 dBm This parameter allows you to specify the step size used in varying the RF carrier that is output by the Test System during the Operation The level is decremented by the specified amount at each step during the test The value is entered as a real number in dBm and in the range 0 through 90 Example If you wish to decrement the output RF level in 5 dB steps enter 5 RF Stop Level 30 to 120 dBm This parameter allows you to specify the level of the RF carrier that is output by the Test System at the end of the Operation The level is decremented during the test so the stop level is the lowest one used The value is entered as a real number in dBm and in the range 30 through 120 Example If you wish to stop varying the output RF level at 25 dBm enter 25 Pass Fail Limits Used No pass fail limits specifications are used in the RXA Mobile Reported Interference Operation 239 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 F me e Ss
135. e the file name may be CELL1 EXT 4 DOS is used if the disk format is DOS HP UX is used if the disk format is LIF 315 Chapter 6 Reference Data Collection and Retrieval Retrieval from a PC Card To retrieve the test results after those results have been saved on a PC card you must run an IBASIC program The following is a program to transfer data from a PC card to a terminal emulator You may type the program lines into the IBASIC command line from a terminal emulator see Configuration for Terminal or PC Operation on page 321 316 NOTE Chapter 6 Reference Data Collection and Retrieval Enter the data retrieval program as follows 1 Press the TESTS key The TESTS Main Menu screen will appear 2 From the SET UP TEST SET list select IBASIC IBASIC Cntrl1 from the field to switch to the TESTS IBASIC Controller screen 3 Move the cursor to the IBASIC command field the large field in the upper part of the screen and select it po p h O O Ss 7 D In the following step make certain that the any IBASIC program that you had been running is saved on disk or a PC card before deleting it from the Test Set s memory 4 From the list of characters in the Choices field select and enter the following to delete the previous IBASIC program SCRATCH 5 From the list of characters in the Choices field select and enter the following program 10 DIM A 120 Sets the string length to 120
136. e A cellular telephone e Various adapters cables and other connection items see Equipment Required to Get Started in chapter 1 on page 22 e A power supply if appropriate 32 Chapter 2 Product Description Hardware Considerations Connectors Keys and Knobs The following paragraphs are included here for your convenience and briefly describe the connectors keys and knobs on the Test Set front and rear panels see figure 8 Information on these items in much greater detail is included in the HP 8920B RF Communications Test Set User s Guide For more detailed information on any of the items refer to that manual NOTE Unless stated otherwise all items are located on the Test Set s front panel U fe Qa c O o o o me e 3 33 Chapter 2 Product Description Hardware Considerations Figure 8 Test Set Connector Keys and Knobs 34 NOTE Chapter 2 Product Description Hardware Considerations The number shown in parentheses after each item in the following paragraphs is associated with the like numbered pointer in figure 8 ANT IN Connector 1 The antenna input connector is used for analyzing low power RF signals 200 mW or less typically in off the air measurement
137. e Channel Operation 148 parameters used 148 pass fail limits used 149 CP Handoff from Analog Voice Channel to Digital Traffic Channel Opera tion 152 parameters used 152 CP Handoff from Analog Voice Channel to Narrow Analog Voice Channel Operation 150 parameters used 150 pass fail limits used 151 CP Handoff from Digital Traffic Channel to Analog Voice Channel Operation 160 parameters used 160 pass fail limits used 161 CP Handoff from Digital Traffic Channel to Digital Traffic Channel Opera tion 158 parameters used 158 pass fail limits used 159 CP Handoff from Narrow Analog Voice Channel to Analog Voice Channel Operation 154 156 parameters used 154 156 pass fail limits used 155 157 CP Hook Flash Operation 167 parameters used 167 pass fail limits used 167 CP Origination from Analog Control Channel to Analog Voice Channel Operation 138 parameters used 138 pass fail limits used 139 CP Origination from Analog Control Channel to Digital Traffic Channel Operation 142 parameters used 142 pass fail limits used 143 CP Origination from Analog Control Channel to Narrow Analog Voice Channel Operation 140 parameters used 140 pass fail limits used 141 CP Origination from Digital Control Channel to Analog Voice Channel Operation 144 parameters used 144 pass fail limits used 145 CP Origination from Digital Control Channel to Digital Traffic Channel Operation 146 parameters used 146 pass fail limits
138. e Channel Power These specifications are described in the following paragraphs Relative Adjacent Channel Power This specification sets the pass fail limits for the upper and lower adjacent channel power as measured at frequency offsets of 30 kHz relative to the mean in channel output power of the transmitter The value is entered as a decimal number as the upper limit only and in dB Pass fail limits specifications are determined using any applicable standard such as e EIA TIA Standard Adjacent and Alternate Channel Power due to Modulation Example If you determine that the average power in either the upper or lower adjacent channel should be 26 dB below the mean in channel power of the transmitter enter 26 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXD Adjacent Channel Power Relative Alternate Channel Power This specification sets the pass fail limits for the first and second alternate channel power as measured at frequency offsets of 60 kHz first alternate and 90 kHz second alternate relative to the mean in channel output power of the transmitter The value is entered as a decimal number as an upper limit only and in dB Pass fail limits specifications are determined using any applicable standard such as e EIA TIA Standard Adjacent and Alternate Channel Power due to Modulation Example If you determine that the average power in either the first or second alternate channel should be 45 dB below the me
139. e and disable measurements and to turn numeric fields on and off e The YES and NO keys are used to approve or disapprove selected functions or Operations before execution e EEX SHIFT is used for entering numbers using scientific notation e The other DATA keys are used for entering and changing the unit of measure for measurements of field entries 37 Chapter 2 Product Description Hardware Considerations 38 DATA FUNCTIONS Keys 21 The data functions keys are used for the following functions The INCR 10 INCR SET and INCR x 10 keys are used to increment or decrement a number when changing field values The up arrow and down arrow keys are used to increment or decrement field values to select alternate field entries and to move the cursor in string entry fields The LO LIMIT SHIFT down arrow and the HI LIMIT SHIFT up arrow keys are used to set measurement end points The REF SET SHIFT INCR 10 key is used to enter or remove a measurement reference for relative audio frequency and radio frequency measurements The METER SHIFT INCR SET key is used to enable or disable the analog bar graph meter function If the bar graph is enabled the display consists of a bar graph section and a numeric section that uses small digits If the bar graph is disabled the display consists of only a numeric section that uses large digits The AVG SHIFT INCR x 10 key is used to enable or disable measuremen
140. e cellular telephone has not been previously obtained by the Test System the Test System will prompt you for the cellular telephone number The Test System will then create the MIN from the telephone number see also the description for the Phone Number 0 Use from Reg Orig parameter in the description of any of the Page Operations It is often advisable to run analog Call Processing Operations to verify that the cellular telephone is functional Dependent upon the testing strategy it might also be advisable to run digital Call Processing Operations Do this as follows a From the TESTS Main Menu screen switch to the TESTS Set Up screen b Edit the test sequence so as to include the Operations listed in table 4 on page 112 in the order presented 111 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 F me e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions Testing Strategy Table 4 112 Operations in Sequence Operation Name Purpose CP Registration To verify that the cellular telephone is functioning only RF and dc power connections are required and return the telephone number serial number and power class CP Page To simulate an analog call to the cellular telephone CP Release To release the cellular telephone CP Origination To simulate an analog call from the cellular telephone Establish whether the cellular telephone uses A control channels channels 313 to 333 B
141. e desirable to change one or more to reflect the desired testing regimen A list of the pass fail limits specifications used is included in each of the Operation descriptions in chapter 4 Operation Descriptions on page 105 You must first select and load a Procedure to access the TESTS Subsystem You may then select the TESTS Pass Fail Limits screen from the CUSTOMIZE TEST PROCEDURE list to see and edit the default values You should verify that pass fail limits specifications are set properly after you select the Operations to be placed in your procedure A lock is provided to prevent uncontrolled access to the pass fail limits specifications See Securing and Un Securing a Procedure on page 91 Each set of pass fail limits specifications remains in battery backed up memory until you select a new procedure to run If you wish to prevent its loss when you select a another procedure you must save it in a procedure see Saving a Procedure on page 89 If you wish to print the pass fail limits specifications list see Printing in chapter 6 on page 333 Chapter 3 Using the Software Using Common Processes To edit a pass fail limits specifications value 1 Press the TESTS key The TESTS Main Menu screen will appear 2 Move the cursor to the Select Procedure Location field and select it 3 From the Choices field select among Card ROM RAM or Disk for the location at which the procedure is stored 4 Move the cursor to
142. e is paused and the period during which it is waiting for connection and inputs to be completed If a procedure is run through midnight the test time will not display properly Cc n Ke gt D wn fo o o 85 Chapter 3 Using the Software Using Common Processes Printing 86 You may print any of the following e Test results e TESTS screens e TESTS Set Up e TESTS Specific Parameters e TESTS Default Parameters e TESTS Pass Fail Limits There are six basic steps to the printing process For more detailed information on each of these steps see Printing in chapter 6 on page 333 To print test results or screens 1 Verify that your printer is supported by the Test Set see Supported Printers in chapter 6 on page 333 2 Determine if your printer requires serial parallel or HP IB connection see the printer documentation 3 Connect the printer to the appropriate port on the Test Set see Printing in chapter 6 on page 333 4 Configure the Test Set for your printer and its interface see Configuring the Test Set for Printing in chapter 6 on page 336 5 Direct the Test Set as to what to print see Printing in chapter 6 on page 333 6 Select the desired value in the Print Opt s parameter for controlling printing see GEN Modify Execution Parameters in chapter 4 on page 114 Chapter 3 Using the Software Using Common Processes Setting Test Executio
143. e pass fail limits specifications used in the RXD Receiver Sensitivity Operation are BER RSSI Error These specifications are described in the following paragraphs 277 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 F me e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions RXD Receiver Sensitivity 278 BER This specification sets the pass fail limits for the bit error rate BER for a cellular telephone operating on a digital channel and being tested for receiver sensitivity in a mobile assisted hand off mode The value is entered as a decimal number and as a percentage Pass fail limits specifications are determined using any applicable standard such as e EIA TIA Standard IS 137 Example If you determine that the BER Pass Fail Limit should be lt 3 percent enter 3 RSSI Error This specification sets the pass fail limits for the error in the received signal strength indication RSSI reported by a cellular telephone operating on a digital channel and being tested for receiver sensitivity The value is entered as a decimal number and in dB Pass fail limits specifications are determined using any applicable standard such as e EIA TIA Standard IS 137 Example If you determine that the error in the RSSI should be lt 5 dB enter 5 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions RXD Receiver Sensitivity Loopback RXD Receiver Sensitivity Loopback NOTE Background Parameters Used This Opera
144. e testing The value is entered as a real number in dB in the range 30 to 25 Example If you wish to stop varying the relative input level at 20 dB enter 20 Pass Fail Limits Used The pass fail limits specifications used in the TXA Compressor Response Operation are Compressor Tracking Error lt 0 dB Compressor Tracking Error gt 0 dB Compressor Minimum Output gt 17 6 dB These specifications are described in the following paragraphs Compressor Tracking Error lt 0 dB This specification sets the pass fail limits that are used when the compressor circuits are measured with the relative input levels below 0 dB In this condition the compressor relative output deviation tolerance should be within the limits that you set in this specification for the compressor track error The value is entered as a decimal number as lower and upper limits in dB Pass fail limits specifications are determined using any applicable standard such as e EIA TIA Standard Compressor Example If your standard sets the output voltage tolerance to 1 0 dB from the compressor curve in figure 29 on page 180 enter 1 0 as the lower limit and 1 0 as the upper limit 179 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 F me e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXA Compressor Response kHz PEAK FREQUENCY DEVIATION 15 10 COMPANDOR ZERO CROSSING DEVIATION gt 10 COMPRESSOR TRACK ERROR gt 0 S
145. e used anywhere cellular telephone service is available It consists of a handset transceiver antenna power supply and battery all of which is installed in a carrying case See also hand held cellular telephone and mobile cellular telephone unit under test UUT The device that is being tested usually a mobile or base station Sometimes referred to as the DUT device under test or MSUT mobile station under test UUT See unit under test USER keys A group of user programmable keys located immediately to the right of the Test Set screen that allow more rapid selection of certain functions without rotating and pressing the CURSOR CONTROL knob These key assignments are displayed in the upper right portion of the Test Set screen The number to the left of each displayed function name corresponds to the number on one of the keys k1 through kS values The scalar quantities or numbers inserted in the inverse video fields of the parameters and pass fail limits specifications The units of measure contained in the values for parameters and pass fail limits specifications are dB inches volts watts and so forth 361 Aiesso 5 362 Glossary Numerics 10 MHz REF INPUT connector 37 10 MHz REF OUTPUT connector 37 1 800 help line 5 A AC DC switch 40 ACC defined 345 Access defined 345 ACCH defined 345 Active defined 345 additional services available 5 advanced mobile phone system defin
146. e used in the CP Registration on Analog Control Channel Operation Pass Fail Limits Used No pass fail limits specifications are used in the CP Registration on Analog Control Channel Operation 123 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 2 z pei e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions CP Registration on Digital Control Channel CP Registration on Digital Control Channel 124 This Operation causes a cellular telephone to transmit registration data to the Test System The Test System reads and decodes the cellular telephone s Reverse Digital Control Channel RDCCH data while the telephone is camped on a digital control channel and outputs the following registration information Cellular telephone number Serial number in both decimal and hexadecimal format Power class Transmission continuous or discontinuous Bandwidth 20 MHz or 25 MHz The test works as follows e The Test System transmits the Registration ID message repeatedly with the value of the REGID field set alternately to 0 and 500 This induces the cellular telephone to register with the Test System e Ifan error occurs in this Operation all testing is stopped A Registration or Origination Operation must be run at least once before any Call Processing tests may be run If not you will be prompted to enter the cellular telephone number during testing Alternatively you may enter the cellular telephone number in a parameter A
147. ecks the digital supervisory audio tone DSAT on the initial voice channel to verify that the voice channel was obtained It is not necessary to register the cellular telephone with the Test System by running a Registration Operation before running this Operation This Operation will read the cellular telephone s Mobile Identification Number MIN and the Test System will retain it for use in performing other tests Parameters Used The parameters used in the CP Origination from Analog Control Channel to Narrow Analog Voice Channel Operation are DSAT Vector 0 6 Narrow Analog Voice Channel Power Level 0 7 These parameters are described in the following paragraphs 145 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 F me e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions CP Origination from Analog Control Channel to Narrow Analog Voice Channel DSAT Vector 0 6 This parameter allows you to specify the Digital Supervisory Audio Tone DSAT sequence to be used whenever the cellular telephone is operating on a narrow voice channel The value is entered as an integer in the range 0 through 6 The seven valid sequences are 0 2556CB 1 255B2B 2 256A9B 3 25AD4D 4 26AB2B 5 26B2AD 6 2969AB Example If you wish to use the first sequence shown above enter 0 Narrow Analog Voice Channel Power Level 0 7 This parameter allows you to specify the power level at which the cellular telephone will trans
148. ed ER LIESET ESS Reference This chapter provides detailed descriptions of the more sophisticated features and functions of the HP 11807E Option 014 AMPS NAMPS DCCH Mobile Test Software Topics are arranged alphabetically for quick easy reference 309 Chapter 6 Reference Introduction Introduction This chapter includes the following sections Copying Files on page 311 Data Collection and Retrieval on page 313 Memory Cards on page 327 Printing on page 333 RAM Disk on page 341 Saving Tests Results on page 344 Serial Port on page 345 Understanding HP IB Control Annunciators on page 347 USER Keys on page 348 310 Copying Files Chapter 6 Reference Copying Files You may copy files from one mass storage device to another using IBASIC COPY commands For example to copy a file from an inserted PC card to the left drive of an external dual disk drive with HP IB address 700 proceed as follows 1 Press the TESTS key The TESTS Main Menu screen will appear 2 From the SET UP TEST SET list select IBASIC IBASIC Cntrl1 to switch to the TESTS BASIC Controller screen 3 Move the cursor to the IBASIC command line the large field in the upper part of the screen and select it 4 From the list of characters in the Choices menu select and enter the following command COPY MY_TEST INTERNAL TO MYFILE 700 0 You may copy a file from one type of PC card to another by load
149. ed 345 AdvanceLink 312 AMPS defined 345 analof to digital converter underdriven 296 analog control channel defined 345 ANALOG procedure content 76 analog to digital converter 296 overdriven 296 analog to digital converter error 296 annunciator defined 345 ANT IN connector 35 Applicable Hardware 32 ASCII file type 307 Audio Connections 71 requirements for 71 AUDIO IN HI connector 35 AUDIO IN LO connector 35 AUDIO MONITOR OUTPUT connec tor 35 AUDIO OUT connector 35 autostart test procedure on power up 84 Index B backspace key 39 band pass filter defined 345 bandwidth 120 base station defined 345 BCH code defined 345 BDAT file type 307 Before Running Tests required actions 76 begin testing 73 bit error rate defined 345 Bose Chaudhuri Hocgenghem code defined 346 BPF defined 346 button POWER 39 357 C cable losses calibrating 72 impedance mismatches 72 Calibrating Cable Loss 72 call processing defined 346 explicit 104 functions 31 implicit 104 CANCEL key 39 defined 346 card defined 346 card slot 36 CAT IBASIC command 305 Cellular Adapter defined 346 cellular phone number 118 Cellular Telephone Number or Mobile Identification Number 107 Cellular Telephone to Test System Con nections 69 changing the order of tests 97 channel defined 346 channel information securing 87 channel number error 297 298 channel numbers specif
150. ed verify that the correct printer address was entered in the Printer Adrs field d Ifthe Serial port was selected verify that the I O CONFIGURE screen has been set up correctly for the printer baud rate parity and so forth ad Refer to the Test Set User s Guide for details about configuring the printer 298 Chapter 5 Problem Solving Test Results Are Unexpected Test Results Are Unexpected If one or more tests fail unexpectedly or you believe that there is a problem with the way tests are running check the settings that are used for the tests 1 Press the TESTS key The TESTS Main Menu screen will appear 2 From the SET UP TEST SET list select Exec Execution Cond to switch to the TESTS Execution Conditions screen 3 Move the cursor to the Test Procedure Run Mode field and select Single Step a Press the k1 Run Test key b When the message Press continue when ready is displayed in the top line of the TESTS IBASIC Controller screen press the CANCEL key to pause the IBASIC program 4 From the To Screen menu move the cursor to the desired instrument screen and select it 5 After viewing the instrument settings press the PREV key to return to the TESTS Main Menu screen NOTE Do not alter the instrument settings The IBASIC program will not re configure the settings when continue is executed You may alter settings to experiment with the measurement but all must be returned to the initial settin
151. ed during transmitter testing when the cellular telephone is on a digital traffic channel Two selections are provided in a toggle format Yes and No Selecting Yes causes the Test Software to measure the error vector magnitude Selecting No causes the Test Software to ignore the measurement Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXD Modulation Accuracy Test Phase Error Yes or No This parameter allows you to specify whether phase error will be measured during transmitter testing when the cellular telephone is on a digital traffic channel Two selections are provided in a toggle format Yes and No Selecting Yes causes the Test Software to measure the phase error Selecting No causes the Test Software to ignore the measurement Test Magnitude Error Yes or No This parameter allows you to specify whether magnitude error will be measured during transmitter testing when the cellular telephone is on a digital traffic channel Two selections are provided in a toggle format Yes and No Selecting Yes causes the Test Software to measure the magnitude error Selecting No causes the Test Software to ignore the measurement Test Burst Amplitude Droop Yes or No This parameter allows you to specify whether burst amplitude droop will be measured during transmitter testing when the cellular telephone is on a digital traffic channel Two selections are provided in a toggle format Yes and No Selecting Yes causes the Test Software to mea
152. efault parameters grouped by Operation You may then select the Parms Default Parameters field in the CUSTOMIZE TEST PROCEDURE list to switch to the TESTS Default Parameters screen and edit the default values You should verify that parameters are set properly after you select the Operations to be placed in your procedure A lock is provided in the Test Software to prevent uncontrolled access to the parameters See Securing and Un Securing a Procedure on page 91 Each parameter remains in battery backed up memory until you select a another procedure to run If you wish to prevent its loss when you select a new procedure you must save it in a procedure See Saving a Procedure on page 89 If you wish to print the parameters list see Printing on page 86 To edit a parameter value The appropriate procedure filename must be selected before editing a parameter value If this has not been done already perform the following steps 1 Press the TESTS key The TESTS Main Menu screen will appear 2 Move the cursor to the Select Procedure Location field and select it 3 From the Choices field select Card for the location at which the procedure is stored 4 Move the cursor to the Select Procedure Filename field and select it Chapter 3 Using the Software Using Common Processes If the appropriate procedure filename is already selected edit the value as follows 1 Move the cursor to the Parms Default Parameters field
153. elation to channel numbers in RF power output testing when the cellular telephone is operating on an analog channel The value is entered as an integer in the ranges through 799 and 991 through 1023 Example If you wish to stop the plot at channel 799 enter 799 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXA RF Power Output vs Channel Plotted TXA Output Power Levels Tested 0 0 7 2 7 0 amp 7 or 7 This parameter allows you to specify the output power levels to be tested and plotted in relation to channel numbers Five selections are provided in a one of many format These are O causes current to be measured and plotted at power level 0 only 0 7 causes current to be measured and plotted at power levels 0 through 7 2 7 causes current to be measured and plotted at power levels 2 through 7 O amp 7 causes current to be measured and plotted at power level 0 and 7 7 causes current to be measured and plotted at power level 7 only Example If you wish to plot the power output at power levels 2 3 4 5 6 and 7 select 2 7 Pass Fail Limits Used The pass fail limits specifications used in the TXA RF Power Output vs Channel Plotted Operation are Output Power at Level 0 Output Power at Level 1 Output Power at Level 2 Output Power at Level 3 Output Power at Level 4 Output Power at Level 5 Output Power at Level 6 Output Power at Level 7 These specifications are described in the following paragraphs 211 O pe
154. electin Data 4 2 O Data 5 D f Data 6 A ay O Data 7 95 o Data 8 5 Signal Ground nAck D O Busy I DO PError 2 Q Select y PIN 13 PIN 25 Figure 34 Parallel Printer Connections 335 Chapter 6 Reference Printing Configuring the Test Set for Printing NOTE 336 If you use a serial printer you may not use the serial port for other connections such as data collection for saving test results at the same time see Serial Port on page 345 Set up the printer as follows 1 Press the TESTS key The TESTS Main Menu screen will appear 2 From the SET UP TEST SET list select Print Printer Setup to switch to the TESTS Printer Setup screen 3 Move the cursor to Model and select the desired printer 4 Move the cursor to Printer Port and select the desired port 5 If you are using the HP IB move the cursor to Printer Adrs and enter the HP IB address for your printer 0 30 6 Set the following options as appropriate e Lines Page controls the number of lines from 20 to 120 printed on a page before a form feed is sent to the printer e FF at Start to cause a form feed at the start of a test sequence e FF at End to cause a form feed at the end of a test sequence 7 From the To Screen menu select More 8 From the Choices menu select IO CONFIG to switch to the I O CONFIGURE screen e For Serial Printing set the Serial Baud field and other serial communications fields listed under it
155. elephone with the Test System by running a Registration Operation before running this Operation This Operation will read the cellular telephone s Mobile Identification Number MIN and the Test System will retain it for use in performing other tests Parameters Used The parameters used in the CP Origination from Digital Control Channel to Digital Traffic Channel Operation are Digital Traffic Channel DVCC 1 255 Digital Traffic Channel Slot 1 3 Digital Traffic Channel Power Level 0 10 Cellular Digital Traffic Channel Vocoder VSELP ACELP These parameters are described in the following paragraphs 151 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 2 z pei e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions CP Origination from Digital Control Channel to Digital Traffic Channel Digital Traffic Channel DVCC 1 255 This parameter allows you to specify the Digital Verification Color Code DVCC number to be transmitted to the cellular telephone on the digital traffic channel The value is entered as an integer in the range 1 through 255 Example If you wish to use a traffic channel of 101 during testing enter 101 Digital Traffic Channel Slot 1 3 This parameter allows you to specify the timeslot assignment number to be transmitted to the cellular telephone The value is entered as an integer in the range 1 through 3 Example If you wish the cellular telephone to be active on timeslots 2 and 4 enter 2
156. enter 10 Cellular Digital Traffic Channel Vocoder VSELP A CELP This parameter allows you to specify the type of speech decoding used during cellular digital traffic channel transmission If the firmware revision in the HP 8920B is B 05 00 or later this parameter is used when performing tests on IS 136 capable cellular telephones Example Two selections are provided in a one of many format VSELP or ACELP Selecting VSELP causes the Test System to use Vector Sum Excited Linear Predictive coding VSELP Selecting ACELP causes the Test System to use Algebraic Code Excited Linear Predictive coding ACELP Pass Fail Limits Used 134 No pass fail limits specifications are used in the CP Page from Analog Control Channel to Digital Traffic Channel Operation Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions CP Page from Digital Control Channel to Analog Voice Channel CP Page from Digital Control Channel to Analog Voice Channel NOTE This Operation simulates a call to the cellular telephone from the base station on the digital control channel specified by the Digital Control Channel Number parameter It then issues an ALERT order to the telephone You must press the cellular telephone s SEND key to respond The test system then connects the cellular telephone on the analog voice channel specified in the Channels field of the TESTS Set Up screen For information on explicit and implicit call processing see Testing Strategy on page 108
157. ep 3 does not occur on narrow voice channels 4 Receives the hook flash number from the cellular telephone on the reverse voice channel RVC and displays it but does not compare it to a specific value or number Parameters Used No parameters are used in the CP Hook Flash Operation Pass Fail Limits Used No pass fail limits specifications are used in the CP Hook Flash Operation 172 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXA Audio Distortion TXA Audio Distortion NOTE Audio connections from the cellular telephone to the Test System are required for this Operation This Operation measures the level of the demodulated carrier audio distortion NOTE The Test System does not include expandor circuitry If your testing conditions require correction for this situation you must change the limits in the TXA Audio Distortion pass fail limits specifications as required Transmitter audio distortion is expressed as a percentage Also this Operation uses the C Message audio filter or the CCITT audio filter if it is installed in the Test Set Parameters Used No parameters are used in the TXA Audio Distortion Operation 173 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 F me e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXA Audio Distortion Pass Fail Limits Used 174 One pass fail limits specification is used in the TXA Audio Distortion Operation It is Audio Distortion This specification is descr
158. equipment Interconnections are shown in figure 25 on page 72 Cable descriptions and part numbers are listed in table 2 on page 73 and table 3 on page 74 CAUTION The Test Set can be damaged by transient RF power excessive continuous RF power high voltage and electrostatic discharge from cables and other sources Observe proper grounding techniques and exercise care in connecting and applying power to the Test Set and ancillary equipment Cc n Ke gt D wn fo o o 71 Chapter 3 Using the Software Connecting Equipment For more information see the descriptions for Operations that test at extreme voltage settings Antenna Cellular Telephone HP IB DC Power Supply Optional Equipment Connections HI Receive Audio GND Transmit Audio GND Cellular Telephone to Test System Connections Table 2 lists the equipment required for connecting the cellular telephone to the Test System Chapter 3 Using the Software Connecting Equipment Table 2 Cables and Connectors Refer de Quantity ne Description Purpose Needed Part Number 1 BNC f to Type Adapt BNC cable to RF 1 HP 1250 0780 N m adapter IN OUT 2 BNC f to TNC m Adapt BNC cable to 1 HP 1250 2441 for adapter or antenna
159. er 200 as the lower limit and 200 as the upper limit 257 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 F me e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXD Modulation Accuracy 10 Burst TXD Modulation Accuracy 10 Burst Parameters Used 258 This Operation measures the quality of the 7 4 DQPSK modulation of the cellular telephone transmitter across the first 10 symbols of 10 transmitted bursts Measurements that result from this Operation are error vector magnitude EVM phase error magnitude error burst amplitude droop I Q origin offset and carrier frequency error Each measurement is separate and may be selected and performed individually or included as part of a combination of measurements The parameters used in the TXD Modulation Accuracy 10 Burst Operation are Test Error Vector Magnitude Yes or No Test Phase Error Yes or No Test Magnitude Error Yes or No Test Burst Amplitude Droop Yes or No Test I Q Origin Offset Yes or No Test Carrier Frequency Error Yes or No These parameters are described in the following paragraphs Test Error Vector Magnitude Yes or No This parameter allows you to specify whether error vector magnitude will be measured during transmitter testing when the cellular telephone is on a digital traffic channel Two selections are provided in a toggle format Yes and No Selecting Yes causes the Test Software to measure the error vector magnitude Se
160. er a power down power up cycle and until a new program is loaded Loading a new program will replace the existing program Use a static random access memory SRAM card to store test results and procedures that you construct Use the parts listed in table 15 Table 15 SRAM Card Products NOTE 328 Memory Product 64 kilobytes HP 83230A 256 kilobytes HP 83233A 1 megabyte HP 83231A SRAM cards use a lithium battery HP part number CR 2025 or HP part number 1420 0509 Programs and data will be retained for over one year if the card is stored at 25 C The Test Set powers the card while it is inserted Replace the battery while the card is inserted into a powered up Test Set To retain data and programs the battery should be replaced annually See the HP 8920B User s Guide The write protect switch on an SRAM card will write protect the card when it 1s set toward the outside of the card NL Batterij niet weggooien maar inleveren als KCA Chapter 6 Reference Memory Cards Memory Card Storage Space Regarding storage space on memory PC cards the following characteristics apply e A record is 256 bytes e Procedures use 12 to 16 records each e A library uses 20 to 35 records D p h O O Ss 7 D e Only one library is permitted on a card e Overhead of approximately 11 kilobytes is required on each card Use the following formula to estimate the storage space
161. erations available When the first Operation is finished the next will run The sequence will remain in the Test Set s battery backed up memory until another sequence is loaded or set up For information on saving a customized Operation sequence see Using Procedures on page 89 Defining the order of Operations is accomplished by inserting or deleting items from the list of Operations that comes with the Test Software package See chapter 4 Operation Descriptions on page 105 for descriptions of the Operations included in the Test Software Specify the order by adding deleting and or inserting operations in the TESTS Set Up screen Cc n Ke gt D wn fo o o 101 Chapter 3 Using the Software Customizing Testing Specifying Test Parameters NOTE 102 The Test Software uses parameters to optimize the test environment and conditions for an application Typical requirements for each parameter are derived from applicable standards and the Test Software includes appropriate default settings However some parameters will require modification after examination of specific test requirements Review the defaults and change those only as necessary to accomplish your testing regimen For detailed information on the parameters in any specific Test Software Operation see the Parameters Used section of the description of that Operation in chapter 4 Operation Descriptions on page 105 Custo
162. escape sequence following the escape character However if you are linking two or more sequences together you must use the to indicate the escape character between each two sequences If the sequence exceeds the space allotted in the options field you may continue with additional escape sequences in the next available Options field You must however still enter Escape Seq in the Calling Name field and the appropriate address in the Addr field for all subsequent entries To send an escape sequence to a printer 1 Press the TESTS key The TESTS Main Menu screen will appear 2 From the SET UP TEST SET list select Cnfg External Devices to switch to the TESTS External Devices screen 3 Move the cursor to the Inst field and select it gt Rotate the CURSOR CONTROL knob until an empty Calling Name field appears and select it Move the cursor to the Calling Name field and select it From the Choices field select Escape Seq Move the cursor to the Addr address field and select it ern e i Using the DATA keypad enter 9 for serial printers 15 for parallel printers or 7XX for HP IB printers then press the ENTER key 9 Move the cursor to the Options field directly under Calling Name and select it 10 Select the desired escape sequence from the Choices field if applicable or enter an appropriate sequence using the list of characters below the choices Chapter 6 Reference Escape Sequence Definitions for HP
163. escriptions RXA Expandor Expandor Start Level 21 to 12 3 dB This parameter allows you to specify the starting value to be used in varying the input level to the expandor in testing The value is entered as a real number in dB and in the range 21 through 12 3 Example If you wish to start varying the input level to the expandor at 10 dB enter 10 Expandor Step Level 0 to 33 3 dB This parameter allows you to specify the step size to be used in varying the input level to the expandor in testing The value is entered as a real number in dB and in the range 0 through 33 3 Example If you wish to step the input level to the expandor in 2 dB increments enter 2 Expandor Stop Level 21 to 12 3 dB This parameter allows you to specify the ending value to be used in varying the input level to the expandor in testing The value is entered as a real number in dB and in the range 21 through 12 3 Example If you wish to stop varying the input level to the expandor at 8 dB enter 8 230 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions RXA Expandor Pass Fail Limits Used The pass fail limits specifications used in the RXA Expandor Operation are Expandor Tracking Error lt 0 dB Expandor Tracking Error gt 0 dB Expandor Zero Reference Level These specifications are described in the following paragraphs Expandor Tracking Error lt 0 dB This specification sets the pass fail limits used when the expandor s o
164. eslot Test results are not displayed Sync word was too late in the burst There was not enough data after the synchronization word in the captured time record to reconstruct an entire TDMA timeslot Test results are not displayed Chapter 5 Problem Solving Error Messages Synchronization to received data did not occur The Test Set was unable to use the synchronization word to recover the data sent e The level of the signal applied to the Test Set might be too low The Test Set must be configured in Control Mode No other controllers may be on the HP IB bus Do you want to put the Test Set in Control Mode Select desired softkey The Test Set can be set to operate in the HP IB Control mode or can be set to operate in the Talk amp Lstn mode This selection is made in the Test Set I O CONFIGURE screen If the TESTS External Devices screen has entries that require the Test Set to operate as a controller the Test Software will verify that the Test Set is configured properly Answer the question Yes if you wish to change the entry in the I O CONFIGURE screen The memory of the RX DSP board was exceeded The Test Set was unable to terminate the entry of a signal into the digital analyzer Test results are not displayed e The level of the signal applied to the Test Set might be too low This software will not run with firmware revision FW rev presently installed in the Test Set Consult software users manual for correct
165. est that are performed on groups of channels for instance 355 790 and 991 using specific parameters for instance SAT tone 5970 or SID 19 and specific pass fail limits specifications for instance TX power at level 2 The Operations in a procedure perform specific setup control or test actions The Operations described in this user s guide are supplied on the Test Software OTP card These Operations are run on an HP 8920B Option 800 RF Communications Test Set The Tests Subsystem thus forms an easy to use test environment that can be used to automate a group of Operations with easy set up and customization of the Operation sequence The subsystem features are as follows Test suites U fe Qa c O o o o me e 3 Easy addition of Operations to a suite Easy deletion of Operations from a suite Easy customization of parameter values for each Operation in a suite Easy customization of global pass fail limits specification values Large number of parameters and specifications available in the library Easy grouping of parameters and pass fail limits according to the Operation Easy access to relevant parameters and specifications for an Operation from the setup screen Easy customization of global parameters 41 Chapter 2 Product Description Tests Subsystem NOTE 42 In the left hand column in the fields sections of the screen descriptions the following con ditions
166. est you will be prompted to listen for tones from the receiver and then decide whether the test passed or failed The pass fail decision is qualitative and is usually based on whether the tones are heard clearly No responses from you are required Once the parameters and pass fail limits specifications for the Operation are set and the procedure saved during the test procedure preparation this Operation occurs automatically For detailed information on SINAD testing and preparation for such testing see RXA RF Sensitivity on page 240 One parameter is used in the MISC RX Qualitative Audio Operation It is RF Level for SINAD Test 30 to 120 dBm This parameter is described in the following paragraphs RF Level for SINAD Test 30 to 120 dBm This parameter allows you to specify the receiver input RF signal level for measuring SINAD on wide voice channels at the nominal power supply voltage The value is entered as a real number in dBm and in the range 30 through 120 Example If you wish to set the receiver input RF signal level to 116 dBm for SINAD measurements enter 116 Pass Fail Limits Used No pass fail limits specifications are used in the MISC RX Qualitative Audio Operation 291 O pe o o e 3 is oO 77 F me e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions MISC RX Qualitative Audio 292 Uv e z e 3 n Q Ss Ke Problem Solving
167. et desired U Upper M Middle or L Lower This Operation sweeps the level of the RF carrier generated by the Test System on a forward voice channel and sent to the cellular telephone and displays the telephone mobile reported interference MRI response In this Operation the signal that is sent to the cellular telephone is varied from the start level specified in the RF Start Level parameter to the stop level specified in the RF Stop Level parameter in increments as specified in the RF Step Level parameter At each level step the Test System sends the MRI Parameter Message to the cellular telephone with the RSSI and BER threshold fields set to zero This induces the cellular telephone to report the current status of its received signal strength indicator RSSI and bit error rate BER measurements via the reverse voice channel RVC These RSSI and BER values are then displayed NAMPS cellular telephones are capable of reporting RSSI and BER values to the base station on command The BER pertains to the signaling used on narrow voice channels This Operation may be run on only a narrow voice channel or a NAMPS cellular telephone The parameters used in the RXA Mobile Reported Interference Operation are RF Start Level 30 to 120 dBm RF Step Level 0 to 90 dBm RF Stop Level 30 to 120 dBm These parameters are described in the following paragraphs Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions RXA Mobile Reported Interferenc
168. etting Started equipment required 22 loading the software 24 selecting tests 26 what is tested Getting Started what is needed 20 grounding techniques 67 H hand held cellular telephone defined 348 handoff defined 348 hardware applicable 32 problems 288 HELP defined 348 Help 342 defined 348 highlight defined 348 high pass filter defined 348 HP 11807E Tests Main Menu Screen 44 description 44 field descriptions 44 HPF defined 348 HP IB command error 299 HP IB connector 36 HP IB control annunciators 341 HP IB printer 330 HP IB printer connections 328 HP UX file type 307 hum and noise test for transmitter 209 Index I IBASIC copying files 305 defined 348 initializing a disk 318 retrieving data from a card 311 325 retrieving data from a disk 319 IBASIC commands entering from a terminal 305 IBASIC controller defined 349 If unit under test fails 84 If UUT Fails 84 implicit call processing 104 implicit handoff defined 349 Init Card 342 initial tests 26 running 26 selecting 26 initialize defined 349 initializing a disk 318 initializing a RAM disk 335 initializing an SRAM memory card 324 Insrt Stp 342 Instrument BASIC defined 349 INSTRUMENT STATE keys 38 defined 349 Interim Standard 136 defined 349 Introduction to operation descriptions 102 IS 136 defined 349 361 K keypad defined 349 keys backspace 39 CANCEL 39 DATA 37 DA
169. ffic Channel Transmit 278 MISC Battery Life on Analog Control Channel Standby 280 MISC Battery Life on Digital Control Channel Standby 282 MISC Digital Talk Back 284 MISC TX Qualitative Audio 285 MISC RX Qualitative Audio 286 13 Contents 5 Problem Solving Introduction 288 Data Collection Function Does Not Work 289 Memory Space Problems 291 Printing Problems 292 Test Results Are Unexpected 293 Test Set Doesn t Power Up 294 Error Messages 295 14 Contents 6 Reference Introduction 304 Copying Files 305 Data Collection and Retrieval 307 Memory Cards 321 Printing 327 RAM Disk 335 Saving Tests Results 338 Serial Port 339 Understanding HP IB Control Annunciators 341 USER Keys 342 15 Contents Glossary 345 16 Contents Index 357 17 Contents 18 Getting Started ce 5 o D gt Qa Chapter 1 Getting Started What You Will Test What You Will Test Getting Started will acquaint you quickly with the operation of the Test Set and the Test Software You will do the following Register a cellular telephone Test the transmitter frequency error Test the transmitter wideband data deviation Test the transmitter power on power levels 2 7 Release the cellular telephone to an analog control channel Sa S These Operations will do the following Establish that the Test Software has been loaded properly Verify that the Test Set and the Test
170. figure 16 on page 55 or Integer see figure 17 on page 56 The definitions are self explanatory U fe Qa c O o o o me e 3 Selecting the available field allows you to set the appropriate value 53 Chapter 2 Product Description Tests Subsystem m TESTS Specific Porameters j _ _ Parameters used in testi moef Parws GEN Modify ution Porameters Description alue Units Print All System Type DAMP S Connection Port RF In Out Coble Loss 0 6000 Units for Power Measurement Print Opt s M aLIMsPF Figure 13 TESTS Specific Parameters Screen TESTS Specific Parameters Parameters used in testi moef Porws CP Oria from ACCH to AYC Choices Print All Biel s Hz Anglos Yoice Channel Power Level 0 Figure 14 TESTS Specific Parameters Screen Showing Choices 54 Figure 15 Figure 16 m TESTS Specific Parameters Parameters used in testi TRA RF Po ut Description value Units Qutput Power Level 0 Test Output Power Level 1 Test Output Power Level 2 est Qutput Power Level 3 6 Test Output Power Level 7 Chapter 2 Product Description Tests Subsystem mcef Paris Print All s TESTS Specific Parameters Screen Showing Toggle m TESTS Specific Parameters Parameters used in testi THA Audio Freauency R Description value Units TX Audio
171. firmware revision The Test Set must have a firmware revision B 04 01 or higher To determine the revision of the firmware e Press the CANCEL key or press the SHIFT key then the CANCEL key to pause the program e Press the SHIFT key then the CONFIG key to switch to the CONFIGURE screen e View the revision number of the firmware in the upper right corner of the display Contact the factory 1 800 922 8920 in the USA and Canada only if you do not have the necessary revision Firmware is installed in the Test Set by running a program installed on a PCMCIA card 307 a a fa z D 3 o o 5 a Chapter 5 Problem Solving Error Messages 308 Timeout error from an external instrument The Test System displays this message if it attempts to control a device on the HP IB bus and is unable to do so for 5 seconds e Check cables e Verify that the HP IB address and other setup conditions of your device are set properly e Verify entries made to the TESTS External Devices screen Timeout from printer at address printer address Retry e Check the cable and the connections Weak clock Difficult to find data clock phase The Test Set was unable to recover the data clock and use it in subsequent data recovery e The level of the signal applied to the Test Set might be too low The test will continue with this error present and the results will be displayed How ever the performance might be degrad
172. from Reg Orig 2 to 9999999999 Digital Traffic Channel DVCC 1 255 Digital Traffic Channel Slot 1 3 Digital Traffic Channel Power Level 0 10 Cellular Digital Traffic Channel Vocoder VSELP ACELP Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions CP Page from Analog Control Channel to Digital Traffic Channel These parameters are described in the following paragraphs Source for Phone Number Use Prev Ph Below Prompt This parameter allows you to specify the location from which the Test System will obtain the cellular telephone number Three selections are provided in a one of many format Use Prev or Phone Below and Prompt Selecting Use Prev causes the Test System to use the mobile identification number MIN obtained in a prior Registration or Origination Operation If there was no prior Registration or Origination Operation the Test System will prompt you to enter the telephone number Selecting Phone Below causes the Test System to use the Phone Number 0 Use from Reg Orig parameter to obtain the cellular telephone number Selecting Prompt causes the Test System to prompt you to enter the telephone number Phone Number 0 Use from Reg Orig 2 to 9999999999 This parameter allows you to specify the telephone number of the cellular telephone being tested It is ordinarily entered as a 10 digit real number in the range 0 through 9999999999 but it is sometimes advantageous to use a negative number Setting the phone nu
173. fter the Registration or Origination Operation is run once it need not be run again for the Test System to be able to perform other tests The registration is remembered unless it is erased by loading new test software registering a different cellular telephone or executing a SCRATCH C command in IBASIC In practical applications there are three possibilities 1 The test procedure performs a Registration or Origination Operation This obtains the telephone number from the cellular telephone 2 If you know the cellular telephone number you enter it into the Phone Number 0 Use from Reg Orig parameter 3 If the cellular telephone number is not obtained through either of the above actions the Test System will prompt the operator for it The operator must then determine the number and supply it in response to the prompt Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions CP Registration on Digital Control Channel Parameters Used No parameters are used in the CP Registration on Digital Control Channel Operation Pass Fail Limits Used No pass fail limits specifications are used in the CP Registration on Digital Control Channel Operation 125 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 2 z pei e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions CP Page from Analog Control Channel to Analog Voice Channel CP Page from Analog Control Channel to Analog Voice Channel This Operation simulates a call to the cellular telephone from t
174. g 60 OUTPUT 9 AS The string is output at the serial port 70 END LOOP Goes back to get more of the file 80 END End of the program 7 Press the k1 Run key to run the entered IBASIC program The Run field and the Run Test field do not perform the same function The Run field assigned as a default on the TESTS IBASIC Controller screen will start an IBASIC program that is resident in the Test Set memory The Run Test field assigned as a default in the other TESTS screens will load and run the program that is called from the Select Procedure Filename and Select Procedure Location entries in the TESTS Main Menu screen Printing Supported Printers You may print the following The six basic steps to the printing process are 1 Chapter 6 Reference Printing Test results TESTS screens D i e Ss iv o Verify that your printer is supported by the Test Set see Supported Printers on page 333 Determine if your printer requires serial parallel or HP IB connection see the printer documentation Connect the printer to the appropriate port on the Test Set see Printer Connection on page 334 Configure the Test Set for your printer and its interface see Configuring the Test Set for Printing on page 336 Direct the Test Set as to what to print see Printing Test Results on page 337 Select the desired parameter value for controlling printing The Test
175. g 2 to 9999999999 This parameter allows you to specify the telephone number of the cellular telephone being tested It is ordinarily entered as a 10 digit real number in the range 0 through 9999999999 but it is sometimes advantageous to use a negative number Setting the phone number parameter to a negative number results in the Test System using a MIN consisting of all zeroes An all zeroes MIN is invalid according to Interim Standard 54 However some cellular telephones have an all zeroes MIN after manufacture or service Thus entering a negative number allows the Test System to page such cellular telephones SAT Tone 5970 6000 or 6030 Hz This parameter allows you to specify the frequency of the supervisory audio tone that will be used on all analog voice channels A supervisory audio tone SAT is an out of voice band audio tone that is used for cell site identification Three selections are provided in a one of many format 5970 6000 and 6030 Hz One of the three tones is added to the voice transmission of all calls within an individual cell The cellular telephone then detects the tone and modulates the transmitted voice channel carrier with a constant relative phase tone that is filtered or regenerated from the received tone to establish a closed loop between the cellular telephone and the cell site Transmission of the SAT by a cellular telephone is suspended during transmission of wideband data on the reverse voice c
176. g transmitter testing when the cellular telephone is on a digital traffic channel Two selections are provided in a toggle format Yes and No Selecting Yes causes the Test Software to measure the I Q origin offset Selecting No causes the Test Software to ignore the measurement Test Carrier Frequency Error Yes or No This parameter allows you to specify whether carrier frequency error will be measured during transmitter testing when the cellular telephone is on a digital traffic channel Two selections are provided in a toggle format Yes and No Selecting Yes causes the Test Software to measure the carrier frequency error Selecting No causes the Test Software to ignore the measurement 259 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 F me e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXD Modulation Accuracy 10 Burst Pass Fail Limits Used 260 The pass fail limits specifications used in the TXD Modulation Accuracy 10 Burst Operation are Error Vector Magnitude EVM Phase Error Magnitude Error Burst Amplitude Droop I Q Origin Offset Carrier Frequency Error These specifications are described in the following paragraphs Error Vector Magnitude EVM This specification sets the pass fail limits for the error vector magnitude EVM The value is entered as a decimal number as an upper limit only and as a percentage Pass fail limits specifications are determined using any applicable standard
177. gh 7 Example If you wish to use power level 7 enter 7 Pass Fail Limits Used 150 No pass fail limits specifications are used in the CP Origination from Digital Control Channel to Analog Voice Channel Operation Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions CP Origination from Digital Control Channel to Digital Traffic Channel CP Origination from Digital Control Channel to Digital Traffic Channel This Operation simulates a call from the cellular telephone to the base station by putting the cellular telephone in service and originating a call from the handset Specifically in this Operation the Test System does the following 1 Simulates a control channel 2 Prompts you to dial any telephone number as many as 10 digits after the cellular telephone has service Service is indicated by the cellular telephone NO SERVICE indicator extinguishing or the SERVICE indicator lighting 3 Performs 3 of 5 majority voting on the Reverse Control Message 4 Performs Bose Chaudhuri Hocquenghem BCH error detection and correction of the Reverse Control Message Wideband data 5 Sends an Initial Traffic Channel Designation order to the cellular telephone directing it to tune to the traffic channel specified in the Channe1s field of the TESTS Set Up screen 6 Checks the digital verification color code DVCC on the initial traffic channel to verify that the traffic channel was obtained It is not necessary to register the cellular t
178. gital control information It is used typically for call setup and system administration cursor The brightened region of the Test Set s screen that indicates the field function currently being accessed CURSOR CONTROL knob The large dial in the center of the Test Set s front panel that is rotated to position the cursor on the screen and then pressed to select the particular field or function Sometimes referred to as knob DAMPS See Digital Advanced Mobile Phone System DATA keys A group of push buttons on the Test Set s front panel that are used for entering and changing data and controlling the various aspects of using data for measurements DATA FUNCTIONS keys A group of push buttons on the Test Set s front panel that are used for changing field values and controlling the various aspects of making measurements DCCH See digital control channel Del Step A Test Software function that deletes a step in a procedure Glossary device under test DUT The device that is being tested usually a mobile or base station Sometimes referred to as the UUT unit under test or MSUT mobile station under test Digital Advanced Mobile Phone System DAMPS A revision to the advanced mobile phone system AMPS that increases channel capability through digital multiplexing using time division multiple access TDMA and that meets the requirements of Specification IS 54 digital control channel DCCH In T
179. gs before leaving the instrument screen 6 7 Press the k2 Continue key to return to the TESTS IBASIC Controller screen Press the k2 Continue key to continue the program 299 U e z o wn 2 5 Ss Ke Chapter 5 Problem Solving Test Set Doesn t Power Up Test Set Doesn t Power Up Check the AC or DC power connection and the setting of the AC DC switch on the rear panel See the Test Set s User s Guide 300 Error Messages Chapter 5 Problem Solving Error Messages Many error messages are coded into the Test Sets firmware and Test Software If the problem is related to Test Set operation access the MESSAGE screen to see any messages that have occurred since the instrument was turned on To do this press the SHIFT key then the RX key The following pages list alphabetically many of the error messages and include descriptions of the problems and possible corrections If the Test System displays a message that is not described here press the CANCEL key and then the MSSG key The Test System might display other related error messages For a listing of additional error messages see the Test Set s User s Guide and the Programmer s Guide If The Test System displays an error message that contains a program line number and it is not listed in this section write down the message with the line number and call the factory at 1 800 922 8920 in the USA and Canada only 301 U
180. gt D wn fo o oO 83 Chapter 3 Using the Software Using Common Processes Exiting a Procedure To exit a procedure either Press the CANCEL key to pause the procedure NOTE At this point the procedure is stopped You may elect to restart the procedure see Pausing Stopping or Continuing a Procedure on page 85 but be aware that subsequent testing might be unpredictable or Press the SHIFT key then the CANCEL key to stop the procedure This performs an IBASIC RESET function 84 Chapter 3 Using the Software Using Common Processes Pausing Stopping or Continuing a Procedure To pause a procedure Press the CANCEL key or Press the k2 Stop Test key NOTE At this point the procedure is stopped You may elect to restart the procedure but be aware that subsequent testing might be unpredictable To stop a procedure Press the SHIFT key then the CANCEL key This performs an IBASIC RESET function or Press the k1 Stop Test key twice NOTE If you make changes to instrument settings while the procedure is paused subsequent testing might be unpredictable Error messages might be displayed See Exiting a Procedure on page 84 To continue a paused procedure 1 Press the TESTS key if the TESTS Main Menu screen is not being displayed 2 Press the k2 Continue key The test time is displayed when the procedure is completed This time includes the period during which the procedur
181. hannel Analog Voice Channel Power Level 0 7 This parameter allows you to specify the power level at which the cellular telephone will transmit when it is operated on an analog voice channel The value is entered as an integer in the range 0 through 7 Example If you wish to use power level 7 enter 7 Pass Fail Limits Used No pass fail limits specifications are used in the CP Handoff from Digital Traffic Channel to Analog Voice Channel Operation 166 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions CP Release to Analog Control Channel CP Release to Analog Control Channel This Operation releases the cellular telephone from the current analog voice or digital traffic channel to the analog control channel specified by the Operation parameters NOTE For information on explicit and implicit call processing see Testing Strategy on page 108 Specifically in this Operation the Test System does the following 1 Sets the cellular telephone to a voice channel if it is not already on a voice channel 2 Sends a release message to the cellular telephone 3 Monitors the power continuously until the power drops below 25 dBW or until 6 seconds has passed whichever occurs first 4 Indicates that the test has failed if the 6 second limit is reached Parameters Used The parameters used in the CP Release to Analog Control Channel Operation are Analog Control Channel Number 0 1023 System Identification SID Number 0 32767 T
182. hannel RVC but is not suspended when the signaling tone ST is sent Example If you wish to use 6000 Hz as the SAT select 6000 137 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 F me e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions CP Page from Digital Control Channel to Analog Voice Channel Analog Voice Channel Power Level 0 7 This parameter allows you to specify the power level at which the cellular telephone will transmit when it is paged to an analog voice channel The value is entered as an integer in the range 0 through 7 Example If you wish to use power level 7 enter 7 Pass Fail Limits Used No pass fail limits specifications are used in the CP Page from Digital Control Channel to Analog Voice Channel Operation 138 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions CP Page from Digital Control Channel to Digital Traffic Channel CP Page from Digital Control Channel to Digital Traffic Channel NOTE This Operation simulates a call to the cellular telephone from the base station on the digital control channel specified by the Digital Control Channel Number parameter It then issues an ALERT order to the telephone You must press the cellular telephone s SEND key to respond The test system then connects the cellular telephone on the digital traffic channel specified in the Channels field of the TESTS Set Up screen For information on explicit and implicit call processing see Testing Strategy on page
183. hannel transmission If the firmware revision in the HP 8920B is B 05 00 or later this parameter is used when performing tests on IS 136 capable cellular telephones Example Two selections are provided in a one of many format VSELP or ACELP Selecting VSELP causes the Test System to use Vector Sum Excited Linear Predictive coding VSELP Selecting ACELP causes the Test System to use Algebraic Code Excited Linear Predictive coding ACELP Pass Fail Limits Used 158 No pass fail limits specifications are used in the CP Handoff from Analog Voice Channel to Digital Traffic Channel Operation Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions CP Handoff from Narrow Analog Voice Channel to Analog Voice Channel CP Handoff from Narrow Analog Voice Channel to Analog Voice Channel NOTE NOTE Parameters Used This Operation performs an explicit handoff from a narrow analog voice channel Operation on a telephone channel to an analog voice channel Operation on the same or another telephone channel This is a NAMPS only operation The channels must indicate the offset desired U Upper M Middle or L Lower For information on explicit and implicit call processing see Testing Strategy on page 108 The parameters used in the CP Handoff from Narrow Analog Voice Channel to Analog Voice Channel Operation are SAT Tone 5970 6000 or 6030 Hz Analog Voice Channel Power Level 0 7 These parameters are described in the following paragra
184. he Test Set A lighted annunciator indicates the Test Set state An example is shown in the following diagram Active Register Lighte 8 A iator Page nnuncia S Access Connect band pass filter BPF A filter that increasingly rejects frequency components of signals as those components diverge above and below certain cutoff frequencies In the Test Set audio band pass filters are used to reduce the level of out of band signals during certain measurements base station BS Multiple definitions 1 A fixed site station in the Domestic Public Cellular Radio Telecommunications Service It is used for communicating with mobile stations 2 A fixed location transceiver in a communications network 3 The land station in a cellular or PCS network that carries on a radio communication with mobile units Aiesso 5 Dependent upon context the term base station might also refer to a cell a sector within a cell a Mobile Telephone Switching Office MTSO or some other part of a cellular system BCH code See Bose Chaudhuri Hocquenghem code BER See bit error rate bit error rate BER The ratio of the number of erroneous bits received to the total number of bits received during the observation period and expressed as a percentage a fraction or a ratio 351 352 Glossary Bose Chaudhuri Hocquenghem code BCH code A large class of error correcting cyclic codes For any posit
185. he TXA Current Drain Operation It is Power Lvl at which Current Drain Tested 0 0 7 2 7 0 amp 7 or 7 This parameter is described in the following paragraphs Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXA Current Drain Power Lvl at which Current Drain Tested 0 0 7 2 7 0 amp 7 or 7 This parameter allows you to specify the power level at which current drain is tested Five selections are provided in a one of many format These are O causes current to be measured at power level 0 only 0 7 causes current to be measured at power levels 0 through 7 2 7 causes current to be measured at power levels 2 through 7 O amp 7 causes current to be measured at power level 0 and 7 7 causes current to be measured at power level 7 only Example If you wish to measure the power drain at power levels 2 3 4 5 6 and 7 select 2 7 Pass Fail Limits Used The pass fail limits specifications used in the TXA Current Drain Operation are Current Drain Levels 0 2 Current Drain Levels 3 7 These specifications are described in the following paragraphs Current Drain Levels 0 2 This specification sets the pass fail limits for current consumption in transmitter tests at RF output power levels 0 2 The values are entered as decimal numbers as upper and lower limits in amperes Pass fail limits specifications are determined using any applicable standard such as e Cellular Telephone Specification Current Consumption Transm
186. he base station NOTE For information on explicit and implicit call processing see Testing Strategy on page 108 Specifically in this Operation the Test System does the following 1 2 3 Parameters Used Performs a page to the cellular telephone Performs 3 of 5 majority voting on the Reverse Control Message Performs Bose Chaudhuri Hocquenghem BCH error detection and correction of the Reverse Control Message Sends an Initial Voice Channel Designation order to the cellular telephone directing it to tune to the analog voice channel specified in the Channe1s field of the TESTS Set Up screen Sends an ALERT order to the cellular telephone by way of the forward voice channel FVC Makes a supervisory audio tone SAT measurement on the initial voice channel to verify that the voice channel was obtained The SAT measurement result is not displayed in this Operation The parameters used in the CP Page from Analog Control Channel to Analog Voice Channel Operation are Source for Phone Number Use Prev Ph Below Prompt Phone Number 0 Use from Reg Orig 2 to 9999999999 SAT Tone 5970 6000 or 6030 Hz Analog Voice Channel Power Level 0 7 These parameters are described in the following paragraphs 126 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions CP Page from Analog Control Channel to Analog Voice Channel Source for Phone Number Use Prev Ph Below Prompt This parameter allows you to specify the location f
187. he cellular telephone Example If you determine that the output power levels should be maintained within the range of 2 dB and 4 dB of the nominal values over a specified temperature range enter the values as shown in table 9 for the lower limit and the upper limit for power levels of 0 through 10 273 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 F me e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXD RF Power Output vs Channel Plotted Table 9 274 Power Levels Example Power Level Nominal Lower Limit Upper Limit Value dBW dBW dBW Level 0 6 2 8 Level 1 2 4 Level 2 2 6 0 Level 3 6 10 4 Level 4 10 14 8 Level 5 14 18 12 Level 6 18 22 16 Level 7 232 26 20 Level 8 26 30 24 Level 9 30 34 _28 Level 10 34 38 32 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXD Time Alignment TXD Time Alignment Parameters Used This Operation measures the capability of the cellular telephone to respond correctly to time alignment commands from the base station In this Operation the cellular telephone is commanded to change to various time alignments by being issued physical layer FACCH messages from the Test System The first data bit in the reverse traffic channel is located and referenced to the start of the corresponding forward channel data sent by the Test System From this information the transmit offset en
188. he parameters globally for all Operations in the suite The screen also serves to provide default settings for specific parameters If after you have completed changes to a test suite you wish to change the parameters in another suite you must return to the TESTS Set Up menu to select that suite then return to this menu The following paragraphs describe the various fields of this screen see figure 13 on page 54 figure 14 on page 54 figure 15 on page 55 figure 16 on page 55 and figure 17 on page 56 Apply Def Field Selecting this field or pressing k2 resets the parameter settings for the selected Operation to the default settings specified in the defaults menu Def Parms Field Selecting this field or pressing k1 switches the display to the TESTS Default Parameters screen This allows you to edit the default parameters Help Field Selecting this field or pressing k4 displays the help screen that contains assistance information in the TESTS Specific Parameters screen Operation List Field This is the field at the top left of the display see figure 13 on page 54 It identifies the Operation for which the parameter value can be set The Operation indicated in this field is associated with the test suite identified in the TESTS Set Up screen Selecting this field displays a menu that contains all of the Operations in the suite This allows you to create your own set of parameter values for any Operation in the su
189. he value is entered as an integer in the range 0 through 32767 To perform testing in a non roaming environment this parameter must be equal to the cellular telephone home system ID To perform testing in a roaming environment this parameter must use an ID different from that of the cellular telephone Example If your cellular telephone s SID number is decimal 11111 enter 11111 Pass Fail Limits Used 168 No pass fail limits specifications are used in the CP Release to Analog Control Channel Operation Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions CP Release to Digital Control Channel CP Release to Digital Control Channel NOTE Parameters Used This Operation releases the cellular telephone from the current analog voice or digital traffic channel to the digital control channel specified by the Operation parameters For information on explicit and implicit call processing see Testing Strategy on page 108 Specifically in this Operation the Test System does the following 1 Sets the cellular telephone to a digital traffic channel if it is not already on a digital traffic channel 2 Sends a release message to the cellular telephone 3 Waits for a release acknowledgment for the cellular telephone or until 6 seconds has passed whichever occurs first 4 Indicates that the test has failed if the 6 second limit is reached The parameters used in the CP Release to Digital Control Channel Operation are Digital Con
190. he values are entered as decimal numbers and as upper and lower limits Pass fail limits specifications are determined using any applicable standard such as e TIA Standard Sub Audible Data Example If the standard states that the phase jitter of the eye pattern must be less than 15 enter 15 as the upper limit and 0 as the lower limit Phase Jitter 1 JB JA Relative Amplitude 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Time mS Transmit Data Eye Pattern Figure 31 Transmit Data Eye Pattern DSAT Phase Jitter 195 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 2 z pei e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXA FM Hum and Noise TXA FM Hum and Noise NOTE NOTE NOTE Parameters Used Audio connections from the cellular telephone to the Test System are required for this Operation This Operation measures the cellular telephone transmitter s output for the ratio of residual frequency modulation to the standard test modulation The Test System does not include expandor circuitry If your testing conditions require correction for this situation you must change the limits in the TXA FM Hum and Noise pass fail limits specification as required FM hum and noise is expressed in dB from the formula 20 x Log Reference Deviation Present Deviation An open microphone on your cellular telephone might affect the results of this Operation If your cellular telephone has an open microphone this
191. hese parameters are described in the following paragraphs 167 O pe o 2 e 3 is D 77 9 me e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions CP Release to Analog Control Channel NOTE Analog Control Channel Number 0 1023 This parameter allows you to specify the control channel to be used by the cellular telephone The value is entered as an integer in the range 0 through 1023 Control channels are numbered as follows Primary Control Channels System A 1 through 133 Primary Control Channels System B 334 though 366 Secondary Control Channels System A 667 through 716 and 991 through 1023 Secondary Control Channels System B 717 through 799 Some cellular telephones are designed to work only on System A or only on System B For these cellular telephones the control channel specified by this parameter must correspond to the correct system in order to allow the cellular telephone to obtain service Example If you wish to use control channel 333 to set up a call with the cellular telephone verify that the control channel number corresponds to the correct system for your telephone then enter 333 System Identification SID Number 0 32767 This parameter allows you to specify the cellular telephone s System Identification SID number to be used in testing The SID is stored as a 15 bit binary number in the telephone permanent security and identification memory T
192. ibed in the following paragraphs Audio Distortion This specification sets the pass fail limits used when measuring the audio distortion that is acceptable in the transmitter Only the upper limit is used The value is entered as a decimal number and as a percentage Pass fail limits specifications are determined using any applicable standard such as e EIA TIA Standard Modulation Distortion and Noise Example If you wish to use an upper limit of 5 percent enter 5 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXA Audio Frequency Response TXA Audio Frequency Response NOTE Background Parameters Used Audio connections from the cellular telephone to the Test System are required for this Operation This Operation measures how closely the frequency deviation of the transmitter follows a 6 dB octave pre emphasis slope over a specified frequency range The test results indicate the flatness of the audio output as frequency is varied Audio frequency response is expressed in dB error from the 6 dB octave pre emphasis slope This Operation is intended to be used between the audio response frequencies of 300 Hz and 3000 Hz only However the start frequency and stop frequency within that range are selectable through parameters as is the step size to be used in the testing Audio frequency response is measured at a 2 9 kHz peak deviation for wide voice channels and a 1 5 kHz peak deviation for narrow voice channels The frequenc
193. ic Channel CP Page from Analog Control Channel to Digital Traffic Channel This Operation simulates a call to the cellular telephone from the base station NOTE For information on explicit and implicit call processing see Testing Strategy on page 108 Specifically in this Operation the Test System does the following 1 2 3 Parameters Used Performs a page to the cellular telephone Performs 3 of 5 majority voting on the Reverse Control Message Performs Bose Chaudhuri Hocquenghem BCH error detection and correction of the Reverse Control Message Sends an Initial Traffic Channel Designation order to the cellular telephone directing it to tune to the traffic channel specified in the Channe1s field of the TESTS Set Up screen Sends a physical layer control FACCH message to the cellular telephone by the way of the forward digital traffic channel FDTC Sends an ALERT order to the cellular telephone by way of the FDTC Sends a Connect ACK message to the cellular telephone because the Test System is not able to respond quickly enough to an RDTC connect message call answer from the cellular telephone Checks the digital verification color code DVCC on the initial traffic channel to verify that the traffic channel was obtained The parameters used in the CP Page from Analog Control Channel to Digital Traffic Channel Operation are 132 Source for Phone Number Use Prev Ph Below Prompt Phone Number 0 Use
194. ice Channel 160 CP Release to Analog Control Channel 162 CP Release to Digital Control Channel 164 CP Hook Flash 167 TXA Audio Distortion 168 TXA Audio Frequency Response 170 11 12 TXA Compressor Response 173 TXA Current Drain 177 TXA Digital Signaling Tone Deviation and Code 182 TXA Dual Tone Multiple Frequency Key Pad and Dual Tone Multiple Frequency Frequency Error 184 TXA Digital Supervisory Audio Tone Deviation Closure and Phase Jitter 186 TXA FM Hum and Noise 191 TXA Frequency Error 193 TXA Modulation Deviation Limiting on Analog Voice Channel 194 TXA Modulation Deviation Limiting on Narrow Analog Voice Channel 197 TXA RF Power Output 200 TXA RF Power Output vs Channel Plotted 204 TXA Signaling Tone Frequency and Deviation 209 RXA Audio Distortion 218 RXA Audio Frequency Response 220 RXA Expandor 224 RXA Forward Voice Channel Order Message Error Rate 229 Contents RXA Hum and Noise 231 RXA Mobile Reported Interference 233 A RF Sensitivity 235 RF Sensitivity Narrow Analog Voice Channel 238 A RF Sensitivity vs Channel Plotted 241 TXD Adjacent Channel Power 245 TXD Modulation Accuracy 247 TXD Modulation Accuracy 10 Burst 253 TXD RF Power Output 259 TXD RF Power Output vs Channel Plotted 264 TXD Time Alignment 270 RXD Receiver Sensitivity 272 RXD Receiver Sensitivity Loopback 274 MISC Battery Life on Analog Voice Channel Transmit 276 MISC Battery Life on Digital Tra
195. ied as the start channel in the Operation and then performs the rest of the Operation At the end of the Operation the Test System performs another handoff either explicit or implicit to whatever channel is next If this Operation is performed using a Test Set without Option 006 10 W to 50 uW power measurement range the Test Software will perform a calibration for making digital power measurements The calibration routine momentarily places the cellular telephone on an analog voice channel to provide an arbitrary constant not pulsed signal to the Test Set The Test Software makes an average power measurement and a relative digital DSP measurement and calculates a calibration factor between the measurements This calibration factor is then used by the Test Software when making digital power measurements This Operation is ordinarily performed at the nominal supply voltage but it may be performed with high and low supply voltages for extreme measurements If the Test at Extreme Supply Voltages parameter is set to Yes see GEN Modify External Power Supply Parameters on page 117 so that output power measurements are made at high supply voltage and low supply voltage this Operation requires a properly configured programmable power supply see TXA Current Drain on page 182 269 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 F me e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXD RF Power Output vs Channel Plotted Par
196. iew To Run Tests Connect Cables Load Software OOO m SO Oss 2990 O00 EEO Customize Testing Select a test procedure TESTS Set Up Screen See page 47 See page 81 TESTS Specific Parameters Screen See page 52 TESTS Default Parameters Screen See page 57 Run Tests x TESTS Pass Fail Limits Screen See page 62 lemyos y Bbuisn Figure 26 Testing Overview 79 Chapter 3 Using the Software Testing Overview Before Running Tests Select a procedure from the HP 11807E Option 014 Test Software OTP card The Test Software is shipped with the following preprogrammed procedures CP_ACCH Contains call processing tests using an analog control channel CP_DCCH Contains call processing tests using a digital control channel CP_NAMP Contains call processing tests using Narrow Analog Voice Channels and Wide Analog Voice Channels FUNCTNL Contains RF and parametric tests No audio functions are required PARAMTR Contains parametric tests including RF audio and call processing Audio connections are required STARTED Contains five tests used in chapter 1 Getting Started Before you begin testing you should have made the appropriate hardware connections See Connecting Equipment on page 71 80 Chapter 3 Using the Software Testing Overview Selecting a Test Procedure To load the test procedure see figure 27
197. igure 12 on page 51 It represents the Operation list number Selecting this field and turning the CURSOR CONTROL knob scrolls through the CHANNELS in the list field This allows for adding or deleting channels anywhere in the list 47 U fe Qa c O o o o me e 3 Chapter 2 Product Description Tests Subsystem 48 Main Menu Field Selecting this field or pressing k5 switches the display to the TESTS Main Menu screen Operations Field Selecting this field displays a menu that contains all of the Operations in the library Once you have located the desired Operation selecting that field will insert that Operation into the test suite Operation Number Field This is the small field to the left of the description of the first Operation in the Range List field when List is selected see figure 12 on page 51 It displays the Operation number in the suite Selecting this field and turning the CURSOR CONTROL knob scrolls through the Operations in the test suite This allows for adding or deleting Operations or changing to different Operations anywhere in the suite Print All Field Selecting this field or pressing k3 prints all of the information in the TESTS Set Up screen including any data scrolled off the screen Range List Field This is a toggle field that allows you to select either a range or a list of channels Selecting Range displays the start stop and Step fields see
198. ile station A telephone designed to operate in a cellular network be installed in a vehicle or carried by a person and be operated at unspecified locations or while in motion Mobile stations include hand held personal units transportable units and units installed in vehicles See also hand held cellular telephone transportable cellular telephone and mobile cellular telephone mobile station under test MSUT The cellular device that is being tested Sometimes referred to as the DUT device under test or UUT unit under test MSUT See mobile station under test NAMPS See Narrow band Advanced Mobile Phone System Narrow band Advanced Mobile Phone System NAMPS A revision to the Advanced Mobile Phone System AMPS that increases channel capability through the use of narrower channels Three NAMPS channels occupy the space of one AMPS channel no service indicator An indicator on the cellular phone that lights when there is no cellular service available in a given area Glossary one of many A type of display screen field that offers multiple selections Sometimes called one of M or 1 of M one time programmable card OTP card A type of PC card that is capable of data storage and into which data can be loaded one time only similar to integrated circuit ROM The Test Software is shipped on an OTP card OTP card See one time programmable card Page The Test Set state in which it is paging the mobile s
199. ill be performed at power level 0 Two selections are provided in a toggle format Yes and No Selecting Yes causes the Test System to perform the test at power level 0 Selecting No causes the Test System to skip the test at power level 0 205 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 2 z pei e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXA RF Power Output 206 Test Output Power Level 1 Yes or No This parameter allows you to specify whether cellular telephone transmitter output power testing will be performed at power level 1 Two selections are provided in a toggle format Yes and No Selecting Yes causes the Test System to perform the test at power level 1 Selecting No causes the Test System to skip the test at power level 1 Test Output Power Level 2 Yes or No This parameter allows you to specify whether cellular telephone transmitter output power testing will be performed at power level 2 Two selections are provided in a toggle format Yes and No Selecting Yes causes the Test System to perform the test at power level 2 Selecting No causes the Test System to skip the test at power level 2 Test Output Power Level 3 6 Yes or No This parameter allows you to specify whether cellular telephone transmitter output power testing will be performed at power levels 3 through 6 Two selections are provided in a toggle format Yes and No Selecting Yes causes the Test System to perform the test at p
200. imits specification is used in the TXA Frequency Error Operation It is Frequency Error This specification is described in the following paragraphs Frequency Error This specification sets the pass fail limits for the transmitter s carrier frequency error The values are entered as decimal numbers as upper and lower limits and in ppm parts per million Pass fail limits specifications are determined using any applicable standard such as e EIA TIA Standard Frequency Requirements Frequency Stability Example If you determine that the carrier frequency should be maintained within 2 5 parts per million ppm of any assigned channel frequency enter 2 5 as the lower limit and 2 5 as the upper limit Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXA Modulation Deviation Limiting on Analog Voice Channel TXA Modulation Deviation Limiting on Analog Voice Channel NOTE Parameters Used Audio connections from the cellular telephone to the Test System are required for this Operation This Operation measures the capability of the transmitter s circuits to prevent the cellular telephone s transmitter from producing deviations in excess of the system specification when the telephone is operating on an analog voice channel This Operation measures the Peak and the Peak values of the instantaneous INST and steady state SS modulation and indicates whether the modulation is symmetrical Symmetry is based upon the difference
201. in the maintenance mode where the Test System is waiting for an answer you must press the cellular telephone s SEND key to exit the Operation Background The digital signaling tone DST is generated by the cellular telephone and is transmitted to the cell site for confirming orders such as Alert Audit and Change Power and for signaling flash and release requests The DST is a 24 bit digital sequence that is transmitted continuously at 200 NRZ bits second and that produces an average peak deviation of 700 Hz Each DST sequence is the logical inverse of a corresponding digital supervisory audio tone DSAT sequence CAUTION In narrow voice channels an open microphone on your cellular telephone might affect the results of this Operation If your cellular telephone has an open microphone this Operation must be performed in a quiet environment Parameters Used No parameters are used in the TXA Digital Signaling Tone Deviation and Code Operation 187 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 F me e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXA Digital Signaling Tone Deviation and Code Pass Fail Limits Used 188 One pass fail limits specification is used in the TXA Digital Signaling Tone Deviation and Code Operation It is DSAT Deviation This specification is described in the following paragraphs DSAT Deviation This specification sets the pass fail limits that are used for peak frequenc
202. in the CUSTOMIZE TEST PROCEDURE list and select it to switch to the TESTS Default Parameters screen Move the cursor to the Operation field and select it Rotate the CURSOR CONTROL knob to the desired Operation and select it Move the cursor to the Parameter Number field and select it Move the cursor to the Value field of the parameter to be changed and select it So oe Le ON Enter the desired value using the DATA keypad then press the ENTER key e Use the backspace key to correct entries e Press the CANCEL key to cancel entries and retain the old value 7 Press the k5 Main Menu key or the TESTS key to return to the TESTS Main Menu screen Cc n Ke gt o wn io o o 95 Chapter 3 Using the Software Using Common Processes Verifying and Editing Pass Fail Limits Specifications NOTE 96 Pass fail limits are values that you enter to optimize your use of the Test Software Many of the pass fail limits specifications are determined by examining your testing needs Default values are available in the Test Software Some of these values have been derived from standard methods of measurement and some are derived from industry standard requirements Each Operation includes applicable pass fail limits specifications It is not necessarily required that you change these pass fail limits specifications when you select an Operation or change the Operations in your procedure However it might b
203. ing the file from the first card into the Test Set inserting a second initialized card and then using the IBASIC SAVE command To copy a file select and enter the following characters SAVE MY_TEST INTERNAL You may list the names of the files stored in a PC card or disk catalog by using the IBASIC CAT command To display a list of file names on a PC card select and enter the following characters CAT INTERNAL or CAT Upon power on the default mass storage device is the PC card If you did not change this setting then INTERNAL is optional If you are entering many characters into the IBASIC command line you might wish to connect a terminal to the Test Set see Serial Connection on page 334 You might also wish to use a terminal if you have many files to list because file names displayed with the CAT IBASIC command scroll only from the top of the Test Set screen not from the bottom 311 D i e Ss iv Chapter 6 Reference Copying Files 312 You must use IBASIC when writing your own programs However IBASIC is not explained in this manual If you wish to write your own IBASIC programs the following manuals are advised HP Instrument Basic User s Handbook Version 2 0 HP part number E2083 90005 e HP 8920B Programming Manual HP part number 08920 90222 See Data Collection and Retrieval on page 313 and Initializing a Disk on page 324 Chapter 6 Reference Dat
204. ing the power supply through the HP IB on the Test System 1 Connect the power supply s HP IB interface to the Test System s HP IB interface with an HP IB cable of appropriate length 2 Press the TESTS key The TESTS Main Menu screen will appear 3 From the SET UP TEST SET list select Cnfg External Devices to switch to the TESTS External Devices screen 4 Move the cursor to the Inst field and select it 5 Rotate the CURSOR CONTROL knob until an empty Calling Name field appears and select it 6 Using the list of characters in the Choices menu enter the words POWER SUPPLY in the Calling Name field Select Done when complete 7 Move the cursor to the Model field and select it optional 8 Using the DATA keypad and list of characters in the Choices menu enter the Model and press the ENTER key 9 Move the cursor to the Addr address field and select it 10 Using the DATA keypad enter 7XX X 1 through 30 for the HP IB address and press the ENTER key 1 an From the To Screen menu select More 12 From the Choices menu select IO CONFIG to switch to the I O CONFIGURE screen 13 Move the cursor to the Mode field and select it 14 From the Choices menu select Control 15 Press the TESTS key to switch to the TESTS Main Menu screen The power supply is ready to be controlled by the Test System when the current drain test is run 183 O pe o o e 3 is oO 77
205. ion Deviation Limiting on Narrow Analog Voice Channel Operation are Audio Start Frequency 300 3000 Hz Audio Step Frequency 0 2700 Hz Audio Stop Frequency 300 3000 Hz These parameters are described in the following paragraphs Audio Start Frequency 300 3000 Hz This parameter allows you to specify the start frequency to be used in measuring the cellular telephone transmitter s output in modulation deviation testing on a narrow analog voice channel The value is entered as a real number in Hz and in the range 300 through 3000 Example If you wish to start the measurement at 500 Hz enter 500 Audio Step Frequency 0 2700 Hz This parameter allows you to specify the step size to be used in measuring the cellular telephone transmitter s output in modulation deviation testing on a narrow analog voice channel The value is entered as a real number in Hz and in the range 0 through 2700 Example If you wish to step the measurement in 200 Hz steps enter 200 If you specify a step frequency of 0 the Test System performs the Operation at the specified start frequency then performs the Operation again and again indefinitely until you stop it manually This feature allows you to test the cellular telephone repetitively at a particular frequency Audio Stop Frequency 300 3000 Hz This parameter allows you to specify the stop frequency to be used in measuring the cellular telephone transmitter s output in modu
206. it Example If you determine that the transmitter current consumption specification should be 3 0 5 amps for RF output power levels 0 2 enter 2 5 as the lower limit and 3 5 as the upper limit 185 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 F me e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXA Current Drain 186 Current Drain Levels 3 7 This specification sets the pass fail limits for current consumption in transmitter tests at RF output power levels 3 7 The value is entered as a decimal number as upper and lower limits in amperes Pass fail limits specifications are determined using any applicable standard such as e Cellular Telephone Specification Current Consumption Transmit Example If you determine that the transmitter current consumption specification should be 2 5 amps 5 amps for RF output power levels 3 7 enter 2 0 as the lower limit and 3 0 as the upper limit Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXA Digital Signaling Tone Deviation and Code TXA Digital Signaling Tone Deviation and Code NOTE This is an NAMPS only Operation The channels must indicate the offset desired U Upper M Middle or L Lower This Operation measures the deviation and code of the cellular telephone s audio digital signaling tone DST The peak deviation of the digital signaling tone DST is measured and the DST sequence is decoded and reported in hexadecimal Since this Operation is run
207. ite Changing an Operation in this field updates the screen to display the relevant parameters for the selected Operation Chapter 2 Product Description Tests Subsystem Parameter Number Field This is the field at the middle left of the display see figure 13 on page 54 It identifies the parameter number Selecting this field and turning the CURSOR CONTROL knob scrolls through the parameters for the Operation Print A11 Field Selecting this field or pressing k3 prints the suite number and the Operation with its associated parameters and values The Operation numbers for a suite must be identified to distinguish between parameter values in suites that use an Operation multiple times Setup Field Selecting this field or pressing k5 switches the display to the TESTS Set Up screen Value Field This is the field at the middle left of the display just to the right of and slightly below the Parameter Number field see figure 13 on page 54 figure 14 on page 54 figure 15 on page 55 figure 16 on page 55 and figure 17 on page 56 This field is a variable type and changes according to the kind of value For instance if the value is a toggle the field is represented as a toggle if the value is a numeric quantity it is represented as such It can be any of the four following types dependent upon the specific parameter Choices see figure 14 on page 54 Toggle see figure 15 on page 55 Numerical Entry Float see
208. ive integers m m gt 3 and t lt 2 1 there is a binary BCH code with a block length n equal to 2 1 and n k lt mt parity check bits where k is the number of information bits The BCH code has a minimum distance of at least 2t 1 BPF See band pass filter call processing A system function that controls cellular call origination paging and messaging CANCEL key A push button on the Test Set s front panel that is used to pause stop the IBASIC program running in the Test Set card Familiar use See PCMCIA card Cellular Adapter A self contained module that attaches to the Test Set It typically tests a specific system or provides a special function to the Test Set The HP 83201 83203 83204 83205 and 83206 Cellular Adapter are examples channel A transmission path between two points Ordinarily the smallest subdivision of a particular transmission system by means of which a single type of communication service is provided Choices A field in the lower right of the Test Set s screen that offers several possible functions for selection Connect The Test Set state in which it has established a communications link for example a call to the mobile station under test Continue A Test Set function pressing the Continue key that causes the IBASIC program to restart if it has been paused stopped control channel A pair of channels forward and reverse used for the transmission of di
209. ively blocked In the Test Set audio high pass filters are used to reduce the level of low frequency signals during certain measurements HPF See high pass filter IBASIC See instrument BASIC Glossary IBASIC controller The controller built into the Test Set to run the IBASIC programs that perform automated tests of cellular communications equipment implicit handoff A type of handoff in which a Handoff Operation is not included In such case the handoff is implied and performed automatically by the Test Software Thus it does not allow for customized parameters and pass fail limits specifications but uses default values instead initialize To set a card or disk to a formatted ready to use condition This is done by either 1 selecting InitCard in the TESTS Save Delete Procedure screen or 2 pressing USER key k3 The default for PC cards is DOS format Interim Standard 136 IS 136 An EIA TIA Interim Standard that defines a TDMA cellular telephone system with a digital control channel a digital voice channel and a digital traffic channel Instrument BASIC IBASIC A computer language code or software used by the built in Test Set controller The IBASIC software is downloaded from the OTP Card into the Test Set s RAM This software is then used to control the Test Set during cellular telephone testing INSTRUMENT STATE keys A group of push buttons on the Test Set s front panel that are used to contr
210. l Parameters Used NOTE 244 The parameters used in the RXA RF Sensitivity Narrow Analog Voice Channel Operation are RF Level for SINAD Test on N AVC 30 to 120 dBm RF Lvl for SINAD Test on N AVC at Extreme V 30 to 120 dBm These parameters are described in the following paragraphs RF Level for SINAD Test on N AVC 30 to 120 dBm This parameter sets the RF signal level for measuring SINAD on narrow analog voice channels at the nominal power supply voltage The value is entered as a real number in dBm and in the range 30 through 120 Example If you wish to set the RF signal level to 90 dBm enter 90 RF Lvl for SINAD Test on N AVC at Extreme V 30 to 120 dBm This parameter allows you to specify the RF signal level for measuring SINAD on narrow voice channels at extreme power supply voltages The value is entered as a real number in dBm and in the range 30 through 120 The Test at Extreme Supply Voltages parameter must be set to Yes for this parameter to be active see GEN Modify External Power Supply Parameters on page 117 Example If you wish to set the RF signal level to 90 dBm enter 90 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions RXA RF Sensitivity Narrow Analog Voice Channel Pass Fail Limits Used One pass fail limits specification is used in the RXA RF Sensitivity Narrow Analog Voice Channel Operation It is SINAD for N AVC This specification is
211. l Power Supply Parameters Operation Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions GEN Modify Analog Control Channel Parameters GEN Modify Analog Control Channel Parameters Parameters Used This Operation is used to modify the cellular telephone s System Identification SID number It is recommended that you include this Operation at the beginning of a test suite to identify the SID and control channel number The channel number associated with this test will be the control channel number In the event that the first Operation is a Registration type this Operation is not required because the Registration Operation will identify the control channel number This Operation does not perform any tests make any measurements or compare any reading to limit specifications One parameter is used in the GEN Modify Analog Control Channel Parameters Operation It is System Identification Number 0 32767 This parameter is described in the following paragraphs System Identification Number 0 32767 This parameter allows you to specify the cellular telephone s System Identification SID number to be used in testing The SID is stored as a 15 bit binary number in the telephone s permanent security and identification memory The value is entered as an integer in the range 0 through 32767 Example If your cellular telephone s SID number is 11111 enter 11111 Pass Fail Limits Used No pass fail limits specifications are used in the GEN
212. l Supervisory Audio Tone Deviation Closure and Phase Jit ter 188 TXA Dual Tone Multiple Frequency Key Pad and Dual Tone Multiple Frequency Frequency Error 185 TXA FM Hum and Noise 191 TXA Frequency Error 193 TXA Modulation Deviation Limiting on Analog Voice Channel 196 TXA Modulation Deviation Limiting on Narrow Analog Voice Channel 199 TXA RF Power Output 202 TXA RF Power Output vs Channel Plotted 206 TXA Signaling Tone Frequency and Deviation 210 TXA Supervisory Audio Tone Fre quency Error and Deviation 213 TXA Wideband Data Deviation 216 TXD Adjacent Channel Power 245 TXD Modulation Accuracy 249 TXD Modulation Accuracy 10 Burst 259 TXD RF Power Output 261 TXD RF Power Output vs Channel Plotted 267 TXD Time Alignment 270 pass fail limits used CP Handoff from Analog Voice Chan nel to Narrow Analog Voice Chan nel 151 pause defined 351 Pausing Stopping or Continuing a Pro cedure 81 PC collecting data to 312 PC card defined 351 365 PCMCIA card defined 351 preprogrammed test procedures 77 removal 77 storing procedure changes 94 Test Software 77 PCMCIA card slot 36 peak max defined 351 Personal Computer Memory Card Inter national Association defined 351 phone number 120 port defined 352 POWER button 39 power class 118 120 power supply configuration 178 preprogrammed procedures listing 76 PRESET defined 352 print options pitch margins paper size
213. l of the signal applied to the Test Set might be too low e The frequency or other characteristic of the digital mode signal might be out of specification 305 Chapter 5 Problem Solving Error Messages 306 Printer address cannot be set to 10 The second Test Set serial port Serial B has an address of 10 The serial port having an address of 9 can be used for printing If you are using an HP IB printer you must enter all three digits of the printer address See Printing in chapter 6 on page 333 Sync word began on the 2nd bit of the symbol The synchronization word in the captured signal was not properly timed when it was transmitted by the cellular telephone e Verify that the cellular telephone is functioning properly The test will continue with this error present and results will be displayed However the performance might be degraded Sync word contained errors or was not found The synchronization word in the transmitted signal did not have the correct bits in it when it was measured by the Test Set e The level of the signal applied to the Test Set might be too low e Verify that the cellular telephone is functioning properly The test will continue with this error present and results will be displayed However performance might be degraded Sync word was too soon in the burst There was not enough data ahead of the synchronization word in the captured time record to reconstruct an entire TDMA tim
214. lation deviation testing on a narrow analog voice channel The value is entered as a real number in Hz and in the range 300 through 3000 Example If you wish to stop the measurement at 2500 Hz enter 2500 203 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 F me e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXA Modulation Deviation Limiting on Narrow Analog Voice Channel Pass Fail Limits Used 204 One pass fail limits specification is used in the TXA Modulation Deviation Limiting on Narrow Analog Voice Channel Operation It is Modulation Deviation Limiting On N AVC This specification is described in the following paragraphs Modulation Deviation Limiting On N AVC This specification sets the pass fail limits when the cellular telephone s transmitter circuits are tested for the capability to prevent the transmitter from producing peak deviation in excess of the system specification for narrow analog voice channels The value is entered as a decimal number as the upper limit only and in kHz Pass fail limits specifications are defined any applicable standard such as e EIA Standard Modulation Deviation Limiting Example If you determine that the instantaneous peak and steady state deviations of the transmitter should not exceed the rated system peak frequency deviation of 12 kHz enter 12 as the upper limit Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXA RF Power Output TXA RF Power Output Parameters
215. ld This is a five digit field located to the right of To when Range is selected in the Range List toggle field see figure 11 on page 50 It represents the stop channel for a range Five digits allow for a four digit channel number and an optional letter U M L for NAMPS or H for PCS Selecting this field allows you to enter the stop channel number U fe a c O o o o me e 3 Suite Number Field This is the small field to the left of the Range List toggle field see figure 11 on page 50 and figure 12 on page 51 It displays the number of the test suite Selecting this field and turning the CURSOR CONTROL knob scrolls the test suite information up or down in the display The default TESTS Set Up screen is shown in figure 11 on page 50 49 Chapter 2 Product Description Tests Subsystem TESTS Set Up Set Parameters Set Pass Fail Limits i TES CHANNELS OPERATIONS Alelete Dee a ee en ee A Print All sae iS Anaa e e ea s THA Freauency Error THA SAT Frea Error amp Devioti s iE THA RF Power Output Figure 11 TESTS Set Up Screen Showing Range of Channels The example shown in the default TESTS Set Up screen above illustrates a typical IS 136 TDMA test scenario Selecting Main Menu from this screen then selecting Run Test in that menu would perform the scenario as follows 334 CP Registration on ACCH 001 TXA Frequency Error TXA SAT Freq Error amp Deviation 400
216. ld and select it From the Choices field select ROM Move the cursor to the Select Procedure Filename field and select it From the Choices field select IB_UTIL Press the k1 Run Test key Select the location of the procedure that you wish to secure by pressing the k1 key for SRAM card or the k2 key for RAM RAM refers to the RAM disk memory in the Test Set Before selecting RAM for the first time you must initialize the RAM as a disk See Initialize RAM disk Volume 0 as follows in chapter 6 on page 342 8 9 Proceed with the displayed instructions If you wish to secure only one of the items such as pass fail limits specifications this is permissible When you are prompted to enter the pass number enter any sequence of numerals 0 through 9 using the DATA keypad Enter 9 digits or less Record this number for future use Chapter 3 Using the Software Using Common Processes To un secure a procedure NOTE To un secure a procedure you must know the pass number of that procedure Press the TESTS key The TESTS Main Menu screen will appear Move the cursor to the Select Procedure Location field and select it From the Choices field select ROM Move the cursor to the Select Procedure Filename field and select it From the Choices field select IB_UTIL Press the k1 Run Test key SoS Ae Oe eo a Select the location of the procedure that you wish to un secure by pressing the k1 key for SRAM card o
217. ld or function To 1 rotate the CURSOR CONTROL knob and move the highlighted cursor to the desired field or function then 2 press the knob Alternate method To press the USER key that has the same number as displayed next to the desired function sequence The method used in the Test Set to run one or more tests in a desired order A sequence is entered using the TESTS Set Up screen Glossary SHIFT key A push button on the Test Set s front panel that is used to select the blue labeled functions shown above some keys on the panel Pressing the SHIFT key and pressing a second key activates the second blue labeled function SID See system identification signaling tone ST A 10 kHz tone transmitted by a mobile station to confirm orders signal flash requests and signal release requests This signal can vary in duration signal plus noise and distortion A representation of signal plus noise and distortion divided by noise and distortion A measurement result that determines the quality of an audio tone in the presence of noise and distortion A 12 dB SINAD value is often used when measuring receiver sensitivity SINAD See signal plus noise and distortion slow associated control channel SACCH A logical control channel that is associated with a physical channel and used to maintain proper timing and power between transmitter receiver pairs communicating on that channel softkey Familiar use One of the
218. lect REC or ASCII RECs and enter the number of records using the DATA keypad then select Done instead of entering each character individually The display will be similar to 1 DATA C 700 ASCII REC 200 The default number of records used when no REC entry is made is 80 Items in the Options field may be separated by a comma or a space Chapter 6 Reference Data Collection and Retrieval If using a new disk see Initializing a Disk on page 324 If using anew SRAM card see Initializing an SRAM Card on page 330 The file types under LIF can be used by the Test Set s IBASIC controller and some HP workstations The DOS format is required if you wish to use the disk with a PC See table 10 for a summary of the various configurations J Table 10 Data Collection Configuration Summary o 2 Inst Calling Name Model Addr Description 7 Options 1 DATA Collection don t care 7xx To HP IB disk drive 1 DATA Collection don t care 1 To PC card Options File types of ASCII don t care 7xx LIF format or BDAT LIF format 3 or EXT DOS file typet or blank DOS or HP UX file REC xxxxx type number of records Number of records 1 DATA Collection don t care 9 Serial to external computer laptop 1 xx Last two digits of HP IB address 2 These options apply to disk drive and PC card data collection not when collecting data with Addr 9 Ww A DOS file name extension For exampl
219. lecting No causes the Test Software to ignore the measurement Test Phase Error Yes or No This parameter allows you to specify whether phase error will be measured during transmitter testing when the cellular telephone is on a digital traffic channel Two selections are provided in a toggle format Yes and No Selecting Yes causes the Test Software to measure the phase error Selecting No causes the Test Software to ignore the measurement Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXD Modulation Accuracy 10 Burst Test Magnitude Error Yes or No This parameter allows you to specify whether magnitude error will be measured during transmitter testing when the cellular telephone is on a digital traffic channel Two selections are provided in a toggle format Yes and No Selecting Yes causes the Test Software to measure the magnitude error Selecting No causes the Test Software to ignore the measurement Test Burst Amplitude Droop Yes or No This parameter allows you to specify whether burst amplitude droop will be measured during transmitter testing when the cellular telephone is on a digital traffic channel Two selections are provided in a toggle format Yes and No Selecting Yes causes the Test Software to measure the burst amplitude droop Selecting No causes the Test Software to ignore the measurement Test I Q Origin Offset Yes or No This parameter allows you to specify whether I Q origin offset will be measured durin
220. lecting this field displays the TESTS Set Up screen which functions as the operational control for the Test Software Specs Pass Fail Limits Field Selecting this field displays the TESTS Pass Fail Limits screen which displays all of the pass fail limits specifications in the library 45 Chapter 2 Product Description Tests Subsystem AMPS NAMPS DAMPS DCCH Revisioni B 0t 00 continue LOAD TEST PROCEDURE Select Procedure Location Hele Select Procedure Filename Library Progrant PARAMTR OCCHO14 Card Description To Screen Performs parametric tests including RF audio and G call processing Audio connections are reauired CUSTOMIZE TEST PROCEDURE SET UP TEST SET Machan Sea Parn Spec GRR Execution Cond Default Parameters External Devices DECODER Pass Fail Limits weg Printer Setup RADIO INT IBASIC Cntrl Save Delete Procedure Figure 10 Test Software TESTS Main Menu Screen 46 Chapter 2 Product Description Tests Subsystem TESTS Set Up Screen NOTE Access this screen by selecting the Setup Chan Seq Parm Spec field of the TESTS Main Menu screen This screen functions as the control facility for the Test Software Basically this screen combines the Order of Tests and Channel Information screens from the test environment of earlier software and adds the capability to loop on a group of tests or Operations plus some extra usability features This screen intr
221. lication or disclosure by the U S Government is subject to restrictions as RIGHTS LEGEND s set forth in subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause in DFARS 252 227 7013 Hewlett Packard Company 3000 Hanover Street Palo Alto CA 94304 U S A Rights for non DOD U S Government Departments and Agencies are as set forth in FAR 52 227 19 c 1 2 Organization Of This manual describes the set up and use of the HP 11807E Option 014 AMPS this Manual NAMPS DAMPS DCCH Mobile Test Software with the HP 8920B RF Communications Test Set The manual is arranged in chapters as follows Chapter 1 Getting Started Provides procedures for connecting the equipment for a typical application turning on the equipment loading the software connecting the equipment for testing and running a set of basic performance tests Chapter 2 Product Description Provides general and detailed descriptions of the Test Software a description of associated hardware considerations descriptions of all connectors keys and knobs and detailed descriptions of the Test Software display screens Chapter 3 Using the Test Software Provides descriptions of and procedures for using the features and functions of the Test Software in a typical application and procedures for customizing the Test Software for a particular application Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions Provides descriptions of all setup and test o
222. licit and implicit call processing see Testing Strategy on page 108 The parameters used in the CP Handoff from Digital Traffic Channel to Analog Voice Channel Operation are SAT Tone 5970 6000 or 6030 Hz Analog Voice Channel Power Level 0 7 These parameters are described in the following paragraphs SAT Tone 5970 6000 or 6030 Hz This parameter allows you to specify the frequency of the supervisory audio tone that will be used on all analog voice channels A supervisory audio tone SAT is an out of voice band audio tone that is used for cell site identification Three selections are provided in a one of many format 5970 6000 and 6030 Hz One of the three tones is added to the voice transmission of all calls within an individual cell The cellular telephone then detects the tone and modulates the transmitted voice channel carrier with a constant relative phase tone that is filtered or regenerated from the received tone to establish a closed loop between the cellular telephone and the cell site Transmission of the SAT by a cellular telephone is suspended during transmission of wideband data on the reverse voice channel RVC but is not suspended when the signaling tone ST is sent Example If you wish to use 6000 Hz as the SAT select 6000 165 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 F me e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions CP Handoff from Digital Traffic Channel to Analog Voice C
223. list of characters 10 11 12 If you selected Card insert an initialized SRAM card into the card slot on the Test Set s front panel Verify that the card or other medium is not write protected See Memory Cards in chapter 6 on page 327 Move the cursor to the Enter Description for New Procedure field and select it From the list of characters in the Choices field enter comments When the comments are complete move the cursor to Done and select it Move the cursor to the Procedure Library field and select Current the default The name of the Library is displayed in the TESTS Main Menu screen Move the cursor to the Proc field and select it Press the kl Save Proc key The procedure will be saved at the location that you selected Chapter 3 Using the Software Using Common Processes Loading a Procedure A procedure can be loaded from another storage medium into the Test Set s battery backed up memory To load a procedure Press the TESTS key The TESTS Main Menu screen will appear Move the cursor to the Select Procedure Location field and select it From the Choices field select the desired location Move the cursor to the Select Procedure Filename field and select it From the Choices field select the procedure that you wish to load De aM a Read the Description field to ensure that the procedure that you have chosen is the one that you wish to load Deleting a Procedure Procedure
224. llowing program transfers data from an SRAM card to a terminal emulator You may type the program lines into the IBASIC command line from a terminal emulator see Configuration for Terminal or PC Operation on page 321 Enter the data retrieval program as follows 1 Press the TESTS key The TESTS Main Menu screen will appear 2 From the SET UP TEST SET list select IBASIC IBASIC Cntr1 to switch to the TESTS IBASIC Controller screen 3 Move the cursor to the IBASIC command field the large field in the upper part of the display and select it 4 From the list of characters in the Choices field select and enter the following IBASIC program statements and commands In the next step make certain that any IBASIC program that you had been running is saved on disk or an SRAM card before deleting it from the Test Set memory 5 From the list of characters in the Choices field enter the following to delete the previous IBASIC program SCRATCH 331 Chapter 6 Reference Memory Cards NOTE 332 6 From the list of characters in the Choices field enter the following program 10 DIM A 120 Sets the string length to 120 20 ASSIGN File TO RES INTERNAL FORMAT ON Opens a path to the SRAM card file called RES for results 30 ON ERROR GOTO 80 Exits at end of file if an error is encountered 40 LOOP Extracts file contents 50 ENTER File A Transfers part of the file to the strin
225. llows you to specify the cellular telephone s System Identification SID number to be used in testing The SID is stored as a 15 bit binary number in the telephone permanent security and identification memory The value is entered as an integer in the range 0 through 32767 Example If your cellular telephone s SID number is 11111 enter 11111 Pass Fail Limits Used One pass fail limits specification is used in the MISC Battery Life on Analog Control Channel Standby Operation It is Standby Time This specification is described in the following paragraphs 285 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 F me e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions MISC Battery Life on Analog Control Channel Standby 286 Standby Time This specification sets the pass fail limits for the time that the cellular telephone will remain on in standby mode ready to receive calls before the battery charge is depleted The value is entered as a decimal number and in minutes Example If you determine that the standby time should be 240 minutes enter 240 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions MISC Battery Life on Digital Control Channel Standby MISC Battery Life on Digital Control Channel Standby Parameters Used This Operation measures the continuous time that the cellular telephone can be turned on and operated in standby mode ready to receive calls before the telephone battery charge is depleted In
226. llows you to specify the start frequency to be used in measuring the cellular telephone transmitter s output in modulation deviation testing on an analog voice channel The value is entered as a real number in Hz and in the range 300 through 3000 Example If you wish to start the measurement at 500 Hz enter 500 Audio Step Frequency 0 2700 Hz This parameter allows you to specify the step size to be used in measuring the cellular telephone transmitter s output in modulation deviation testing on an analog voice channel The value is entered as a real number in Hz and in the range 0 through 2700 Example If you wish to step the measurement in 200 Hz steps enter 200 If you specify a step frequency of 0 the Test System performs the Operation at the specified start frequency then performs the Operation again and again indefinitely until you stop it manually This feature allows you to test the cellular telephone repetitively at a particular frequency Audio Stop Frequency 300 3000 Hz This parameter allows you to specify the stop frequency to be used in measuring the cellular telephone transmitter s output in modulation deviation testing on an analog voice channel The value is entered as a real number in Hz and in the range 300 through 3000 Example If you wish to stop the measurement at 2500 Hz enter 2500 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXA Modulation Deviation Limiting on Analog Voice Channel Pa
227. location Volume 0 This is not changeable Volume 0 can be initialized using the RAM_MNG procedure stored on the internal ROM s IB_UTIL menu 341 Chapter 6 Reference RAM Disk NOTE 342 Initialize RAM disk Volume 0 as follows 1 Press the TESTS key The TESTS Main Menu screen will appear Move the cursor to the Select Procedure Location field and select it From the list in the Choices field select ROM 2 3 4 5 Move the cursor to the Select Procedure Filename field and select it From the list in the Choices field select RAM_MNG which is the RAM manager program Press the k1 Run Test key to begin program execution Read the precautions in the Test Set screen and then press the k1 Yes key to continue Press the k3 Int RAM key to select the Test Set s internal RAM as the location to be initialized In the following step 50 records should be sufficient for saving a procedure 9 Using the DATA keypad enter the number of records that you wish to initialize then press the ENTER key 10 Press the k1 Yes key to verify that the number of records was entered correctly The internal RAM MEMORY 0 0 will be initialized Volumes 1 2 and 3 must be initialized from the TESTS IBASIC Controller screen Chapter 6 Reference RAM Disk Initialize RAM disk Volumes 1 2 and 3 as follows 1 Press the TESTS key The TESTS Main Menu screen will appear 2 From the SET UP
228. lotted Pass Fail Limits Used One pass fail limits specification is used in the RXA RF Sensitivity vs Channel Plotted Operation It is SINAD for AVC This specification is described in the following paragraphs SINAD for AVC This specification sets the pass fail limits to be used when SINAD is measured at the audio output of the cellular telephone s receiver when the telephone is operating on an analog voice channel The value is entered as a decimal number as the lower limit only and in dB Pass fail limits specifications are determined using any applicable standard such as e EIA Standard RF Sensitivity Example If you determine that the usable sensitivity measurement results in 12 dB SINAD at the audio output of the receiver enter 12 as the lower limit 249 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 2 z pei e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXD Adjacent Channel Power TXD Adjacent Channel Power Parameters Used This Operation measures the relative adjacent first alternate and second alternate channel power at the output terminals of the cellular telephone s transmitter Only the relative not the absolute measurement is displayed No parameters are used in the TXD Adjacent Channel Power Operation Pass Fail Limits Used 250 The pass fail limits specifications used in the TXD Adjacent Channel Power Operation are Relative Adjacent Channel Power Relative Alternat
229. lows 1 Load and run HP AdvanceLink on your PC 2 Use the information in table 11 table 12 and table 13 to set the global terminal and remote configuration settings respectively Global Configuration Settings FIELD SETTING FIELD SETTING Keyboard USASCII Memory Size 32K Personality HP Plotter I F None Language English HP Mode Yes Terminal Mode Alphanumeric Video Type Select your display type Remote to enter PC serial port Forms Path Enter path if used Printer I F None Screen Size Enter the size 318 Chapter 6 Reference Data Collection and Retrieval D p h O O Ss 7 D Table 12 Terminal Configuration Settings FIELD SETTING FIELD SETTING Terminal ID 2392A Esc Xfer N YES Local Echo OFF ASCII 8 Bits YES CapsLock OFF FlidSeparator US Start Col 01 BlkTerminator RS Bell ON ReturnDef CR XmitFncetn A NO Copy Fields SPOW B NO Type Ahead NO InhEolWrp C NO ROW Size 80 Line Page D LINE Host Prmpt Char D1 InhHndShk G NO Horiz Scroll Incr 08 Inh DC2 H NO Large Key Table 13 Remote Configuration Settings FIELD SETTING Baud Rate 4800 Parity Data Bits None 8 Eng Ack No Asterisk OFF Chk Parity NO SR CH LO Recv Pace None Xmit Pace None CS CB Xmit NO 319 Chapter 6 Reference Data Collection and Retrieval 320
230. lt 10 percent enter 10 255 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 F me e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXD Modulation Accuracy 256 Magnitude Error This specification sets the pass fail limits for the rms value of the magnitude error components of the error vectors measured over one burst The magnitude error component is the difference in amplitude at the detection decision points between the measured signal after root Nyquist filtering I Q origin offset removal burst amplitude droop removal and carrier frequency error removal and the ideal signal generated from the same data pattern The rms value is obtained by taking the square root of the sum of the squares of the individual values at each detection decision point over the measured burst Magnitude error is an indicator of the quality of the amplitude component of the 7 4 DQPSK signal and is one of the components that contribute to the error vector magnitude The value is entered as a decimal number as an upper limit only and as a percentage Pass fail limits specifications are determined using any applicable standard such as e EIA TIA Standard Modulation Accuracy Example If you determine that the rms magnitude error should be lt 10 percent enter 10 Burst Amplitude Droop This specification sets the pass fail limits for the burst amplitude droop rate Burst amplitude droop rate is the average rate of decay of the magnit
231. m using a MIN consisting of all zeroes An all zeroes MIN is invalid according to Interim Standard 54 However some cellular telephones have an all zeroes MIN after manufacture or service Thus entering a negative number allows the Test System to page such cellular telephones Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions CP Page from Analog Control Channel to Narrow Analog Voice Channel DSAT Vector 0 6 This parameter allows you to specify the Digital Supervisory Audio Tone DSAT sequence to be used whenever the cellular telephone is operating on a narrow voice channel The value is entered as an integer in the range 0 through 6 The seven valid sequences are 0 2556CB 1 255B2B 2 256A9B 3 25AD4D 4 26AB2B 5 26B2AD 6 2969AB Example If you wish to use the first sequence shown above enter 0 Narrow Analog Voice Channel Power Level 0 7 This parameter allows you to specify the power level at which the cellular telephone will transmit when it is paged to a narrow analog voice channel The value is entered as an integer in the range 0 through 7 Example If you wish to use power level 7 enter 7 Pass Fail Limits Used No pass fail limits specifications are used in the CP Page from Analog Control Channel to Narrow Analog Voice Channel Operation 131 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 2 z pei e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions CP Page from Analog Control Channel to Digital Traff
232. mber parameter to a negative number results in the Test System using a MIN consisting of all zeroes An all zeroes MIN is invalid according to Interim Standard 54 However some cellular telephones have an all zeroes MIN after manufacture or service Thus entering a negative number allows the Test System to page such cellular telephones Digital Traffic Channel DVCC 1 255 This parameter allows you to specify the Digital Verification Color Code DVCC number to be transmitted to the cellular telephone on the digital traffic channel The value is entered as an integer in the range 1 through 255 Example If you wish to use a DVCC of 101 during testing enter 101 133 O pe o 2 e 3 is D 77 9 me e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions CP Page from Analog Control Channel to Digital Traffic Channel Digital Traffic Channel Slot 1 3 This parameter allows you to specify the timeslot assignment number to be transmitted to the cellular telephone The value is entered as an integer in the range 1 through 3 Example If you wish the cellular telephone to be active on timeslots 2 and 4 enter 2 Digital Traffic Channel Power Level 0 10 This parameter allows you to specify the power level at which the cellular telephone will transmit when it is paged to a digital traffic channel The value is entered as an integer in the range 0 through 10 Example If you wish to use power level 10
233. mit Response Roll gt 2 5 kHz This specification sets the upper Pass Fail Limit of the transmitter audio frequency response roll off that is acceptable when the audio input is greater than 2 5 kHz The value is entered as a decimal number in dB dB octave Pass fail limits specifications are determined using any applicable standard such as e EIA TIA Standard Transmit Audio Response Example If an upper audio frequency roll off of 6 dB octave is permissible at audio input frequencies greater than 2 5 kHz enter 6 177 O pe o 2 e 3 is D 77 9 me e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXA Compressor Response TXA Compressor Response Background Parameters Used 178 This Operation measures the compressor zero reference deviation and operating range For every 2 dB change in input level there should be a nominal output level change of 1 dB Specifically in this Operation the Test System sets the deviation to 2 9 kHz 1 5 kHz for narrow analog and takes a reference with the rms detector The voltage used to achieve a 2 9 kHz deviation is displayed as TXA cmp volt for 2 9 kHz dev Compressor response is expressed in kHz for the zero reference deviation and in dB of tracking error over the indicated operating range Also this Operation uses the C Message audio filter or the CCITT audio filter if it is installed in the Test System A compressor is used in the
234. mit when it is paged to a narrow analog voice channel The value is entered as an integer in the range 0 through 7 Example If you wish to use power level 7 enter 7 Pass Fail Limits Used 146 No pass fail limits specifications are used in the CP Origination from Analog Control Channel to Narrow Analog Voice Channel Operation Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions CP Origination from Analog Control Channel to Digital Traffic Channel CP Origination from Analog Control Channel to Digital Traffic Channel This Operation simulates a call from the cellular telephone to the base station by putting the cellular telephone in service and originating a call from the handset Specifically in this Operation the Test System does the following 1 Simulates a control channel 2 Prompts you to dial any telephone number as many as 10 digits after the cellular telephone has service Service is indicated by the cellular telephone NO SERVICE indicator extinguishing or the SERVICE indicator lighting 3 Performs 3 of 5 majority voting on the Reverse Control Message 4 Performs Bose Chaudhuri Hocquenghem BCH error detection and correction of the Reverse Control Message Wideband data 5 Sends an Initial Traffic Channel Designation order to the cellular telephone directing it to tune to the traffic channel specified in the Channe1s field of the TESTS Set Up screen 6 Checks the digital verification color code DVCC on the initial
235. mized test parameters may be saved only as parts of procedures For information on saving customized test parameters see Using Procedures on page 89 To verify and edit parameters see Verifying and Editing Parameters on page 94 Chapter 3 Using the Software Customizing Testing Specifying Pass Fail Limits Pass fail limits specifications define the values with which a measurement result is compared to determine if the cellular telephone meets its specified standards Typical specifications for each limit are derived from applicable standards and the Test Software comes with appropriate default settings However some pass fail limits specifications will require modification after examination of specific test requirements Review the defaults and change those only as necessary to accomplish your testing regimen For detailed information on the pass fail limits specifications in any specific Test Software Operation see the Pass Fail Limits Used section of the description of that Operation in chapter 4 Operation Descriptions on page 105 NOTE Customized pass fail limits specifications may be saved only as parts of procedures For information on saving customized pass fail limits specifications see Using Procedures on page 89 To verify and edit pass fail limits specifications see Verifying and Editing Pass Fail Limits Specifications on page 96 Cc n Ke gt D wn fo o oO 103 Cha
236. n Conditions Test execution conditions define where and when test results output occurs In some situations you may wish to change the way the Test Software operates when a test result is obtained Test execution conditions allow you to do this and are accessed from the TESTS Main Menu screen Test execution conditions are not retained after a power down and power up cycle 1 Press the TESTS key The TESTS Main Menu will appear 2 Move the cursor to the Exec Execution Cond fieldinthe SET UP TEST SET list and select it to switch to the TESTS Execution Conditions screen 3 Change the settings in the screen as required The fields in the TESTS Execution Conditions screen in which you may change conditions are described in the following paragraphs Output Results To Field You may select either Crt or Printer The default is crt You may specify where test results are to be placed If you select Crt results will be displayed on the Test Set s screen If you select Printer test results will be sent to the display and to a printer You must connect and configure a printer if you select Printer See Printing on page 86 and see Printing in chapter 6 on page 333 Output Results For Field You may select either A11 or Failures The default is A11 You may specify if you wish to display or print only the failed results This will be useful if you generally do not print test results and wish to ensure that failure results a
237. n the following paragraphs Explicit and Implicit Call Processing 108 In call processing Operations such as handoffs pages and releases a transfer type function is included This function is called a handoff and is a transfer from one channel to another A handoff may be explicitly or implicitly specified in a test procedure The difference between explicit and implicit call processing is explained using the following description of a handoff from an analog channel to a digital channel When there is a change from an analog to a digital channel and the change is accomplished using a Handoff Operation that Operation states the handoff explicitly and includes parameters that allow you to set the parameters that control the handoff such as the time slot to be used on the digital traffic channel For purposes of description it is called an explicit handoff It offers full control over the Operation parameters Example Assume that for channel 100 in a test suite the Operations are as follows TXA Modulation Deviation Limiting on Analog Voice Channel CP Handoff Analog Voice Channel to Digital Traffic Channel TXD RF Power Output In these three Operations the second Operation performs explicitly a handoff from the first on an analog channel to the third on a digital channel Because the Handoff Operation is used the parameters contained in that Operation are adjustable and may be set to desired values However
238. ne transmitter from producing deviations in excess of the system specification when the telephone is operating on a narrow analog voice channel The Operation measures the Peak and the Peak values of the instantaneous INST and steady state SS modulation and indicates whether the modulation is symmetrical Symmetry is based upon the difference between positive and negative swings of the carrier at any level of modulation Modulation limiting is expressed in kHz modulation symmetry is expressed in a percent difference between positive and negative swings of the carrier Specifically in this Operation the Test System does the following 1 Sets the audio generator s frequency to 1 kHz 2 Sets the audio generator s level to produce an 8 kHz deviation by the cellular telephone 3 Increases the audio generator s level by 20 dB 4 Repeats Steps 2 and 3 three times and holds and reports the maximum peak frequency deviation 5 Steps the audio generator s frequency from a start frequency to a stop frequency as specified in the Audio Start Frequency and Audio Stop Frequency parameters in increments specified in the Audio Step Frequency parameter while the audio generator level is maintained at the 20 dB overdrive Peak frequency deviation is measured at each step Parameters Used NOTE Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXA Modulation Deviation Limiting on Narrow Analog Voice Channel The parameters used in the TXA Modulat
239. nes should not vary in frequency more than 1 Hz enter 1 as the lower limit and 1 as the upper limit Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXA Wideband Data Deviation TXA Wideband Data Deviation This Operation measures the Peak and Peak frequency deviation of the cellular telephone s output data burst The Operation provides three possible methods of testing These are described in the following paragraphs In the first method the Test System measures the Peak and Peak frequency deviation of the data in the entire reverse voice channel RVC burst to ensure that it is within the specified limits The Test System tests the entire burst by sending the FVC message 5 times while the Peak hold detector is on and another 5 times while the Peak hold detector is on This method is selected by setting the Data Portion Tested parameter to Trans In the second method the Test System first performs the test on the steady state portion of the RVC data signal then on the entire signal as described in the first method The Test System performs the steady state portion of the test by measuring the RVC data signal between 20 milliseconds and 50 milliseconds following the beginning of the data burst The Test System compares the Peak and Peak results with the values in the Steady State Deviation pass fail limits specification It then compares the results of the transient portion of the test with the values in the Transient Dat
240. never the cellular telephone is operating on a narrow voice channel The value is entered as an integer in the range 0 through 6 The seven valid sequences are 0 2556CB 1 255B2B 2 256A9B 3 25AD4D 4 26AB2B 5 26B2AD 6 2969AB Example If you wish to use the first sequence shown above enter 0 Narrow Analog Voice Channel Power Level 0 7 This parameter allows you to specify the power level at which the cellular telephone will transmit when it is operated on a narrow analog voice channel The value is entered as an integer in the range 0 through 7 Example If you wish to use power level 7 enter 7 Pass Fail Limits Used 156 No pass fail limits specifications are used in the CP Handoff from Analog Voice Channel to Narrow Analog Voice Channel Operation Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions CP Handoff from Analog Voice Channel to Digital Traffic Channel CP Handoff from Analog Voice Channel to Digital Traffic Channel NOTE Parameters Used This Operation performs an explicit handoff from an analog voice channel Operation on a telephone channel to a digital traffic channel Operation on the same or another telephone channel For information on explicit and implicit call processing see Testing Strategy on page 108 The parameters used in the CP Handoff from Analog Voice Channel to Digital Traffic Channel Operation are Digital Traffic Channel DVCC 1 255 Digital Traffic Channel Slot 1 3
241. ng Choices 59 Chapter 2 Product Description Tests Subsystem m TESTS Default Porometers Defaults are applied to all tests unless changed in the TESTS Specific Porameters screen Power Output Description alue Units Test Qutput Power Level 0 He Test Output Power Level 1 Test Qutput Power Level 2 est Qutput Power Level 3 6 Test Output Power Level 7 Figure 20 TESTS Default Parameters Screen Showing Toggle m TESTS Default Porometers Defaults ore applied to all tests unless changed in the TESTS Specific Porameters screen THA Audio Freauenc Ponse Description alue Units TX Audio Start Freauency Hz TH Audio Step Freauency 500 0000 Hz Th Audio Stop Freauency 3000 0000 Hz Figure 21 TESTS Default Parameters Screen Showing Numerical Entry 60 Chapter 2 Product Description Tests Subsystem m TESTS Default Parameters Defaults are applied to all tests unless changed in the TESTS Specific Parameters screen CP Registration on ACCH Description alue Units System Identification SID number Figure 22 TESTS Default Parameters Screen Showing Integer U fe Qa c O o o o me e 3 61 Chapter 2 Product Description Tests Subsystem TESTS Set Up Pass Fail Limits Screen 62 Access this screen by selecting the Specs Pass Fail Limits field in the TESTS Main Menu screen
242. ng Prompt causes the Test System to prompt you to enter the telephone number Phone Number 0 Use from Reg Orig 2 to 9999999999 This parameter allows you to specify the telephone number of the cellular telephone being tested It is ordinarily entered as a 10 digit real number in the range 0 through 9999999999 but it is sometimes advantageous to use a negative number Setting the phone number parameter to a negative number results in the Test System using a MIN consisting of all zeroes An all zeroes MIN is invalid according to Interim Standard 54 However some cellular telephones have an all zeroes MIN after manufacture or service Thus entering a negative number allows the Test System to page such cellular telephones Digital Traffic Channel DVCC 1 255 This parameter allows you to specify the Digital Verification Color Code DVCC number to be transmitted to the cellular telephone on the digital traffic channel The value is entered as an integer in the range 1 through 255 Example If you wish to use a DVCC of 101 during testing enter 101 Digital Traffic Channel Slot 1 3 This parameter allows you to specify the timeslot assignment number to be transmitted to the cellular telephone The value is entered as an integer in the range 1 through 3 Example If you wish the cellular telephone to be active on timeslots 2 and 4 enter 2 141 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 F me e Ss 77
243. ng area of screen where step is performed see figure 5 B Use cursor control knob on front panel to position cursor and make selections Position Select fi v rT Ves K Position f OS Ni LOAD TEST PROCEDURE Select Procedure Location Select 4 Select Procedure Filename a A Position the cursor at Card and select it Position the cursor at Select Procedure Filename and select it Position r Te Koo Select K Position i AN a LOAD TEST PROCEDURE select Procedure Location Select Card x Select Procedure Filename Q Position the cursor at Choices and select STARTED Position the cursor at Run Test and select it The software is now loading Position S CP_ACCH N Nae CP_DCCH CP_NAMP FUNCTNL Select BPARAMTR STARTED amp Position I 1Run Test ey TETEE Na 2 ee Follow screen prompts Select to complete tests At the end of the tests the x Q screen should appear as shown in figure 7 N Figure 6 Selecting the Test 26 Chapter 1 Getting Started Selecting and Running the Initial Tests IBASIC Reset TESTS IBASIC Controller Continue Performs several tests using different suite Q setups for illustration purposes oO Ke SASEN Channel 334 RX 880 02 MHz TX 835 02 MHz REM CP Registration on DCCH Test Not Complete l D sasdsg Chammnel 1 RX 870 03 MHz T 825 03 MHz Choice
244. nnel Power Level 0 7 These parameters are described in the following paragraphs 143 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 F me e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions CP Origination from Analog Control Channel to Analog Voice Channel SAT Tone 5970 6000 or 6030 Hz This parameter allows you to specify the frequency of the supervisory audio tone that will be used on all analog voice channels A supervisory audio tone SAT is an out of voice band audio tone that is used for cell site identification Three selections are provided in a one of many format 5970 6000 and 6030 Hz One of the three tones is added to the voice transmission of all calls within an individual cell The cellular telephone then detects the tone and modulates the transmitted voice channel carrier with a constant relative phase tone that is filtered or regenerated from the received tone to establish a closed loop between the cellular telephone and the cell site Transmission of the SAT by a cellular telephone is suspended during transmission of wideband data on the reverse voice channel RVC but is not suspended when the signaling tone ST is sent Example If you wish to use 6000 Hz as the SAT select 6000 Analog Voice Channel Power Level 0 7 This parameter allows you to specify the power level at which the cellular telephone will transmit when it is paged to an analog voice channel The value is entered as an integer
245. o o e 3 is D 77 2 z pei e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXA RF Power Output vs Channel Plotted NOTE NOTE 212 Output Power at Levels 0 through 7 These specifications set the pass fail limits for output power levels 0 through 7 as measured in analog and or digital tests at the transmitter output terminal Each power level limit is separate and may be set as required The values are entered as decimal numbers in dBW Units for power measurement are set by the Units for Power Measurement parameter see GEN Modify Execution Parameters on page 114 Units for pass fail limits specifications are always dBW regardless of the units for power measurement If units for power measurement are other than dBW the Test Software will convert the pass fail limits specifications to the appropriate units automatically Pass fail limits specifications are determined using any applicable standard such as e EIA TIA Standard Transmitter Output Power Values for power levels in the standard are for effective radiated power ERP and not as measured directly from the cellular telephone Power levels will be higher when measured directly from the cellular telephone Example If you determine that the output power levels should be maintained within the range of 2 dB and 4 dB of the nominal values over a specified temperature range enter the values as shown in table 7 for the lower limit and the
246. o Yes see GEN Modify External Power Supply Parameters on page 117 so that output power measurements are made at high supply voltage and low supply voltage this Operation requires a properly configured programmable power supply see TXA Current Drain on page 182 The parameters used in the RXA RF Sensitivity vs Channel Plotted Operation are Start Channel Number 1 799 991 1023 Step Channel Number 1 1023 Stop Channel Number 1 799 991 1023 RF Level for SINAD Test 30 to 120 dBm RF Lvl for SINAD at Extreme Supply Volt 30 to 120 dBm These parameters are described in the following paragraphs Start Channel Number 1 799 991 1023 This parameter allows you to specify the start channel to be used in constructing a plot of the cellular telephone receiver sensitivity in relation to channel numbers in RF sensitivity testing The value is entered as an integer in the ranges through 799 and 991 through 1023 Example If you wish to start the plot at channel 100 enter 100 Step Channel Number 1 1023 This parameter allows you to specify the step size to be used in constructing a plot of the cellular telephone receiver sensitivity in relation to channel numbers in RF sensitivity testing The value is entered as an integer in the range 1 through 1023 Example If you wish to step the plot in 100 channel steps enter 100 247 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 2 z pei e Ss 77
247. oduces the new term test suite sometimes suite to the test environ ment A test suite is a set of Operations performed over a range or list of channels Note that horizontal dashed lines separate test suites in the display The following paragraphs describe the various fields of this screen Two versions of the screen are shown in figure 11 on page 50 and figure 12 on page 51 Help Field Selecting this field or pressing k4 displays the help screen that contains assistance information in the TESTS Set Up screen Insert and Delete Fields Selecting the Insert field or pressing k1 performs an insert function when the cursor is located in the operations field in the channel field in lists or in any of the number fields For instance if you wish to set up a new test suite moving the cursor to the Suite Number field and performing an insert function adds a test suite The suite added is a duplicate of the one currently in the Suite Number field If the cursor is located in the List Number field performing an insert function adds a duplicate channel in the list If the cursor is located in the Operation Number field performing an insert function adds a duplicate of the Operation currently in the active field Selecting the Delete field or pressing k2 performs the opposite action to that of the Insert key List Number Field This is the small field to the left of the first list number in the Range List field see f
248. of this screen see figure 18 on page 59 figure 19 on page 59 figure 20 on page 60 figure 21 on page 60 and figure 22 on page 61 Help Field Selecting this field or pressing k4 displays the help screen that contains assistance information in the TESTS Default Parameters screen U fe Qa c O o o o me e 3 Operation Field This is the field near the top of the display see figure 18 on page 59 It identifies the Operation for which the parameter values can be set Selecting this field and turning the CURSOR CONTROL knob scrolls through a menu that contains all of the Operations in the library Selecting an Operation in the menu updates the screen to display the relevant parameters for that Operation Parameter Number Field This is the small field at the left side near the middle of the display see figure 18 on page 59 It identifies the parameter number Selecting this field and turning the CURSOR CONTROL knob scrolls through the parameters for the Operation Print Tst Field Selecting this field or pressing k3 prints all of the default parameters for the selected Operation 57 Chapter 2 Product Description Tests Subsystem NOTE 58 Reset All Field Selecting this field or pressing k2 applies the parameter value in the currently selected Operation to all occurrences of the parameter in any Operation in the TESTS Set Up screen For instance if Page is selected
249. ol various hardware functions IS 136 See Interim Standard 136 key Any of the various push buttons located on the Test Set s front panel keypad A group of push buttons on a cellular telephone that are used for dialing numbers and programming the telephone keys See DATA keys DATA FUNCTIONS keys INSTRUMENT STATE keys SCREEN CONTROL keys USER keys SHIFT key and CANCEL key knob See CURSOR CONTROL knob library A collection of the names of all of the operations parameters pass fail limits and tests in the Test Software A library is stored as a file on a memory card or other mass storage device with its associated procedure files The Test Software uses the library program code file and a procedure to run an application program location A device from which to retrieve or to which to save store a particular testing procedure for instance a disk a card RAM or a PC low pass filter LPF A filter that increasingly rejects signal frequency components that increase toward and then pass a certain cutoff frequency at which point higher frequencies are effectively blocked In the Test Set audio low pass filters are used to reduce the level of high frequency signals during certain measurements LPF See low pass filter 355 Aiesso 5 356 Glossary Main Menu The Test Set Main Menu screen that is used to customize and execute run automated testing procedures It is accessed by 1
250. on Tested Steady Trans or Both This parameter allows you to specify the mode for execution of the Operation Three selections are provided in a one of many format These are Steady causes the Test System to perform the test on only the steady state portion of the data burst from the cellular telephone Trans causes the Test System to perform the test on only the transient portion of the data burst from the cellular telephone Both causes the Test System to perform the test on both the steady state and transient portions of the data burst from the cellular telephone Example If you wish to test only the transient portion of the data burst select Transient Pass Fail Limits Used The pass fail limits specifications used in the TXA Wideband Data Deviation Operation are Steady State Data Deviation Transient Data Deviation These specifications are described in the following paragraphs Steady State Data Deviation This specification sets the pass fail limits for the Steady State Data deviation The values are entered as decimal numbers as upper and lower limits and in kHz Pass fail limits specifications are determined using any applicable standard such as e EIA Standard Wideband Data Example If you determine that the frequency deviation should be 8 kHz with a 10 percent tolerance enter 7 2 as the lower limit and 8 8 as the upper limit 221 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 F me e Ss
251. one frequency should be 10 kHz 1 Hz enter 9999 as the lower limit and 10001 as the upper limit 215 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 2 z pei e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXA Supervisory Audio Tone Frequency Error and Deviation TXA Supervisory Audio Tone Frequency Error and Deviation Background NOTE Parameters Used 216 This Operation measures the frequency error and deviation of the cellular telephone s response to the three supervisory audio tones SATs The rms detector is used for measuring SAT deviation The SAT deviation is then converted to a peak reading Three frequencies 5970 6000 and 6030 Hz are used as supervisory audio tones SAT for signaling One of the three tones is added to the wide channel voice transmission by a cell site The cellular telephone then detects the tone and modulates the transmitted voice channel carrier with a constant relative phase tone that is regenerated from the received tone to establish a closed loop between the cellular telephone and the cell site Transmission of the SAT is suspended during transmission of wideband data on the reverse voice channel RVC but is not suspended when the signaling tone ST is sent This Operation uses the 6 kHz Bandpass Filter Test Set Option 014014 if it is installed If the filter is not included in the Test Set and the cellular telephone has an open microphone the readings might be affected by
252. optimized for your application e Data collection files e Channel information e User defined keys Three types of PC cards are available e Static Random Access Memory SRAM e SRAM cards have read and write capability You may program and read SRAM cards using the Test Set e One Time Programmable OTP e Once programmed with a suitable card programmer OTP cards have read only capability You may read OTP cards using the Test Set but you cannot program cards using the Test Set e Flash Memory e Flash memory cards have read and write capability You may read flash memory cards using the Test Set However these cards can be written to or programmed using only a suitable card reader programmer Flash memory cards cannot be written to or programmed with a Test Set 327 Chapter 6 Reference Memory Cards NOTE SRAM Cards Hewlett Packard software code and procedure and library files are typically supplied on either OTP cards or flash cards Flash cards may be distinguished from OTP cards by a small write protect WP switch in the end of the flash cards SRAM cards also have a write protect or safe switch in the end of the card and also use a battery Software and procedure library files stored on a flash card cannot be overwritten by a Test Set regardless of the position of the write protect WP switch The memory card may be removed after the program is loaded into the Test Set s memory The program will remain in memory aft
253. ou press this key you will be prompted to verify the command by pressing Yes Done allows you to exit a test or signal that a task is complete The program will continue if there is a next test in the sequence or if there are additional program steps in the test being run Help allows you to secure information on how to use the current TEST screen Init Card allows you to initialize an SRAM card Before you press this key verify that the card is inserted correctly that it is not write protected and that there are not programs stored on the card that you wish to save Insrt Stp allows you to enter items into a test sequence When you press this key the test in the displayed sequence with the Step highlighted inverse video will be copied into a new sequence location immediately after the highlighted one The tests that follow in the sequence will be scrolled down by one step This key does nothing if there are no items in the sequence Select a test before using this key to insert another Main Menu allows you to return to the main TESTS screen The same result is achieved by pressing the TESTS key Page Up Page Down allows you to display items quickly in the list when some of the items will not fit on the screen Run allows you to start an IBASIC program that has been loaded into the Test Set s memory Chapter 6 Reference USER Keys Run Test allows you to load and run the program that has been entered into the TESTS screen
254. ower levels 3 through 6 Selecting No causes the Test System to skip the test at power levels 3 through 6 Test Output Power Level 7 Yes or No This parameter allows you to specify whether cellular telephone transmitter output power testing will be performed at power level 7 Two selections are provided in a toggle format Yes and No Selecting Yes causes the Test System to perform the test at power level 7 Selecting No causes the Test System to skip the test at power level 7 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXA RF Power Output Pass Fail Limits Used NOTE NOTE The pass fail limits specifications used in the TXA RF Power Output Operation are Output Power at Level 0 Output Power at Level 1 Output Power at Level 2 Output Power at Level 3 Output Power at Level 4 Output Power at Level 5 Output Power at Level 6 Output Power at Level 7 These specifications are described in the following paragraphs Output Power at Levels 0 through 7 These specifications set the pass fail limits for output power levels 0 through 7 as measured in analog and or digital tests at the transmitter s output terminal Each power level limit is separate and may be set as required The values are entered as decimal numbers in dBW Units for power measurement are set by the Units for Power Measurement parameter see GEN Modify Execution Parameters on page 114 Units for pass fail limits specifications are always dBW regardless of the uni
255. pecified increments Specifically in this Operation the Test System does the following 1 Applies a 50 dBm RF signal to the cellular telephone receiver s antenna 2 Modulates the 50 dBm RF signal to deviate to 2 9 kHz at a 1 kHz rate with a supervisory audio tone SAT present and makes a reference Narrow analog operation uses 1 5 kHz deviation and DSAT 3 Sweeps the frequency rate over the desired range and measures the response 4 Applies a 2 1 correction to the measured results if the compandor is set to Always On Receiver audio frequency response is expressed in dB error from a 6 dB octave curve The parameters used in the RXA Audio Frequency Response Operation are RX Audio Start Frequency 300 3000 Hz RX Audio Step Frequency 0 2700 Hz RX Audio Stop Frequency 300 3000 Hz Compandor State Always On Controllable These parameters are described in the following paragraphs 225 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 F me e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions RXA Audio Frequency Response NOTE 226 RX Audio Start Frequency 300 3000 Hz This parameter allows you to specify the start frequency to be used in varying the input signal frequency in cellular telephone s audio frequency response testing The value is entered as a real number in Hz and in the range 300 3000 Example If you wish to vary the modulation frequency starting at a frequency of 1200 Hz enter 1
256. perations that can be performed on cellular telephones using the Test Software Chapter 5 Problem Solving Provides information on solving common problems Chapter 6 Reference Provides descriptions and procedures for performing the less common or more sophisticated functions of the Test Software Glossary Provides definitions for unusual and special terms used in the Test Software and in this manual Index Provides a listing of topics and the location of information about these topics in this manual Conventions Special presentations of text in this manual reflect the appearance of the referenced item Examples are TESTS A key on the Test Set front panel Procedure Characters shown on the Test Set display k1 Run Test A USER key in the key column next to the Test Set display The words Run Test are shown on the Test Set display 0 000000 A field on the Test Set display in which entries may be made Titles of documentation and references to other sections of this user s guide are printed in italics The term Test Set refers to the HP 8920B RF Communications Test Set The term Test System refers to the HP 8920B RF Communications Test Set the HP 83206 TDMA Cellular Adapter the HP 11807E Option 014 AMPS NAMPS DAMPS DCCH Mobile Test Software and any ancillary equipment required for testing The term Test Software refers to the HP 11807E Option 014 AMPS NAMPS DAMPS DCCH Mobile Test Software
257. phs SAT Tone 5970 6000 or 6030 Hz This parameter allows you to specify the frequency of the supervisory audio tone that will be used on all analog voice channels A supervisory audio tone SAT is an out of voice band audio tone that is used for cell site identification Three selections are provided in a one of many format 5970 6000 and 6030 Hz One of the three tones is added to the voice transmission of all calls within an individual cell The cellular telephone then detects the tone and modulates the transmitted voice channel carrier with a constant relative phase tone that is filtered or regenerated from the received tone to establish a closed loop between the cellular telephone and the cell site Transmission of the SAT by a cellular telephone is suspended during transmission of wideband data on the reverse voice channel RVC but is not suspended when the signaling tone ST is sent Example If you wish to use 6000 Hz as the SAT select 6000 159 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 F me e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions CP Handoff from Narrow Analog Voice Channel to Analog Voice Channel Analog Voice Channel Power Level 0 7 This parameter allows you to specify the power level at which the cellular telephone will transmit when it is operated on an analog voice channel The value is entered as an integer in the range 0 through 7 Example If you wish to use power level 7 en
258. port to be used for the reverse channel Use of the DUPLEX OUT and ANT IN ports allows the RF link between the Test System and the cellular telephone to be established via antennas instead of coaxial cable In either case the Cable Loss parameter should be used to compensate for the path loss CAUTION NOTE Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions GEN Modify Execution Parameters For typical bench testing you will use the RF In Out connector For over the air testing you might wish to use the DUPLEX OUT and ANT IN ports If the ANT IN connector is used do not exceed the maximum input power of 200 milliwatts If the RF link is accomplished via antennas it should be done inside a shielded environment to avoid interference with local cellular telephone service Cable Loss 0 120 dB This parameter allows you to specify the amount of loss for any external cables or pads attenuators connected to the Test System It may be used also to compensate for path loss when the RF link between the cellular telephone and the Test System is accomplished via antennas This compensation is provided in power measurements and in signal generator level settings in the Test System The value is entered as a real number in dB in the range 0 through 120 Example If the cable loss between the cellular telephone antenna and the Test System RF IN OUT is 4 0 dB enter 4 0 115 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 F me e Ss 77
259. pter 3 Using the Software Customizing Testing 104 Operation Descriptions 105 O pe o o e 3 iw D 77 F me e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions Introduction Introduction 106 This chapter presents a description of each Operation available in the Test Software Some of these Operations accomplish preliminary or set up processes that are necessary for testing the others perform actual tests The first few capital letters in the title of each Operation indicate the class of the Operation The classes are GEN General CP Call Processing TXA Transmitter Analog RXA Receiver Analog TXD Transmitter Digital RXD Receiver Digital MISC Miscellaneous Each Operation is described in relatively complete detail and each includes any appropriate parameter descriptions and pass fail limits specifications Parameters Parameters are values that you enter to optimize the test environment or conditions for using the Test Software Many of the parameters are determined by examining your test needs Other parameters are determined by performing measurements to calibrate items in your system Default values are set into the software Some of these values are derived from standard methods of testing and some are derived from applicable cellular telephone test standards Parameters remain in battery backed up memory until overwritten when you select a different procedure to
260. r 90 241 O pe o 2 e s oO o 2 Z me fe 7 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions RXA RF Sensitivity Pass Fail Limits Used 242 One pass fail limits specification is used in the RXA RF Sensitivity Operation It is SINAD for AVC This specification is described in the following paragraphs SINAD for AVC This specification sets the pass fail limits to be used when SINAD is measured at the audio output of the cellular telephone receiver when the telephone is operating on an analog voice channel The value is entered as a decimal number as the lower limit only and in dB Pass fail limits specifications are determined using any applicable standard such as e EIA Standard RF Sensitivity Example If you determine that the usable sensitivity measurement results in 12 dB SINAD at the audio output of the receiver enter 12 as the lower limit Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions RXA RF Sensitivity Narrow Analog Voice Channel RXA RF Sensitivity Narrow Analog Voice Channel NOTE NOTE NOTE Audio connections from the cellular telephone to the Test System are required for this Operation This is an NAMPS only Operation The channels must indicate the offset desired U Upper M Middle or L Lower This Operation sets and measures the cellular telephone receiver s RF sensitivity or SINAD when the telephone is operating on a narrow analog voice channel N AVC
261. r the k2 key for RAM p Enter the name of the procedure that you wish to un secure 9 Ifthe procedure has any item secured you will be prompted for the pass number 10 Proceed with the displayed instructions Select the items that you wish to un secure 11 When you are prompted enter the pass number using the DATA keypad Press the ENTER key when the entry is complete Cc n Ke gt D wn fo o oO 93 Chapter 3 Using the Software Using Common Processes Verifying and Editing Parameters NOTE NOTE 94 Parameters are values that you enter to optimize your use of the Test Software Many of the parameters are determined by examining your testing needs Default values are included in the Test Software Some of these values have been derived from standard methods of measurement and some are derived from industry standard requirements Each Operation includes applicable parameters It is not necessarily required that you change these parameters when you select an Operation or change the Operations in your procedure However it might be desirable to change one or more to reflect the desired testing regimen A list of the parameters used is included in each of the Operation descriptions in chapter 4 Operation Descriptions on page 105 You must first select and load a Procedure to access the TESTS Subsystem In the case of verifying and editing parameters the procedure that you select contains the d
262. ramming Manual HP part number 08920 90222 Figure 28 Revisioni B 01 00 LOAD TEST PROCEDURE Description TESTS Moin Menu AMPS NAMPS DAMPS DCCH Select Procedure Location Select Procedure Filename Library Programt STARTED DCCHO14 Card Performs several tests using different suite setups for illustration purposes CUSTOMIZE TEST PROCEDURE SET UP TEST SET Save Delete Procedure Customizing a Test Procedure Chapter 3 Using the Software continue To Screen DECODER RADIO INT Customizing Testing 99 Cc n Ke gt D wn fo o oO Chapter 3 Using the Software Customizing Testing Specifying Channel Information NOTE 100 Specify each new channel in the Range List field in the TESTS Set Up screen as follows e Enter the cellular channel number e For narrow analog voice channels NAMPS only specify lower middle or upper channel by appending an L M or U after the channel number Example For narrow lower analog voice channel 156 enter 156L in the channel information screen Customized channel information may be saved only as parts of procedures For information on saving customized channel information see Using Procedures on page 89 Chapter 3 Using the Software Customizing Testing Specifying the Order of Operations You may define the order of Operations to include all some or just one of the Op
263. re Using Common Processes NOTE 90 To save a procedure 1 A a Press the TESTS key The TESTS Main Menu screen will appear If you intend to select any item other than Disk in step 4 proceed to step 2 now If you intend to select Disk in step 4 perform the following four sub steps to enter the disk specification then proceed to step 2 a Move the cursor to the Cnfg External Devices field in the CUSTOMIZE TEST PROCEDURE list and select it to switch to the TESTS External Devices screen b Move the cursor to the External Disk Specification field and select it c From the list of characters in the Choices field enter the disk specification When the specification is complete move the cursor to Done and select it d Press the k5 Main Menu key to return to the TESTS Main Menu screen Move the cursor to the Proc Save Delete Procedure field in the CUSTOMIZE TEST PROCEDURE list and select it to switch to the TESTS Save Delete Procedure screen Move the cursor to the Select Procedure Location field and select it From the Choices field select the desired location Move the cursor to the Enter Procedure Filename field and select it From the list of characters in the Choices field enter a filename When the filename is complete move the cursor to Done and select it A procedure file name must be nine characters or less Procedure file names that already exist on the card will appear at the top of the
264. re displayed or printed Cc n Ke gt D wn fo o oO Output Heading Field You may use this field to enter a heading to be printed or displayed Select the field then use the CURSOR CONTROL knob to select from the list of characters in the Choices field and enter the characters that you wish to appear in the heading Select Done when you have finished 87 Chapter 3 Using the Software Using Common Processes 88 If Unit Under Test Fails Field You may select either Continue or Stop The default is Continue If you select Stop and a pass fail result is F the program will stop Test Procedure Run Mode Field You may select either Continuous or Single Step The default is Continuous You may command testing to pause at certain times If you set this mode to Single Step the procedure will pause after a comparison is made between a test determination and the expected result For example Operations will pause after the procedure compares the results to a specification You may continue the Operation from the paused state by pressing the k2 Continue key Autostart Test Procedure on Power Up Field You may select either On or off The default is off You may set up the Test Set so that if the procedure was previously loaded the procedure will be immediately executed when the Test Set is powered on Using Procedures Chapter 3 Using the Software Using Common Processes A procedure is a
265. re emphasis circuitry in the transmitter and after the de emphasis circuitry in the receiver If Always Onis selected the effects of an ideal expandor are removed from the test results Audio Frequency Response results are reduced by half Also the test operator is not prompted to turn the compandor ON and OFF If Control is selected you will be prompted to turn the cellular telephone s compandor on as appropriate during testing Some manual control of the cellular telephone compandor state is required Pass Fail Limits Used The pass fail limits specifications used in the RXA Audio Frequency Response Operation are Deviation from 6 dB Oct 400 Hz 2400 Hz Deviation from 6 dB Oct lt 400 Hz amp gt 2400 Hz These specifications are described in the following paragraphs Deviation from 6 dB Oct 400 Hz 2400 Hz This specification sets the pass fail limits used in testing the audio frequency response of the cellular telephone receiver s audio output circuitry with the audio response tested against the standard 6 dB octave de emphasis curve The audio response should not deviate beyond the specification limits over the frequency range of 400 to 2400 Hz The values are entered as decimal numbers as upper and lower limits and in dB Pass fail limits specifications are determined using any applicable standard such as e EIA TIA Standard Voice Audio Frequency Response Example If you determine that
266. rom which the Test System will obtain the cellular telephone number Three selections are provided in a one of many format Use Prev or Phone Below and Prompt Selecting Use Prev causes the Test System to use the mobile identification number MIN obtained in a prior Registration or Origination Operation If there was no prior Registration or Origination Operation the Test System will prompt you to enter the telephone number Selecting Phone Below causes the Test System to use the Phone Number O Use from Reg Orig parameter to obtain the cellular telephone number Selecting Prompt causes the Test System to prompt you to enter the telephone number Phone Number 0 Use from Reg Orig 2 to 9999999999 This parameter allows you to specify the telephone number of the cellular telephone being tested It is ordinarily entered as a 10 digit real number in the range 0 through 9999999999 but it is sometimes advantageous to use a negative number Setting the phone number parameter to a negative number results in the Test System using a MIN consisting of all zeroes An all zeroes MIN is invalid according to Interim Standard 54 However some cellular telephones have an all zeroes MIN after manufacture or service Thus entering a negative number allows the Test System to page such cellular telephones SAT Tone 5970 6000 or 6030 Hz This parameter allows you to specify the frequency of the supervisory audio tone that will be used on
267. rough 3 Example If you wish the cellular telephone to be active on timeslots 2 and 4 enter 2 Digital Traffic Channel Power Level 0 10 This parameter allows you to specify the power level at which the cellular telephone will transmit when it is paged to a digital traffic channel The value is entered as an integer in the range 0 through 10 Example If you wish to use power level 10 enter 10 Cellular Digital Traffic Channel Vocoder VSELP A CELP This parameter allows you to specify the type of speech decoding used during cellular digital traffic channel transmission If the firmware revision in the HP 8920B is B 05 00 or later this parameter is used when performing tests on IS 136 capable cellular telephones Example Two selections are provided in a one of many format VSELP or ACELP Selecting VSELP causes the Test System to use Vector Sum Excited Linear Predictive coding VSELP Selecting ACELP causes the Test System to use Algebraic Code Excited Linear Predictive coding ACELP Pass Fail Limits Used No pass fail limits specifications are used in the CP Origination from Analog Control Channel to Digital Traffic Channel Operation 148 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions CP Origination from Digital Control Channel to Analog Voice Channel CP Origination from Digital Control Channel to Analog Voice Channel Parameters Used This Operation simulates a call from the cellular telephone to the base station by p
268. s l Q Bline Position Qver Ins Delete Del End Bk Space A E c 0 Figure 7 TESTS Screen at End of Initial Tests 27 Chapter 1 Getting Started Selecting and Running the Initial Tests 28 Product Description U x e Qa c g iv a me e 53 29 Chapter 2 Product Description Test Software Test Software The HP 11807E Option 014 AMPS NAMPS DAMPS DCCH Mobile Test Software in combination with the HP 8920B Option 800 RF Communications Test Set forms the Test System This system provides full functional test capability for cellular telephones The Test Software can be used to test quickly the functionality of a cellular telephone or to test fully the parametric performance of a cellular telephone The Test Software is useful for cellular service providers in verifying telephone problems for repair centers in diagnosing problems and for manufacturers in fully testing telephone performance For a complete description of each of the Operations included in the Test Software see chapter 4 Operation Descriptions Items Included in the Test Software Package 30 The Test Software package includes the following items e HP 11807E Option 014 AMPS NAMPS DAMPS DCCH Test Software One Time Programmable OTP Card part number 11807 10041 e Uninitialized Static Random Access Memory SRAM Card 64 kilobyte part number HP 83230A e HP 11807E Option 014 AMPS NAMPS
269. s AUDIO IN HI Connector 2 The audio high input connector is used for the audio input signal that is supplied from the cellular telephone AUDIO IN LO Connector 3 The audio low input connector is not used with the HP 11807E Option 014 AMPS NAMPS DAMPS DCCH Mobile Test Software AUDIO MONITOR OUTPUT Connector On Rear Panel 4 The audio monitor output connector is used to obtain an output from various tap points in the Audio Frequency Analyzer of the Test Set The output level is not affected by the Test Set s front panel VOLUME control U fe Qa c O o o o me e 3 AUDIO OUT Connector 5 The audio output connector is used for providing an audio signal to the microphone input of a cellular telephone The output level is not affected by the Test Set s front panel VOLUME control CRT VIDEO OUTPUT Connector On Rear Panel 6 The CRT video output connector is used to supply a signal to an external video monitor The signal produces a duplicate of the Test Set s screen DC CURRENT MEASUREMENT Connectors On Rear Panel 7 The dc current measurement connectors are used in series with an external dc power supply and an external load to function as a 10 ampere current meter DC INPUT Connector On Rear Panel 8 The dc input connector is used to connect power from a dc supply to the Test Set 35 Chapter 2 Product Description Hardware Considerations 36 DUPLEX OUT Connector
270. s and test results Step Step Number A Test Software function that orders the sequence of tests For instance Step 1 might be a transmitter frequency error test and Step 2 might be a transmitter RF power test 359 Aiesso 5 360 Glossary store To place data into a memory device such as a memory card a disk or RAM Store and save are used synonymously subsystem A section of firmware grouped together for a specific task suite See test suite supervisory audio tone SAT A tone 6000 5970 or 6030 Hertz that is transmitted by a base station on the forward analog voice channel and transponded by a mobile station on the reverse analog voice channel It is used to confirm that the mobile station has connected to the desired base station on the voice channel system identification SID A digital code that identifies the home system of the mobile station The code is transmitted to the mobile station by the base station in the System Parameter Overhead Message An identification associated with a cellular system System identification of the service area TDMA See time division multiple access test A collection of measurements or a series of other tests that verify a particular specification value or operation of the cellular telephone A sequence of tests is contained in a test procedure test procedure A group of operations for instance Page TX RF Power Output Test and so forth that
271. s iv o Chapter 6 Reference Data Collection and Retrieval NOTE 314 The Test Software supports data storage on Logical Interchange Format LIF and Disk Operating System DOS disk formats Storage can be to any of the following file types e ASCII files under LIF e BDAT files under LIF e HP UX files under LIF e DOS files under DOS Specify the file type with your entry into the Options field immediately below DATA C If you do not enter a file type and the disk format is LIF the Test Software will select an HP UX file type If you do not enter a file type and the disk format is DOS the Test Software will select a DOS file type For example if you are using a DOS file with no extension on the file name the display will be similar to 1 DATA C 700 If you are using an ASCII BDAT or HP UX file you may specify the number of records allocated to the file The DOS file is automatically updated as data are stored so record allocation is not required If you are using HP UX files you must enter REC to establish a usable number of records REC 20480 sets the size to be the same as the default number of 256 byte records used for ASCII files 80 x 256 You may enter the REC after the file type For example to use an ASCII file with 200 records of 256 bytes each enter ASCII REC 200 into the Options field For some Test Software revisions REC and ASCII REC will appear in the Choices menu In this case you may se
272. s can be removed from an SRAM card external disk drive or RAM disk at any time To delete a procedure 1 Press the TESTS key The TESTS Main Menu screen will appear 2 Move the cursor to the Select Procedure Location field and select it 3 From the Choices field select the desired location 4 Move the cursor tothe Proc Save Delete Procedure field in the CUSTOMIZE TEST PROCEDURE list and select it to switch to the TESTS Save Delete Procedure screen Move the cursor to the Enter Procedure Filename field and select it 5 6 From the Choices field select the name of the procedure that you wish to delete 7 Press the k2 Del Proc key 8 Press the Yes key Cc n Ke gt D wn fo o o Securing and Un Securing a Procedure After you have set up your Test Software with a test suite channel information parameters and pass fail limits specifications you might wish to secure it This will prevent viewing and changing those functions You may select the items to secure or un secure The IBASIC ROM program to perform this function is included in the Test Set 91 Chapter 3 Using the Software Using Common Processes NOTE 92 You may secure the procedures that are supplied with the Test Software These are shipped un secured To secure a procedure PR So a Press the TESTS key The TESTS Main Menu screen will appear Move the cursor to the Select Procedure Location fie
273. s the screen to display the relevant pass fail limits specifications for that Operation Print All Field Selecting this field or pressing k3 prints all of the pass fail limits specifications for all of the Operations identified in the TESTS Set Up screen The printout will indicate the Operation name and its associated pass fail limits Chapter 2 Product Description Tests Subsystem Print Tst Field Selecting this field prints the pass fail limits specifications for the current Operation only The printout is similar to the display Setup Field Selecting this field or pressing k5 switches the display to the TESTS Set Up screen Specification Number Field This is the small field at the left side near the middle of the display see figure 23 on page 63 It represents the pass fail limits specification number Selecting this field and turning the CURSOR CONTROL knob scrolls through the pass fail limits specifications for the Operation Upper Limit Field Selecting this field allows you to set the upper limit to be compared with the measured result If the measured result is above this limit the test fails m TESTE Set Up Poss Foil Limits Default Pass Fail limits for testi TRA Audio Frequency Response pe e 2 c O TA D r AFrint All 5 Description Lower Limit Upper Limit Units Check Deviation from 6 dB octave 3 0000 1 0000 dB Both EE Response roll gt 2 5kHz 0
274. s used 284 MISC No Receiver Audio Functional Operation parameters used 286 pass fail limits used 286 MISC No Transmitter Audio Functional Operation 285 parameters used 285 pass fail limits used 285 MISC RX Qualitative Audio 286 Miscellaneous items 109 mobile cellular telephone defined 350 mobile identification number defined 350 mobile station defined 350 mobile station under test defined 350 MODULATION INPUT connector 36 MSUT defined 350 N NAMPS defined 350 entering narrow channel information 96 Narrow band Advanced Mobile Phone System defined 350 No 342 no service indicator defined 350 Index o one of many defined 351 one time programmable card defined 351 Operations part of test procedure 41 order of tests printing 327 organization manual 3 OTP memory cards 321 OTP card defined 351 363 P Page defined 351 Page Down 342 Page to analog voice channel 20 Page Up 342 paging defined 351 Parallel Port connector 40 parallel printer connections 329 parameter defined 351 parameter estimator error 299 parameters 102 change 31 default values 102 description 102 editing 90 general description 98 printing 102 327 saving 102 securing 87 specifying values 98 verifying 90 Parameters Used CP Handoff from Analog Voice Chan nel to Analog Voice Channel 148 CP Handoff from Analog Voice Chan nel to Digital Traffic Channel 152 CP Handoff from Analog Voi
275. scriptions TXD RF Power Output TXD RF Power Output NOTE Parameters Used 264 This Operation measures the cellular telephone transmitter s output power when the telephone is on a digital traffic channel If this Operation is performed using a Test Set without Option 006 10 W to 50 uW power measurement range the Test Software will perform a calibration for making digital power measurements The calibration routine momentarily places the cellular telephone on an analog voice channel to provide an arbitrary constant not pulsed signal to the Test Set The Test Software makes an average power measurement and a relative digital DSP measurement and calculates a calibration factor between the measurements This calibration factor is then used by the Test Software when making digital power measurements If the Test at Extreme Supply Voltages parameter is set to Yes see GEN Modify External Power Supply Parameters on page 117 so that output power measurements are made at high supply voltage and low supply voltage this Operation requires a properly configured programmable power supply see TXA Current Drain on page 182 Output power is expressed in watts dB relative to 1 watt or dB relative to 1 milliwatt according to the setting of the Units for Power Measurement parameter see GEN Modify Execution Parameters on page 114 The parameters used in the TXD RF Power Output Operation are Test Power Level 0 Yes or No Te
276. set of keys next to the Test Set screen the USER keys that can be assigned in the software to certain special actions or fields The keys are associated with the five inverse video fields in the upper right hand portion of the screen The function associated with the softkey is activated by 1 pressing the corresponding USER key or 2 turning the CURSOR CONTROL knob to move the cursor to the field and then pressing the knob See also USER keys specifications Representations of the criteria that the Test Software uses for verifying the performance of the cellular telephone The specifications values may be changed by using the TESTS Default Parameters screen The associated measurement value must meet or fall within the limits of specifications values to verify the performance Default values in the Test Software have been derived from standard methods of measurements See also pass fail limits SRAM See static random access memory SRAM card See static random access memory card ST See signaling tone static random access memory SRAM A sub type of RAM integrated circuit that is optimized for relatively high speed general memory applications Memory cards that use SRAM technology can be used with the Test Set to save programs and test results static random access memory card SRAM card A type of PC card that contains SRAM circuits and a back up battery and that is used with the Test Set to store programs procedure
277. sing the k1 Run Test key and waiting for the program display to appear 2 Press the SHIFT key then the CANCEL key to stop the program 3 Press the DUPLEX key to exit the TESTS Main Menu screen 4 Press the SHIFT key then the SAVE key 5 Read the number to the left of free memory If this number is a few percent or less the Test System might display an error message after saving additional set ups to SAVE registers If there is not sufficient memory space available you might be required to delete unnecessary save registers To delete save registers 1 Press the DUPLEX key 2 Press the RECALL key 3 Press the ON OFF to clear the register 4 Press the ON OFF again to answer YES 297 Chapter 5 Problem Solving Printing Problems Printing Problems O Verify that the printer is turned on O Verify that the HP IB parallel or serial cable from the Test Set to the printer is connected Then perform the following 1 Press the TESTS key The TESTS Main Menu screen will appear 2 From the SET UP TEST SET list select Print Printer Setup to switch to the TESTS Printer Setup screen Verify that Printer was selected in the Output Results To field 4 Verify that the Test Set is correctly configured for HP IB or serial printing a Select Model then select the most compatible printer model from the Choices menu b Select Printer Port and then select the printer port c Ifthe HP IB port was select
278. smission of all calls within an individual cell The cellular telephone then detects the tone and modulates the transmitted voice channel carrier with a constant relative phase tone that is filtered or regenerated from the received tone to establish a closed loop between the cellular telephone and the cell site Transmission of the SAT by a cellular telephone is suspended during transmission of wideband data on the reverse voice channel RVC but is not suspended when the signaling tone ST is sent Example If you wish to use 6000 Hz as the SAT select 6000 161 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 F me e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions CP Handoff from Narrow Analog Voice Channel to Narrow Analog Voice Channel Analog Voice Channel Power Level 0 7 This parameter allows you to specify the power level at which the cellular telephone will transmit when it is operated on an analog voice channel The value is entered as an integer in the range 0 through 7 Example If you wish to use power level 7 enter 7 Pass Fail Limits Used No pass fail limits specifications are used in the CP Handoff from Narrow Analog Voice Channel to Analog Voice Channel Operation 162 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions CP Handoff from Digital Traffic Channel to Digital Traffic Channel CP Handoff from Digital Traffic Channel to Digital Traffic Channel NOTE Parameters Used This Operation performs an expli
279. specification is described in the following paragraphs 223 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 F me e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions RXA Audio Distortion 224 Audio Distortion This specification sets the pass fail limits used when the receiver s audio distortion is measured while receiving the Standard RF Level The value is entered as a decimal number as the upper limit only and as a percentage Pass fail limits specifications are determined using any applicable standard such as e EIA TIA Standard Audio Harmonic Distortion Example If you determine that the audio distortion should not exceed 5 percent at a normal audio output enter 5 as the upper limit Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions RXA Audio Frequency Response RXA Audio Frequency Response NOTE Parameters Used Audio connections from the cellular telephone to the Test System are required for this Operation This Operation measures the capability of the cellular telephone receiver s audio output circuitry to follow a 6 dB octave de emphasis curve as well as to follow an audio bandpass response The signal specified by the Analog Voice Channel Power Level parameter see CP Page from Analog Control Channel to Analog Voice Channel on page 126 is applied with a constant deviation The modulation rate is swept over the audio frequency response range from a specified start level to a specified stop level in s
280. ss Fail Limits Used One pass fail limits specification is used in the TXA Modulation Limiting on Analog Voice Channel Operation It is Modulation Deviation Limiting On AVC This specification is described in the following paragraphs Modulation Deviation Limiting On AVC This specification sets the pass fail limits when the cellular telephone s transmitter circuits are tested for the capability to prevent the transmitter from producing peak deviation in excess of the system specification for analog voice channels The value is entered as a decimal number as the upper limit only and in kHz Pass fail limits specifications are determined using any applicable standard such as e EIA TIA Standard Modulation Deviation Limiting Example If you determine that the instantaneous peak and steady state deviations of the transmitter should not exceed the rated system peak frequency deviation of 12 kHz enter 12 as the upper limit 201 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 2 z pei e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXA Modulation Deviation Limiting on Narrow Analog Voice Channel TXA Modulation Deviation Limiting on Narrow Analog Voice Channel NOTE NOTE 202 Audio connections from the cellular telephone to the Test System are required for this Operation This is an NAMPS only Operation This Operation measures the capability of the transmitter circuits to prevent the cellular telepho
281. st Power Level 1 Yes or No Test Power Level 2 Yes or No Test Power Level 7 Yes or No Test Power Level 10 Yes or No Test Power Levels 3 6 8 9 or 3 6 amp 8 9 These parameters are described in the following paragraphs Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXD RF Power Output Test Power Level 0 Yes or No This parameter allows you to specify whether cellular telephone transmitter s output power testing will be performed at power level 0 Two selections are provided in a toggle format Yes and No Selecting Yes causes the Test Software to perform the test Selecting No causes the Test Software to ignore the test Test Power Level 1 Yes or No This parameter allows you to specify whether cellular telephone transmitter s output power testing will be performed at power level 1 Two selections are provided in a toggle format Yes and No Selecting Yes causes the Test Software to perform the test Selecting No causes the Test Software to ignore the test Test Power Level 2 Yes or No This parameter allows you to specify whether cellular telephone transmitter s output power testing will be performed at power level 2 Two selections are provided in a toggle format Yes and No Selecting Yes causes the Test Software to perform the test Selecting No causes the Test Software to ignore the test Test Power Level 7 Yes or No This parameter allows you to specify whether cellular telephone transmitter output
282. suggested testing strategy 1 Make connections as described in chapter 3 Using the Software on page 69 2 Insert the Test Software OTP card into the Test Set s front panel slot See chapter 1 Getting Started on page 19 chapter 2 Product Description on page 29 and chapter 3 Using the Software on page 69 3 Load the procedure that you wish to run from the OTP card 4 Run the procedure A Registration Operation or one of the Origination Operations should be the first Operation in your test procedure sequence because these Operations obtain the mobile identification number MIN of the cellular telephone In step 4 above if the cellular telephone number or the MIN is known that information may be loaded in the Phone Number 0 Use from Reg Orig parameter Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions Testing Strategy Cellular Telephone Number or Mobile Identification Number The Test System requires a telephone number or a mobile identification number MIN to page the cellular telephone Once a telephone number or MIN is obtained from the telephone it is retained by the Test Set until a new telephone number or MIN is obtained Therefore the Registration or Origination Operation must be performed only once on each telephone Subsequent test procedures need not start with a Registration or Origination Operation If the first Operation in a test procedure sequence is not a Registration or Origination type and the MIN from th
283. sure the burst amplitude droop Selecting No causes the Test Software to ignore the measurement Test I Q Origin Offset Yes or No This parameter allows you to specify whether I Q origin offset will be measured during transmitter testing when the cellular telephone is on a digital traffic channel Two selections are provided in a toggle format Yes and No Selecting Yes causes the Test Software to measure the I Q origin offset Selecting No causes the Test Software to ignore the measurement Test Carrier Frequency Error Yes or No This parameter allows you to specify whether carrier frequency error will be measured during transmitter testing when the cellular telephone is on a digital traffic channel Two selections are provided in a toggle format Yes and No Selecting Yes causes the Test Software to measure the carrier frequency error Selecting No causes the Test Software to ignore the measurement 253 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 F me e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXD Modulation Accuracy Pass Fail Limits Used 254 The pass fail limits specifications used in the TXD Modulation Accuracy Operation are Error Vector Magnitude EVM Phase Error Magnitude Error Burst Amplitude Droop I Q Origin Offset Carrier Frequency Error These specifications are described in the following paragraphs Error Vector Magnitude EVM This specification sets the pass fail limits for
284. t averaging INSTRUMENT STATE Keys 22 The instrument state keys are used for the following functions The LOCAL key is used to return the Test Set to manual control after HP IB control is used The RECALL key is used to list any Test Set setups that were saved The MEAS RESET key is used to clear the measurement history for all of the Test Set measurement algorithms This restarts all measurements in progress The PRESET key is used to restore most Test Set settings to the default states This does not cause the Test Set s self diagnostics to run The ADRS SHIFT LOCAL key is used to display the Test Set HP IB address The SAVE SHIFT RECALL key is used to store Test Set setups Chapter 2 Product Description Hardware Considerations SCREEN CONTROL Keys 23 The screen control keys are used for the following functions e The RX TX DUPLEX TESTS MSSG SHIFT RX HELP SHIFT TX and CONFIG SHIFT DUPLEX keys are used to access several Test Set control and information screens e The PREV key is used to change the display back to the previous screen e The HOLD SHIFT PREV key is used to stop all measurements in progress Pressing the key again resumes the measurements e The PRINT SHIFT TESTS key is used to print the entire contents of the displayed screen the time and date and any defined print title SHIFT Key 24 The SHIFT key is used to select the blue labeled functions listed above some keys
285. tation under test in order to establish communication page The process of setting up and initiating a cellular phone call by the base station A call begun by a mobile station is called an origination parameter A Test Software function that is user modifiable and that is used to specify certain values and control information to the Test Software These include calibration data cellular telephone characteristics and test customization Parameters provide flexibility in the use of the Test Software Default values for all parameters are included in the Test Software pass fail limit specifications A Test Software function that is user modifiable and that is used to specify the criteria for verifying the performance of the cellular telephone Specifications can include high limits low limits and high low limits The associated measurement value must meet or fall within the pass fail values to verify performance of the cellular telephone Default values included in the Test Software have been derived from standard methods of measurement or from standard cellular telephone test requirements pause A Test Software function that momentarily stops the running of IBASIC software in the Test Set and allows access to the keyboard functions It is activated by pressing the CANCEL key Pressing the CONTINUE key allows the software to proceed Note that in some instances test results following a pause might be unreliable PC card
286. te by putting the cellular telephone in service and having the operator originate a call from the handset Specifically in this Operation the Test System does the following 1 Simulates a control channel 2 Prompts you to dial any telephone number as many as 10 digits after the cellular telephone has service Service is indicated by the cellular telephone NO SERVICE indicator extinguishing or the SERVICE indicator lighting 3 Performs 3 of 5 majority voting on the Reverse Control Message 4 Performs Bose Chaudhuri Hocquenghem BCH error detection and correction of the Reverse Control Message Wideband data 5 Sends an Initial Voice Channel Designation order to the cellular telephone directing it to tune to the voice channel specified in the Channels field of the TESTS Set Up screen 6 Makes a supervisory audio tone SAT measurement on the initial voice channel to verify that the voice channel was obtained The SAT measurement result is not displayed in this Operation It is not necessary to register the cellular telephone with the Test System by running a Registration Operation before running this Operation This Operation will read the cellular telephone s Mobile Identification Number MIN and the Test System will retain it for use in performing other tests The parameters used in the CP Origination from Analog Control Channel to Analog Voice Channel Operation are SAT Tone 5970 6000 or 6030 Hz Analog Voice Cha
287. te for confirming orders such as Alert Audit and Change Power and for signaling flash and release requests No parameters are used in the TXA Signaling Tone Frequency and Deviation Operation Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXA Signaling Tone Frequency and Deviation Pass Fail Limits Used The pass fail limits specifications used in the TXA Signaling Tone Frequency and Deviation Operation are Signaling Tone Deviation Signaling Tone Frequency These specifications are described in the following paragraphs Signaling Tone Deviation This specification sets the pass fail limits for the signaling tone s peak frequency deviation The values are entered as decimal numbers as upper and lower limits and in kHz Pass fail limits specifications are determined using any applicable standard such as e EIA TIA Standard Signaling Tone ST Example If you determine that the nominal peak frequency deviation of the carrier produced by the signaling tone should be 8 kHz with a 10 tolerance enter 7 2 as the lower limit and 8 8 as the upper limit Signaling Tone Frequency This specification sets the pass fail limits for the signaling tone s frequency accuracy The values are entered as decimal numbers as upper and lower limits and in Hz Pass fail limits specifications are determined using any applicable standard such as e EIA TIA Standard Signaling Tone ST Example If you determine that the Signaling T
288. ter 7 Pass Fail Limits Used No pass fail limits specifications are used in the CP Handoff from Narrow Analog Voice Channel to Analog Voice Channel Operation 160 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions CP Handoff from Narrow Analog Voice Channel to Narrow Analog Voice Channel CP Handoff from Narrow Analog Voice Channel to Narrow Analog Voice Channel NOTE NOTE Parameters Used This Operation performs an explicit handoff from a narrow analog voice channel Operation on a telephone channel to an narrow analog voice channel Operation on the same or another telephone channel This is a NAMPS only operation The channels must indicate the offset desired U Upper M Middle or L Lower For information on explicit and implicit call processing see Testing Strategy on page 108 The parameters used in the CP Handoff from Narrow Analog Voice Channel to Analog Voice Channel Operation are SAT Tone 5970 6000 or 6030 Hz Analog Voice Channel Power Level 0 7 These parameters are described in the following paragraphs SAT Tone 5970 6000 or 6030 Hz This parameter allows you to specify the frequency of the supervisory audio tone that will be used on all analog voice channels A supervisory audio tone SAT is an out of voice band audio tone that is used for cell site identification Three selections are provided in a one of many format 5970 6000 and 6030 Hz One of the three tones is added to the voice tran
289. ters used 179 pass fail limits used 180 TXA Digital Signaling Tone DST De viation and Code Operation 182 TXA Digital Signaling Tone Deviation and Code Operation parameters used 182 pass fail limits used 183 TXA Digital Supervisory Audio Tone Deviation Closure and Phase Jitter Operation 186 parameters used 187 pass fail limits used 188 TXA Dual Tone Multiple Frequency Key Pad amp Dual Tone Multiple Frequency Frequency Error Opera tion parameters used 184 pass fail limits used 185 TXA Dual Tone Multiple Frequency Key Pad and Dual Tone Multiple Frequency Frequency Error Opera tion 184 TXA FM Hum and Noise Operation 191 parameters used 191 pass fail limits used 191 TXA Frequency Error Operation 193 parameters used 193 pass fail limits used 193 TXA Modulation Deviation Limiting on Analog Voice Channel Operation 194 TXA Modulation Deviation Limiting on Narrow Analog Voice Channel Op eration 197 parameters used 198 pass fail limits used 199 TXA Modulation Limiting on Analog Voice Channel Operation parameters used 194 pass fail limits used 196 TXA RF Power Output Operation 200 parameters used 200 pass fail limits used 202 TXA RF Power Output vs Channel Plot ted Operation 204 264 parameters used 204 pass fail limits used 206 TXA SAT Frequency Error and Devia tion Operation 211 TXA Signaling Tone Frequency and De viation Operation 209 parameters used 209 pass fail limits used 210
290. that is capable of data storage with the data read or write accessible on an address selectable or random access basis RAM is used for the Test Set s memory that stores program code and data The Test Set s RAM is battery backed up retaining data and program code when the power is turned off read only memory ROM A type of integrated circuit that is capable of data storage into which data can be loaded one time only with the data read accessible on an address selectable or random access basis ROM is used primarily for control applications in which data must be read multiple times Register The Test Set state in which registration occurs registration The process by which a mobile station identifies its location and parameters to a base station release The process of ending a call between a mobile station and a base station ROM See read only memory Run Test A Test Software function that directs the Test Set to load the program from the current procedure and begin testing This process might require as long as two minutes SACCH See slow associated control channel SAT See supervisory audio tone save To place data into a memory device such as a memory card a disk or RAM Save and store are used synonymously screen The Test Set s display SCREEN CONTROL keys A group of push buttons on the Test Set s front panel that control various display functions select To choose a particular fie
291. the Select Procedure Filename field and select it 5 From the Choices field select a procedure that you wish to load 6 Move the cursor to the Specs Pass Fail Limits field in the CUSTOMIZE TEST PROCEDURE list and select it to switch to the TEST Pass Fail Limits screen 7 Move the cursor to the Operation field and select it 8 Rotate the CURSOR CONTROL knob to the desired Operation and select it 9 Move the cursor to the Specification Number field and select it 10 Move the cursor to the Value field of the pass fail limits specification to be changed and select it 11 Move the cursor to the Lower Limit or the Upper Limit field and select it 12 Enter the desired value using the DATA keypad and press the ENTER key e Use the left arrow key to backspace e Press the CANCEL key to cancel entries and retain the old value 13 Move the cursor to the Check field and select it 14 From the Choices field select the combination of upper and lower limits to be checked 15 Press the k5 Main Menu key or the TESTS key to return to the TESTS Main Menu screen Cc n Ke gt D wn fo o o 97 Chapter 3 Using the Software Customizing Testing Customizing Testing NOTE 98 Because of the diversity of individual testing requirements the Test Software has been designed so that changes may be made easily from the Test Set s front panel You may store these changes on an SRAM card for
292. the error vector magnitude EVM The value is entered as a decimal number as an upper limit only and as a percentage Pass fail limits specifications are determined using any applicable standard such as e EIA TIA Standard IS 137 Example If you determine that the error vector magnitude should be lt 12 5 percent enter 12 5 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXD Modulation Accuracy Phase Error This specification sets the pass fail limits for the rms value of the phase error components of the error vectors measured over one burst The phase error component is the difference in phase at the detection decision points between the measured signal after root Nyquist filtering I Q origin offset removal burst amplitude droop removal and carrier frequency error removal and the ideal signal generated from the same data pattern The rms value is obtained by taking the square root of the sum of the squares of the individual values at each detection decision point over the measured burst Phase error is an indicator of the quality of the phase component of the 7 4 DQPSK signal and is one of the components that contribute to the error vector magnitude The value is entered as a decimal number as an upper limit only and as a percentage Pass fail limits specifications are determined using any applicable standard such as e EIA TIA Standard Modulation Accuracy Example If you determine that the rms phase error should be
293. the old file will be over written Once a file is over written it is unretrievable There is no backup 303 a a fa z D 3 o o 5 a Chapter 5 Problem Solving Error Messages 304 Error 80 during Procedure catalog Catalog aborted The Test System displays this message when it is unable to load a procedure from a PC card e Verify that the card is properly inserted and has procedures saved on it ERROR 80 in line number Medium changed or not in drive Re try The Test System displays this message when it is unable to access valid files from a PC card e Verify that the card is properly inserted and has procedures saved on it Error in channel Re enter in Range List field The channels that are tested must be entered into the Range List field in the TESTS Set Up screen The entry ranges are through 799 and 991 through 1023 Error in data collection information on cnfg screen The Test System displays this message if the file type or record number is not properly entered into the TESTS External Devices screen To access the TESTS External Devices screen 1 Press the TESTS key The TESTS Main Menu screen will appear 2 From the SET UP TEST SET list select Cnfg External Devices to switch to the TESTS External Devices screen 3 Verify that the entries are correct Chapter 5 Problem Solving Error Messages a a fa z D 3 o o 5 a HP IB Command not accepted
294. this Operation the Test System performs a registration Operation every 10 minutes As long as the cellular telephone can successfully register with the Test System the Test System concludes that the battery is still functional After the first failure to register the Test System attempts one more registration Operation If the cellular telephone fails again the Test System concludes that the battery charge is depleted and records and displays the time between the start of the Operation and the time at which the battery was determined to be depleted of charge The parameters used in the MISC Battery Life on Digital Control Channel Standby Operation are System Identification Number 0 32767 DCCH DVCC 0 255 These parameters are described in the following paragraphs System Identification Number 0 32767 This parameter allows you to specify the cellular telephone s System Identification SID number to be used in testing The SID is stored as a 15 bit binary number in the telephone permanent security and identification memory The value is entered as an integer in the range 0 through 32767 Example If your cellular telephone s SID number is 11111 enter 11111 DCCH DVCC 0 255 This parameter allows you to specify the Digital Verification Color Code DVCC number to be transmitted to the cellular telephone on the digital control channel The value is entered as an integer in the range 0 through 255 Example If you
295. this TESTS Main Menu screen for the HP 11807E Option 014 Test Software see figure 10 on page 46 This screen then becomes the active default screen as long as a procedure filename is selected If a procedure filename is not selected the original system default TESTS Main Menu screen remains the default see figure 9 on page 43 The following paragraphs describe the various fields of this screen Cnfg External Devices Field Selecting this field displays the TESTS External Devices screen Continue Field Selecting this field or pressing k2 restarts a paused test Description Field Selecting this field displays a description of the file selected in the Select Procedure Filename field The description is updated as a result of updating the Select Procedure Filename field Exec Execution Cond Field Selecting this field displays the TESTS Execution Conditions screen Help Field Selecting this field or pressing k4 displays the help screen that contains assistance information in the TESTS Set Up screen IBASIC IBASIC Cntr1 Field Selecting this field displays the TESTS IBASIC Controller screen Library Field Selecting this field displays the library information of the file chosen in the Select Procedure Filename field Parms Default Parameters Field Selecting this field displays the TESTS Default Parameters screen which displays all of the parameters available in the parameters library Chapter 2
296. time that this Operation is encountered is irrelevant for the Operation The Test System performs an implicit handoff to the channel specified as the start channel in the Operation and then performs the rest of the Operation At the end of the Operation the Test System performs another handoff either explicit or implicit to whatever channel is next SINAD is the ratio expressed in dB of e Signal Noise Distortion e to Noise Distortion The receiver s SINAD is measured at the receiver s audio output and at the RF level specified by the RF Level for SINAD Test parameter This measurement differs from a distortion measurement in that it is conducted at low RF input levels at which the noise contribution is significant Receivers are typically required to provide at least 12 dB SINAD less than 25 percent noise and distortion for RF input levels below 1 microvolt In performing the Operation the Test System modulates the RF signal to deviate to 8 kHz at a 1 kHz rate with a SAT tone present This Operation is ordinarily performed at the nominal supply voltage but it may be performed with high and low supply voltages for extreme measurements In such case the measurement is repeated at high and low supply voltages if the Test at Extreme Supply Voltages parameter is set to Yes Parameters Used Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions RXA RF Sensitivity vs Channel Plotted If the Test at Extreme Supply Voltages parameter is set t
297. tion memory The value is entered as an integer in the range 0 through 32767 Example If your cellular telephone s SID number is 11111 enter 11111 DCCH DVCC 0 255 This parameter allows you to specify the Digital Verification Color Code DVCC number to be transmitted to the cellular telephone on the digital control channel The value is entered as an integer in the range 0 through 255 Example If you wish to use a DVCC of 101 during testing enter 101 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions GEN Modify Digital Control Channel Parameters Pass Fail Limits Used No pass fail limits specifications are used in the GEN Modify Digital Control Channel Parameters Operation 121 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 2 z pei 4 e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions CP Registration on Analog Control Channel CP Registration on Analog Control Channel 122 This Operation causes a cellular telephone to transmit registration data to the Test System The Test System reads and decodes the cellular telephone s Reverse Control Channel RECC data and outputs the following registration information Cellular telephone number Serial number in both decimal and hexadecimal format Power class Transmission continuous or discontinuous Bandwidth 20 MHz or 25 MHz The Operation functions as follows e The Test System transmits the Registration ID message repeatedly with the value of the REGID field set
298. tion tests the cellular telephone s receiver sensitivity by setting the telephone to loopback mode and measuring the telephone s capability to receive a base station signal at low RF levels as set by the RF Level for Sensitivity Test parameter The Operation tests for bit error rate BER In this Operation you must set the cellular telephone manually to loopback mode through the handset The process for manually setting loopback mode is dependent upon the telephone and must be obtained from the telephone s documentation RXD receiver sensitivity is a measure of the ability of a cellular telephone to process and receive digital data at a BER of 3 percent or less under static and faded conditions This Operation measures only the static condition The parameters used in the RXD Receiver Sensitivity Loopback Operation are Test BER Yes or No RF Power Level for BER Measurement 30 to 120 dBm These parameters are described in the following paragraphs 279 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 2 z pei e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions RXD Receiver Sensitivity Loopback RF Power Level for BER Measurement 30 to 120 dBm This parameter allows you to specify the cellular telephone s receiver input RF power level for Bit Error Rate measurement during receiver sensitivity testing when the cellular telephone is operating on a digital channel The value is entered as a real number in dBm
299. tion to a PC 314 editing parameters 90 editing pass fail limits 92 electro static discharge defined 347 ENTER key 4 Epson card defined 348 equipment configuration change 31 connection 67 Equipment Required 22 Error Message Reference 296 Error Messages 295 error messages 288 escape sequences 332 ESD defined 348 Exiting a Procedure 80 Explicit and Implicit Call Processing 104 explicit call processing 104 explicit handoff defined 348 EXT SCOPE TRIGGER INPUT connec tor 36 external instrument timeout error 302 Index F FACCH defined 348 Factory Hot Line 5 fast associated control channel defined 348 field defined 348 selecting a 4 file name disk example 319 file types ASCII 307 BDAT 307 DOS 307 HP UX 307 files copying 305 firmware revision error 301 flash memory cards 321 front panel control characters 315 function defined 348 G GEN defined 348 General 102 GEN Modify Analog Control Channel Parameters 115 GEN Modify Analog Control Channel Parameters Operation parameters used 115 pass fail limits used 115 GEN Modify Digital Control Channel Parameters 116 GEN Modify Digital Control Channel Parameters Operation parameters used 116 pass fail limits used 117 GEN Modify Execution Parameters Op eration 110 113 parameters used 110 pass fail limits used 112 GEN Modify External Power Supply Pa rameters Operation parameters used 113 pass fail limits used 114 G
300. to the left and up Pressing the knob once activates selects the function or terminates a data entry VOLUME Control Knob 30 The volume control adjusts the speaker output sound level for monitoring the selected input of the AF Analyzer SQUELCH Control Knob 31 The squelch control ordinarily adjusts the squelch level in demodulating AM FM or SSB signals However during execution of the Test Software in cellular telephone testing the squelch function is set to a fixed level Thus the squelch control is not effective during cellular telephone testing Parallel Port Connector On Rear Panel 32 The parallel port connector is used as an interface to printers that require a parallel port for printing screen images or test results AC DC Switch On Rear Panel 33 The ac dc switch is used to select the Test Set s power source type The source type must be selected with the Test Set s power turned off Chassis Ground Connector On Rear Panel 34 The chassis ground connector is used for a safety ground connection when dc power is supplied to the Test Set This connector can be used as a general chassis ground point Tests Subsystem NOTE Chapter 2 Product Description Tests Subsystem The Tests Subsystem consists of a group of associated Test Set displays that are used to create edit and run automated test procedures A test procedure consists of groups of Operations for instance Page or TX RF Power Output T
301. trol Channel Standby 282 MISC Battery Life on Digital Traffic Channel Transmit 278 MISC Digital Talk Back 284 MISC No Receiver Audio Functional 286 MISC TX Qualitative Audio 285 RXA Audio Distortion 218 RXA Audio Frequency Response 220 RXA Expandor 224 RXA Forward Voice Channel Order Message Error Rate 229 RXA Hum and Noise 231 RXA Mobile Reported Interference Index 233 RXA RF Sensitivity 236 RXA RF Sensitivity vs Channel Plot ted 242 RXA RF Sensitivity Narrow Analog Voice Channel 239 RXD Receiver Sensitivity 272 RXD Receiver Sensitivity Loopback 274 TXA Audio Distortion 168 TXA Audio Frequency Response 170 TXA Compressor Response 173 TXA Current Drain 179 TXA Digital Signaling Tone Deviation and Code 182 TXA Digital Supervisory Audio Tone Deviation Closure and Phase Jit ter 187 TXA Dual Tone Multiple Frequency Key Pad and Dual Tone Multiple Frequency Frequency Error 184 TXA FM Hum and Noise 191 TXA Frequency Error 193 TXA Modulation Deviation Limiting on Analog Voice Channel 194 TXA Modulation Deviation Limiting on Narrow Analog Voice Channel 198 TXA RF Power Output 200 TXA RF Power Output vs Channel Plotted 204 TXA Signaling Tone Frequency and Deviation 209 TXA Supervisory Audio Tone Fre quency Error and Deviation 211 TXA Wideband Data Deviation 216 TXD Adjacent Channel Power 245 TXD Modulation Accuracy 247 TXD Modulation Accurac
302. trol Channel Number 0 1023 System Identification SID Number 0 32767 DCCH DVCC 0 255 These parameters are described in the following paragraphs 169 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 2 z pei e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions CP Release to Digital Control Channel NOTE NOTE 170 Digital Control Channel Number 0 1023 This parameter allows you to specify the control channel to be used by the cellular telephone The value is entered as an integer in the range 0 through 1023 The control channel number may be any valid cellular channel number from 1 through 799 and 990 through 1023 Some cellular telephones will operate only with a digital control channel in a particular range In such instances you must determine the telephone programming from the telephone documentation and select an appropriate control channel number Example If you wish to use control channel 333 to set up a call with the cellular telephone enter 333 System Identification SID Number 0 32767 This parameter allows you to specify the cellular telephone s System Identification SID number to be used in testing The SID is stored as a 15 bit binary number in the telephone permanent security and identification memory The value is entered as an integer in the range 0 through 32767 To perform testing in a non roaming environment this parameter must be equal to the cellular telephone home system ID
303. ts MV amp P F Measured Value and Pass Fail causes both the measured value and the pass fail indication to be printed MV amp Limits amp P F Measured Value and Limits and Pass Fail causes the measured value the pass fail limits specifications and the pass fail indication to be printed Limits amp P F Limits and Pass Fail causes the pass fail limits specifications and the pass fail indication to be printed Example If you wish to print out only the measured value select Mv Pass Fail Limits Used No pass fail limits specifications are used in the GEN Modify Execution Parameters Operation 116 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions GEN Modify External Power Supply Parameters GEN Modify External Power Supply Parameters Parameters Used NOTE This Operation sets system set up type parameters that require the use of an external programmable power supply These parameters affect tests that use supply voltages other than nominal The parameters used in the GEN Modify External Power Supply Parameters Operation are Test at Extreme Supply Voltages Yes or No Low Supply Voltage 0 20 Nominal Supply Voltage 0 20 High Supply Voltage 0 20 These parameters are described in the following paragraphs The following described parameters are effective only if a programmable external HP IB power supply is connected and configured to operate with the Test System Test at Extreme Supply Voltages Yes or No
304. ts for power measurement If units for power measurement are other than dBW the Test Software will convert the pass fail limits specifications to the appropriate units automatically Pass fail limits specifications are determined using any applicable standard such as e EIA TIA Standard Transmitter Output Power Values for power levels in the standard are for effective radiated power ERP and not as measured directly from the cellular telephone Power levels will be higher when measured directly from the cellular telephone 207 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 F me e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXA RF Power Output Example If you determine that the output power levels should be maintained within the range of 2 dB and 4 dB of the nominal values over a specified temperature range enter the values as shown in table 6 on page 208 for the lower limit and the upper limit for power levels of 0 through 7 Table 6 Power Levels Example Power Level Nominal Lower Limit Upper Limit Value dBW dBW dBW Level 0 6 2 8 Level 1 2 2 4 Level 2 2 6 0 Level 3 6 10 4 Level 4 10 14 8 Level 5 14 18 12 Level 6 18 22 16 Level 7 22 26 20 208 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXA RF Power Output vs Channel Plotted TXA RF Power Output vs Channel Plotted NOTE Parameters Used This Operation
305. ts its data and holds and displays only the highest positive and negative peaks detected The Test Set has a fast peak detector that captures the peak deviation that occurs over the entire period including the deviation that occurs in the first 10 milliseconds The measurement method conforms to the EIA TIA IS 55 Standard RVC data are Manchester encoded data that are used for cellular system signaling and control Manchester encoding is accomplished by transforming each NRZ non return to zero binary one to a zero to one transition and each NRZ binary zero to a one to zero transition The data stream is then used to modulate the transmitter carrier using direct binary frequency shift keying FSK On the wide voice channels the data rate is 10 kilobits second and the nominal peak transmitted deviation is 8 kHz All other modulation sources to the transmitter are inhibited when the data are transmitted blank and burst On the narrow voice channels the data rate is 100 bits second and the nominal peak transmitter deviation is 700 Hz The data words are inserted into the DSAT data stream The transmitter is modulated simultaneously by voice audio and the data stream Parameters Used Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXA Wideband Data Deviation One parameter is used in the TXA Wideband Data Deviation Operation It is Data Portion Tested Steady Trans or Both This parameter is described in the following paragraphs Data Porti
306. typeface 332 printer HP IB 330 output heading 83 problems 292 serial 330 printer address error 300 printer timeout error 302 printers supported 327 printing 82 327 problems 292 results 74 test results 83 test screens 82 TESTS Screens 334 problem modules 288 problem solving data collection doesn t work 289 error message descriptions 296 error messages 295 memory space problems 291 printer problems 292 test results are unexpected 293 Test Set doesn t power up 294 366 procedure continuing 81 defined 352 deleting 85 87 description 85 exiting 80 loading 85 names 85 naming 85 pausing 81 saving 85 securing 85 87 stopping 81 un securing 85 87 what is saved 85 procedure load error 298 procedures using 85 product description 29 program stored in test set memory 322 prompt defined 352 Index R RADIO INTERFACE connector 36 RAM defined 352 disk 335 initializing 335 random access memory defined 352 read only memory defined 352 parameter RF Level for SINAD Test 286 REC default entry 308 entering record number 308 REC to set record size 308 Register defined 352 registration defined 352 registration information listing 118 release defined 352 release to an analog control channel 20 retrieving data from a memory card 310 RF IN OUT connector 36 RF path losses determined 31 rf path losses corrected 31 RJ 11 connectors 340 rms detector
307. ude of the signal at the detection decision points across the measured burst Burst amplitude droop rate is expressed in dB symbol The value is entered as a decimal number as an upper limit only and in dB symbol Pass fail limits specifications are determined using any applicable standard such as e EIA TIA Standard Modulation Accuracy Example If you determine that the average rate of decay in the magnitude of the measured signal should be lt 1 dB symbol enter 1 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXD Modulation Accuracy T Q Origin Offset This specification sets the pass fail limits for the I Q origin offset The value is entered as a decimal number as an upper limit only and in dB Pass fail limits specifications are determined using any applicable standard such as e EIA TIA Standard IS 137 Example If you determine that the I Q origin offset should be 20 dB enter 20 Carrier Frequency Error This specification sets the pass fail limits for the cellular telephone s carrier frequency stability Frequency error is measured over one burst The values are entered in decimal numbers as upper and lower limits and in Hz Pass fail limits specifications are determined using any applicable standard such as e EIA TIA Standard Frequency Tolerance For Digital Mode Operation Example If you determine that the carrier frequency should be maintained within 200 Hz of any assigned channel frequency ent
308. uipment The 16 lines may be configured as inputs outputs or a combination of inputs and outputs RF IN OUT Connector 16 The RF input output connector is used to accept input RF signals to the Test Set and to supply the output signal from the RF Generator of the Test Set Chapter 2 Product Description Hardware Considerations SERIAL PORT Connector On Rear Panel 17 The serial port connector is used for serial data input and output in such functions as entering programs printing test results and screen images and sending test results to external equipment 10 MHz REF INPUT Connector On Rear Panel 18 The 10 MHz reference input connector is used to supply an external reference input to the Test Set When a valid signal is supplied through this connector the Test Set automatically switches from the internal to the external reference 10 MHz REF OUTPUT Connector On Rear Panel 19 The 10 MHz reference output connector is used to supply the reference signal generated by the Test Set to external equipment DATA Keys 20 vu The data keys are used for the following functions 2 E fa e The following keys are used for entering and changing values o 0 through 9 8 o 5 A through F e The ENTER key is used to select a field or screen and to enter numbers when the unit of measure is not specified Pressing this key causes the same effect as pressing the CURSOR CONTROL knob e The ON OFF key is used to enabl
309. used 147 CP Page from Analog Control Channel to Analog Voice Channel Operation 122 parameters used 122 pass fail limits used 124 CP Page from Analog Control Channel to Digital Traffic Channel Operation 128 parameters used 128 pass fail limits used 130 CP Page From Analog Control Channel to Narrow Analog Voice Channel Operation 125 CP Page from Analog Control Channel to Narrow Analog Voice Channel Op eration parameters used 125 pass fail limits used 127 CP Page from Digital Control Channel to Analog Voice Channel Operation 131 parameters used 132 pass fail limits used 134 CP Page from Digital Control Channel to Digital Traffic Channel Operation parameters used 135 pass fail limits used 137 CP Page from Digitsl Control Channel to Digital Traffic Channel Operation 135 CP Registration on Analog Control Channel Operation 118 parameters used 119 pass fail limits used 119 CP Registration on Digital Control Chan nel Operation 120 parameters used 121 pass fail limits used 121 CP Release to Analog Control Channel Operation 162 parameters used 162 pass fail limits used 163 CP Release to Digital Control Channel Operation 164 parameters used 164 pass fail limits used 166 CRT VIDEO OUTPUT connector 35 cursor defined 346 CURSOR CONTROL keys 40 cursor control knob defined 346 Customizing Testing 94 customizing testing overall processes 94 Index D damage equipment 67 Test System 67 DAMPS
310. utput level is measured at input levels below the 0 dB reference level see figure 32 on page 232 The output voltage tolerance should be within the pass fail limits specifications The values are entered as decimal numbers as upper and lower limits and in dB Pass fail limits specifications are determined using any applicable standard such as e EIA TIA Standard Expandor Example If you determine that the output voltage tolerance below the 0 dB reference level should be 2 dB enter 2 as the lower limit and 2 as the upper limit 231 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 F me e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions RXA Expandor Figure 32 232 o So RELATIVE OUTPUT VOLT AGE dB Y gt is gt S I D Pad S m x ke 5 a Q e 5 2 amp m 8 v kHz PEAK FREQUENCY DEVIATION 10 COMPANDOR ZERO CROSSING DEVIATION 2 9 kHz 20 LOG 20 30 40 Expandor Tracking Error Expandor Tracking Error gt 0 dB This specification sets the pass fail limits used when the expandor s output level is measured at input levels above the 0 dB reference level see figure 32 The output voltage tolerance should be within the pass fail limits specifications The values are entered as decimal numbers as upper and lower limits and in dB Pass fail limits specifications are determined using any applicable standard such as e EIA TIA Standard Expandor Ex
311. utting the cellular telephone in service and originating a call from the handset Specifically in this Operation the Test System does the following 1 Simulates a control channel 2 Prompts you to dial any telephone number as many as 10 digits after the cellular telephone has service Service is indicated by the cellular telephone NO SERVICE indicator extinguishing or the SERVICE indicator lighting 3 Performs 3 of 5 majority voting on the Reverse Control Message 4 Performs Bose Chaudhuri Hocquenghem BCH error detection and correction of the Reverse Control Message Wideband data 5 Sends an Initial Voice Channel Designation order to the cellular telephone directing it to tune to the voice channel specified in the Channels field of the TESTS Set Up screen 6 Makes a supervisory audio tone SAT measurement on the initial voice channel to verify that the voice channel was obtained The SAT measurement result is not displayed in this Operation It is not necessary to register the cellular telephone with the Test System by running a Registration Operation before running this Operation This Operation will read the cellular telephone s Mobile Identification Number MIN and the Test System will retain it for use in performing other tests The parameters used in the CP Origination from Digital Control Channel to Analog Voice Channel Operation are SAT Tone 5970 6000 or 6030 Hz Analog Voice Channel Power Level 0 7
312. vel and operating range For every 1 dB change in input level there should be a nominal output level change of 2 dB Expandor response is expressed in dBV for the zero reference level and in dB for the tracking error over the indicated operating range Specifically in this Operation the Test System does the following 1 Measures the expandor response at a 1 kHz rate and an RF input level of 50 dBm 2 Applies a 2 9 kHz 1 5 kHz for narrow analog operation deviation and measures the zero crossing of the receiver This value is retained as the reference level 3 The input is varied from the start level specified in the Expandor Start Level parameter to the stop level specified in the Expandor Stop Level parameter in increments as specified in the Expandor Step Level parameter 4 Deviation is varied over the range and the expandor response relative to the zero crossing point is calculated An expandor is used to provide the complement of the compressor in the cell site transmitter Together the compressor and expandor provide improved signal to noise ratio in the demodulated audio The parameters used in the RXA Expandor Operation are Expandor Start Level 21 to 12 3 dB Expandor Step Level 0 to 33 3 dB Expandor Stop Level 21 to 12 3 dB These parameters are described in the following paragraphs 229 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 F me e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation D
313. w the Parameter Number field see figure 18 on page 59 figure 19 on page 59 figure 20 on page 60 figure 21 on page 60 and figure 22 on page 61 This field is a variable type and changes according to the kind of value For instance if the value is a toggle the field is represented as a toggle if the value is a numeric quantity it is represented as such It can be any of the four following types dependent upon the specific parameter Choices see figure 19 on page 59 Toggle see figure 20 on page 60 Numerical Entry Float see figure 21 on page 60 or Integer see figure 22 on page 61 The definitions are self explanatory Selecting the available field allows you to set the appropriate value Chapter 2 Product Description Tests Subsystem TESTS Default Porameters Defaults ore applied to all tests unless changed in the TESTS Specific Porameters screen GEH Modify ition Par ers Description alue Units B System Type DAMP S Connection Port RF In Out Coble Loss 0 6000 Units for Power Measurement Print Opt s M aLIMsPF Figure 18 TESTS Default Parameters Screen m TESTS Default Porometers Defaults are applied to all tests unless changed in the TESTS Specific Porameters screen CP Ori a iaag AVE Choices U fe Qa c O o o o me e 3 Units Hz Analogs Voice Channel Power Level 0 Figure 19 TESTS Default Parameters Screen Showi
314. wer Level 0 10 This parameter allows you to specify the power level at which the cellular telephone will transmit when it is operated on a digital traffic channel The value is entered as an integer in the range 0 through 10 Example If you wish to use power level 10 enter 10 Cellular Digital Traffic Channel Vocoder VSELP A CELP This parameter allows you to specify the type of speech decoding used during cellular digital traffic channel transmission If the firmware revision in the HP 8920B is B 05 00 or later this parameter is used when performing tests on IS 136 capable cellular telephones Example Two selections are provided in a one of many format VSELP or ACELP Selecting VSELP causes the Test System to use Vector Sum Excited Linear Predictive coding VSELP Selecting ACELP causes the Test System to use Algebraic Code Excited Linear Predictive coding ACELP Pass Fail Limits Used 164 No pass fail limits specifications are used in the CP Handoff from Digital Traffic Channel to Digital Traffic Channel Operation Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions CP Handoff from Digital Traffic Channel to Analog Voice Channel CP Handoff from Digital Traffic Channel to Analog Voice Channel NOTE Parameters Used This Operation performs an explicit handoff from a digital traffic channel Operation on a telephone channel to an analog voice channel Operation on the same or another telephone channel For information on exp
315. xpressed as a percentage There are two groups of sinusoidal high and low frequencies consisting of 1209 1336 and 1477 Hz high tones or HT s in one group and 609 770 and 941 Hz low tones or LT s in the other group A DTMF signal is generated when a telephone handset key is pressed Each dialing key makes use of one assigned frequency from each group The DTMF signal is encoded and transmitted for control purposes when dialing an origination from the cellular telephone No parameters are used in the TXA Dual Tone Multiple Frequency Key Pad amp Dual Tone Multiple Frequency Frequency Error Operation 189 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 2 z pei e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXA Dual Tone Multiple Frequency Key Pad and Dual Tone Multiple Frequency Frequency Error Pass Fail Limits Used 190 One pass fail limits specification is used in the TXA Dual Tone Multiple Frequency Key Pad amp Dual Tone Multiple Frequency Error Operation It is DTMF Frequency Error This specification is described in the following paragraphs DTMF Frequency Error This specification sets the pass fail limits for the amount of frequency error allowed for the DTMF Dual Tone Multiple Frequency signals The values are entered as decimal numbers as upper and lower limits and as a percentage Pass fail limits specifications are determined using any applicable standard such as e EIA TIA Standar
316. xternal Devices to switch to the TESTS External Devices screen 3 Move the cursor to the Calling Name field select it and enter DATA C O Check the Model field which should be empty because it is not used O Check the Addr address field to make certain that the correct address is entered for the data storage location 1 If data are to be stored on an SRAM card enter 1 into the Addr field 2 If data are to be stored on an external computer through the Test Set RS 232 serial port if available enter 9 into the Addr field 3 Ifdata are to be stored on an external disk drive over the HP IB enter an address of 700 or greater into the Addr field O Check the Options field to make certain that it is correctly set up 1 For an external disk drive LIF format or an SRAM card a Enter ASCII for saving data as an ASCII file b Enter BDAT for saving data as a Binary Data file c As an option you may enter REC xxx where xxx is the number of records for each file The software defaults to 80 records However if too small a record size is used an End of file error will display when the test is run 2 Fora DOS disk drive you may keep the Options field empty or you may enter any of the following key words a Enter ASCII for saving data as an ASCII file b Enter BDAT for saving data as a Binary Data file c Enter REC xxx for the file record size where xxx is the number of records for each file
317. y 10 Burst 233 TXD RF Power Output 259 TXD RF Power Output vs Channel Plotted 265 TXD Time Alignment 270 part numbers memory card battery 322 SRAM Memory Cards 322 pass number 88 pass fail limits change 31 default values 103 description 103 editing 92 general description 99 printing 103 327 saving 103 securing 87 specifying values 99 verifying 92 Pass Fail Limits Specifications 103 pass fail limits specifications defined 351 Pass Fail Limits Used CP Handoff from Analog Voice Chan nel to Analog Voice Channel 149 CP Handoff from Analog Voice Chan nel to Digital Traffic Channel 153 CP Handoff from Digital Traffic Chan nel to Analog Voice Channel 161 CP Handoff from Digital Traffic Chan nel to Digital Traffic Channel 159 CP Handoff from Narrow Analog Voice Channel to Analog Voice Channel 155 157 CP Hook Flash 167 CP Origination from Analog Control Channel to Analog Voice Channel 139 CP Origination from Analog Control Channel to Digital Traffic Channel 143 CP Origination from Digital Control Channel to Analog Voice Channel 145 CP Origination from Digital Control Channel to Digital Traffic Channel 147 CP Originaton from Analog Control Channel to Narrow Analog Voice Channel 141 CP Page from Analog Control Channel to Analog Voice Channel 124 CP Page from Analog Control Channel to Digital Traffic Channel 130 CP Page from Analog Control Channel to Narrow Analog Voice Channel 127
318. y This feature allows you to test the cellular telephone repetitively at a particular frequency TX Audio Stop Frequency 300 3000 Hz This parameter allows you to specify the stop frequency to be used in varying the input signal frequency in cellular telephone audio frequency response testing The value is entered as a real number in Hz in the range 300 3000 Example If you wish to vary the modulation frequency stopping at a frequency of 2800 Hz enter 2800 Pass Fail Limits Used 176 The pass fail limits specifications used in the TXA Audio Frequency Response Operation are Deviation from 6 dB octave Response Roll gt 2 5 kHz These specifications are described in the following paragraphs Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXA Audio Frequency Response Deviation from 6 dB octave This specification sets the pass fail limits used for the degree of closeness with which the frequency deviation of the transmitter follows the prescribed 6 dB octave pre emphasis characteristic curve The values are entered in decimal numbers as upper and lower limits and in dB Pass fail limits specifications are determined using any applicable standard such as e EIA TIA Standard Transmit Audio Response Example If you wish to specify that from 300 to 3000 Hz the audio frequency response should not vary more than 1 dB and 3 dB from a true 6 dB octave pre emphasis curve enter 1 as the lower limit and 3 as the upper li
319. y deviation measurements of the DSAT sequence transmitted by the cellular telephone on a narrow voice channel The values are entered as decimal numbers as upper and lower limits Pass fail limits specifications are determined using any applicable standard such as e TIA Standard Sub Audible Data Example If the standard states that the peak frequency deviation for the DSAT sequence must be 700 Hz with a 10 percent tolerance enter 630 as the lower limit and 770 as the upper limit Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXA Dual Tone Multiple Frequency Key Pad and Dual Tone Multiple Frequency Frequency Error TXA Dual Tone Multiple Frequency Key Pad and Dual Tone Multiple Frequency Frequency Error Background Parameters Used This Operation measures the cellular telephone transmitter s Dual Tone Multiple Frequency DTMF frequency error for the cellular telephone s key pad The low tone LT and high tone HT DTMF frequencies for each selected key are checked to make certain that the frequencies are within the DTMF frequency error limits for the nominal values The Test Software displays on the Test Set s screen a series of underscore marks one for each DTMF telephone key You may press the cellular telephone keys in any order and as you press the each key the Test Software will display the number or symbol above the associated underscore thus marking the keys that you have pressed DTMF frequency error is e
320. y response measurement is made with the rms detector and is made with respect to a 1 kHz reference rate The parameters used in the TXA Audio Frequency Response Operation are TX Audio Start Frequency 300 3000 Hz TX Audio Step Frequency 0 2700 Hz TX Audio Stop Frequency 300 3000 Hz 175 O pe o o e 3 is D 77 F me e Ss 77 Chapter 4 Operation Descriptions TXA Audio Frequency Response NOTE These parameters are described in the following paragraphs TX Audio Start Frequency 300 3000 Hz This parameter allows you to specify the start frequency to be used in varying the input signal frequency in cellular telephone audio frequency response testing The value is entered as a real number in Hz in the range 300 3000 Example If you wish to vary the modulation frequency starting at a frequency of 1200 Hz enter 1200 TX Audio Step Frequency 0 2700 Hz This parameter allows you to specify the step size used to vary the input signal frequency in cellular telephone audio frequency response testing The value is entered as a real number in the range 0 2700 in Hz Example If you wish to vary the modulation frequency from a start frequency to a stop frequency in 500 Hz steps enter 500 If you specify a step frequency of 0 the Test System performs the Operation at the specified start frequency then performs the Operation again and again indefinitely until you stop it manuall
321. ying 96 channels narrow 96 parts of test suite 47 Chassis Ground connector 40 Choices 4 defined 346 choose 4 clock error 302 Clr Scr 342 common processes 79 listing 79 using 79 Components Test System 20 compressor track error 176 compressor zero reference deviation 176 configuration for data collection 307 358 for terminal or PC operation 315 power supply 178 Configuring an HP IB Power Supply 178 configuring an IBM compatible PC with HP AdvanceLink 312 Configuring the Rear Panel DC Current Measurement 179 Connect defined 346 connecting a printer 328 connections 23 audio 71 equipment 23 Hewlett Packard printers 70 parallel printer 329 RJ 11 connector 328 serial printer 328 to cellular telephone 69 to printer 70 to various equipment 67 connector 10 MHz REF INPUT 37 Chassis Ground 40 CRT VIDEO OUTPUT 35 DUPLEX OUT 36 EXT SCOPE TRIGGER INPUT 36 MIC ACC 36 Parallel Port 40 RADIO INTERFACE 36 RF IN OUT 36 connectors 10 MHz REF OUTPUT 37 ANT IN 35 AUDIO IN HI 35 AUDIO IN LO 35 AUDIO MONITOR OUTPUT 35 AUDIO OUT 35 DC CURRENT MEASUREMENT 35 DC INPUT 35 HP IB 36 MODULATION INPUT 36 SERIAL PORT 37 Continue 342 defined 346 control channel defined 346 control knob Index CURSOR CONTROL 40 SQUELCH 40 VOLUME 40 Conventions 4 COPY IBASIC command 305 copying files 305 CP Call Processing 102 CP Handoff from Analog Voice Channel to Analog Voic

HP 11807E, Option 014 AMPS/NAMPS/DAMPS/DCCH

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents